Tamanna

Chaudhary
 Electric Charges and Fields

1. A polythene piece, rubbed with wool, is found to have negative charge of 4 × 10!" C. the number of
electrons transferred from wool to polythene is
a) 1.5 × 10#$ b) 2.5 × 10#$ c) 2.5 × 10#% d) 3.5 × 10#%
2. The intensity of electric field at a point between the plates of a charged capacitor
a) Is directly proportional to the distance between the plates
b) Is inversely proportional to the distance between the plates
c) Is inversely proportional to the square of the distance between the plates
d) Does not depend upon the distance between the plates
3. Three charges – 𝑞# , +𝑞$ and −𝑞% are placed as shown in figure. The 𝑥 component of the force on – 𝑞# is
proportional to

& & & & &! & & &

a) '!! − '"! sin θ b) '!! − '"! cos θ c) '!
+ '"! sin θ d) '!! + '"! cos θ
4. According to Gauss’ Theorem, electric field of an infinitely long straight wire is proportional to
a) 𝑟 b) 1/𝑟 $ c) 1/𝑟 % d) 1/𝑟
5. Three charges each of + 1µC are placed at the corners of an equilateral triangle. If the force between any
two charges be F, then the net force on either charge will be
a) √2 𝐹 b) 𝐹√3 c) 2F d) 3F
6. Two point charge −𝑞 and +𝑞/2 are situated at the origin and at the point (𝑎, 0,0) respectively. The point
along the 𝑋-axis where the electric field vanishes is
𝑎 √2𝑎 √2𝑎
a) 𝑥 = b) 𝑥 = √2𝑎 c) 𝑥 = d) 𝑥 =
√2 √2 − 1 √2 + 1
7. A ring of radius 𝑟 carries a charge 𝑄 uniformly distributed over its length. A charge 𝑞 is placed at its centre
will experience a force equal to
𝑞𝑄 𝑞𝑄 c) Zero d) None of these
a) $ b) %
4𝜋𝜀( 𝑟 8𝜋𝜀( 𝑟
8. In the given figure two tiny conducting balls of identical mass 𝑚 and identical charge 𝑞 hang from non-
conducting threads of equal length 𝐿. Assume that 𝜃 is so small that tan 𝜃 ≈ sin 𝜃, then for equilibrium 𝑥 is
equal to

q q

L L

q x q
# # # #
$ $ $ $ $
a) e 𝑞 𝐿 g b) e 𝑞𝐿 g c) e 𝑞 𝐿 g d) e 𝑞 𝐿 g
" " " "

2𝜋𝜀( 𝑚𝑔 2𝜋𝜀( 𝑚𝑔 4𝜋𝜀( 𝑚𝑔 4𝜋𝜀( 𝑚𝑔

9. Charge 𝑞$ of mass 𝑚 revolves around a stationary charge 𝑞# in a circular orbit of radius 𝑟. The orbital
periodic time of 𝑞$ would be
#/$ #/$
4𝜋 % 𝑚𝑟 $
#/$ 𝑘𝑞# 𝑞$ #/$ 4𝜋 $ 𝑚𝑟 * 4𝜋 $ 𝑚𝑟 $
a) h j b) k4𝜋 $ 𝑚𝑟 $ l c) h 𝑘𝑞 𝑞 j d) h 𝑘𝑞 𝑞 j
𝑘𝑞# 𝑞$ # $ # $

10. A hollow cylinder has a charge 𝑞 coulomb within it. If 𝜙 is the electric flux in units of 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡 − 𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟
associated with the curved surface 𝐵, the flux linked with the plane surface 𝐴 in units of 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡 − 𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟 will
be

1 𝑞 𝑞 𝜙 𝑞
a) v − 𝜙x b) c) d) −𝜙
2 ∈( 2 ∈( 3 ∈(
11. Two small conducting spheres of equal radius have charges +10 𝜇𝐶 and −20𝜇𝐶 respectively and placed at
a distance 𝑅 from each other experience force 𝐹# . If they are brought in contact and separated to the same
distance, they experience force 𝐹$ . The ratio of 𝐹# to 𝐹$ is
a) 1 : 8 b) −8: 1 c) 1 : 2 d) −2: 1
%+
12. The electric field at a distance from the centre of a charged conducting spherical shell of radius 𝑅 is 𝐸.
$
+
The electric field at a distance $ from the centre of the sphere is
a) Zero 𝐸 𝐸
b) 𝐸 c) d)
2 3
13. The unit of intensity of electric field is
a) 𝑁𝑒𝑤𝑡𝑜𝑛/𝐶𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑜𝑚𝑏 b) 𝐽𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑒/𝐶𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑜𝑚𝑏 c) 𝑉𝑜𝑙𝑡 − 𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑟𝑒 d) 𝑁𝑒𝑤𝑡𝑜𝑛/𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑟𝑒
14. An electric dipole is kept in non-uniform electric field. It experiences
a) A force and a torque b) A force but not a torque
c) A torque but not a torque d) Neither a force nor a torque
15. A metallic shell has a point charge ′𝑞′ kept inside its cavity. Which one of the following diagrams correctly
represents the electric lines of forces

a) b) c) d)
16. An electron enters in an electric field with its velocity in the direction of the electric lines of force. Then
a) The path of the electron will be a circle b) The path of the electron will be a parabola
c) The velocity of the electron will decrease d) The velocity of the electron will increase

17. Two equal charges are separated by a distance 𝑑. A third charge placed on a perpendicular bisector at 𝑥
distance will experience maximum coulomb force when
𝑑 𝑑 𝑑 𝑑
a) 𝑥 = b) 𝑥 = c) 𝑥 = d) 𝑥 =
√2 2 2√2 2√3
18. A simple pendulum of period 𝑇 has a metal bob which is negatively charged. If it is allowed to oscillate
above a positively charged metal plate, its period will
a) Remains equal to 𝑇 b) Less than 𝑇 c) Greater than 𝑇 d) Infinite
19. Figures below show regular hexagons, which charges at the vertices. In which of the following cases the
electric field at the centre is not zero
q q q –q

q q q q

q q q –q

2q 2q +qq
2q

q q q Q2q

2q 2q 2q aq
(3) (4)

a) 1 b) 2 c) 3 d) 4
20. A total charge 𝑄 is broken in two parts 𝑄# and 𝑄$ and they are placed at a distance 𝑅 from each other. The
maximum force of repulsion between them will occur, when
𝑄 𝑄 𝑄 2𝑄 𝑄 3𝑄 𝑄 𝑄
a) 𝑄$ = , 𝑄# = 𝑄 − b) 𝑄$ = , 𝑄# = 𝑄 − c) 𝑄$ = , 𝑄# = d) 𝑄# = , 𝑄$ =
𝑅 𝑅 4 3 4 4 2 2
21. A charge q is placed at the corner of a cube of side𝑎. The electric flux through the cube is
𝑞 𝑞 𝑞 𝑞
a) b) c) d)
𝜀( 3𝜀( 6𝜀( 8𝜀(
22. If Ea be the electric field strength of a short dipole at a point on its axial line and Ee that on equatorial line
at the same distance, then
a) Ee = 2Ea b) Ea = 2Ee c) Ea = Ee d) None of these
23. 𝑞# , 𝑞$ , 𝑞% and 𝑞* are point charges located at points as shown in the figure and 𝑆 is a spherical Gaussian
surface of radius 𝑅. Which of the following is true according to the Gauss’s law
S

q1 R
q4
q2 q3

𝑞# + 𝑞$ + 𝑞%
a) • •𝐸‘⃗# + 𝐸‘⃗$ + 𝐸‘⃗% “. 𝑑𝐴⃗ =
- 2𝜀(
(𝑞# + 𝑞$ + 𝑞% )
b) • •𝐸‘⃗# + 𝐸‘⃗$ + 𝐸‘⃗% “. 𝑑𝐴⃗ =
- 𝜀(
(𝑞# + 𝑞$ + 𝑞% + 𝑞* )
c) • •𝐸‘⃗# + 𝐸‘⃗$ + 𝐸‘⃗% “. 𝑑𝐴⃗ =
- 𝜀(
d) None of the above
24. The figure below shows the electric field lines due to two positive charges. The magnitudes 𝐸. , 𝐸/ and 𝐸0
of the electric fields at points 𝐴, 𝐵 and 𝐶 respectively are related as

a) 𝐸. > 𝐸/ > 𝐸0 b) 𝐸/ > 𝐸. > 𝐸0 c) 𝐸. = 𝐸/ > 𝐸0 d) 𝐸. > 𝐸/ = 𝐸0

25. An electron of mass 𝑚1 initially at rest moves through a certain distance in a uniform electric field in time
𝑡# . A proton of mass 𝑚2 also initially at rest takes time 𝑡$ to move through and equal distance in this
uniform electric field. Neglecting the effect of gravity, the ratio of 𝑡$ /𝑡# is nearly equal to
a) 1 #/$ #/$ d) 1836
b) •𝑚 /𝑚 “
2 1 c) •𝑚 /𝑚 “
1 2
26. Two charged spheres separated at a distance 𝑑 exert a force 𝐹 on each other. If they are immersed in a
liquid of dielectric constant 2, then what is the force (If all conditions are same)
𝐹
a) b) 𝐹 c) 2𝐹 d) 4𝐹
2
27. Infinite charges of magnitude 𝑞 each are lying at 𝑥 = 1,2,4,8 … 𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟 on X-axis. The value of intensity of
electric field at point 𝑥 = 0 due to these charges will be
a) 12 × 103 𝑞 𝑁/𝐶 b) Zero c) 6 × 103 𝑞 𝑁/𝐶 d) 4 × 103 𝑞 𝑁/𝐶
28. A spherical shell of radius 𝑅 has a charge+𝑞 units. The electric field due to the shell at a point
a) Inside is zero and varies as 𝑟 !# outside it b) Inside the constant and varies as 𝑟 !$ outside it
c) Inside is zero and varies as 𝑟 !$ outside it d) Inside is constant and varies as 𝑟 !# outside it
29. Two identical charged spheres suspended from a common point by two massless strings of length 𝑙 are
initially a distance 𝑑(𝑑 << 𝑙 ) apart because of their mutual repulsion. The charge begins to leak from
both the spheres at a constant rate. As a result charges approach each other with a velocity 𝑣 .Then as a
function of distance 𝑥 between them
a) 𝑣 ∝ 𝑥 !# b) 𝑣 ∝ 𝑥 #/$ c) 𝑣 ∝ 𝑥 d) 𝑣 ∝ 𝑥 !#/$
30. One of the following is not a property of field lines
a) Field lines are continuous curves without any breaks
b) Two field lines cannot cross each other
c) Field lines start at positive charge and end at negative charges
d) They form closed loop
31. Gauss’s law of electrostatics would be invalid if
a) There were magnetic monopoles b) The speed of light was not a universal constant
c) The inverse square law was not exactly true d) The electrical charge was not quantized
32. A charge 𝒬 is placed at each of the opposite corners of a square. A charge 𝑞 is placed at each of the other
𝒬
two corners. If the net electrical force on 𝒬 is zero, then the & eQuals
1
a) −2√2 b) −1 c) 1 d) −
√2
33. When the distance between the charged particles is halved, the force between them becomes
a) One-fourth b) Half c) Double d) Four times
34. Which of the following plots represents the variation of the electric field with distance from the centre of a
uniformly charged non-conducting sphere of radius 𝑅?

a) b) c) d)

35. A square surface of side 𝐿 𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑠 is in the plane of the paper. A uniform electric field 𝐸‘⃗ (𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡/𝑚), also in
the plane of the paper, is limited only to the lower half of the square surface, (see figure). The electric flux
is SI units associated with the surface is

a) Zero b) 𝐸𝐿$ c) 𝐸𝐿$ /(2𝜀( ) d) 𝐸𝐿$ /2

36. The magnitude of electric field intensity 𝐸 is such that, an electron placed in it would experience an
electrical force equal to its weight is given by
𝑚𝑔 𝑒 𝑒$
a) 𝑚𝑔𝑒 b) c) d) 𝑔
𝑒 𝑚𝑔 𝑚$
37. A simple pendulum has a length 𝑙 and the mass of the bob is 𝑚. The bob is given a charge 𝑞 coulomb. The
pendulum is suspended between the vertical plates of a charged parallel plate capacitor. If 𝐸 is the electric
field strength between the plates, the time period of the pendulum is given by
1
a) 2𝜋
g

𝑙
2𝜋
b) ¡ &5
¢g +
6

𝑙
2𝜋
c) ¡ &5
¢g −
6

𝑙
2𝜋
d) ¡ $
¢g $ + £&5¤
6
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :
1 (b) #/$
*=" 6? !
𝑇=¨ ©
𝑞 4 × 10!" 7&# &!
𝑛= = = 2.5 × 10#$ 10 (a)
𝑒 1.6 × 10!#3
2 (d) 𝑞
𝜙@ABCD = 𝜙. + 𝜙/ + 𝜙0 = ;
Electric field between the plates of parallel plate ∈(
capacitor is uniform and it doesn’t depend upon ∵ 𝜙/ = 𝜙 and 𝜙. = 𝜙0 = 𝜙 E [assumed]
distance 𝑞 1 𝑞
∴ 2𝜙 E + 𝜙 = ⇒ 𝜙 E = v − 𝜙x
3 (c) ∈( 2 ∈(
Force on – 𝑞# due to 𝑞$ is 11 (b)
𝐹# 𝑄# 𝑄$ 10 × −20 8
𝐹$ = $%&#!%! along X-axis 𝐹 ∝ 𝑄# 𝑄$ ⇒ = E E = = −
𝐹$ 𝑄# 𝑄$ −5 × −5 1
Force on – 𝑞# due to – 𝑞$ is
7&# &" 12 (a)
𝐹#% = 8!
at ∠θ With negative direction of Y- Electric field inside shell is zero
axis. 13 (a)
∴ 𝑥 component of force on – 𝑞# is
& &
𝐹9 = 𝐹#$ + 𝐹#% sin θ = 𝑘𝑞# ¨ '!! + 8"! sin θ© 14 (a)
& & As the dipole will feel two forces which are
𝑖𝑒, 𝐹9 ∝ ¨ '!! + 8"! sin θ©
although opposite but not equal.
4 (d) ∴ A net force will be there and as these forces act
𝜆 1 at different points of a body. A torque is also
𝑒= ⇒𝐸∝
2𝜋𝜀( 𝑟 𝑟 present
5 (b) 15 (c)
Angle between two forces due to individual Electric field is perpendicular to the equipotential
charges is equal to 600 surface and is zero every where inside the metal
∴ 𝑅 = -𝐹 $ + 𝐹 $ + 2𝐹 𝐹 cos 60( = 𝐹√3 16 (c)
6 (c) Because electric field applies the force on electron
in the direction opposite to it’s motion
17 (c)
Suppose third charge is similar to 𝑄 and it is 𝑞
So net force on it
𝐹F1G = 2𝐹 cos 𝜃
F F
Suppose the field vanishes at distance 𝑥, we have q q
7& 7&/$ $ $
9!
= (9!8)!
or 2(𝑥 − 𝑎) = 𝑥 or √2(𝑥 − 𝑎) = 𝑥 q

√$8
qq
or •√2 − 1“𝑥 = √2𝑎 or 𝑥 = £ ¤ x
√$!#
7 (c)
The electric field (E) at the centre of circular Q Q
charged ring of radius 𝑅 is zero B C

∴ Force = 𝑞𝐸 = Zero
# H& 9
8 (a) Where 𝐹 = *=> . (!
and cos 𝜃 = !
' I9 ! J K L9 ! J(
) )
1 𝑄𝑞 𝑥
9 (a) ∴ 𝐹F1G = 2 × . ×
4𝜋𝜀( £𝑥 $ + M! ¤ M ! #/$
1 𝑞# 𝑞$ 4𝜋 $ 𝑚𝑟 $ * £𝑥 $ + *
¤
$
= 𝑚𝑟𝜔 = 2𝑄𝑞𝑥
4𝜋𝜀( 𝑟 $ 𝑇$
=
(*=>' )? ! (*=! 6?) M ! %/$
𝑇$ = &# &!
4𝜋𝜀( £𝑥 $ + ¤
*

Page|6
 MN*+, 21 (d)
For 𝐹F1G to be maximum =0
M9
If charge q is placed at a corner of cube, it will be
𝑑 2𝑄𝑞𝑥 divided into 8 such cubes. Therefore, electric flux
𝑖. 𝑒. ´ µ=0
𝑑𝑥 M ! %/$ through the cube is
$
4𝜋𝜀( £𝑥 + ¤
*
!%/$ !O/$ 1 𝑞
M! M! ϕE = v x
or h£𝑥 $ + *
¤ − 3𝑥 $ £𝑥 $ + *
¤ j=0 8 ε(
𝑑
𝑖. 𝑒. 𝑥 = ± 22 (b)
2√2 1
18 (b) 𝐸1 = 𝐸8 ∴ 𝐸8 = 2𝐸1
2
When a negatively charged pendulum oscillates 23 (b)
over a positively charged plate then effective By using ∫ 𝐸‘⃗ . ‘‘‘‘‘⃗
#
𝑑𝐴 = [𝑄1FQ ]
>'
#
value of 𝑔 increases so according to 𝑇 = 2𝜋¢P , 𝑇 24 (a)
decreases
19 (b) 25 (b)
15 15
Electric field at a point due to positive charge acts For electron 𝑠 = 6 × 𝑡#$ , For proton 𝑠 = 6 × 𝑡$$
+ -
away from the charge and due to negative charge $
it act’s towards the charge 𝑡$ 𝑚2 𝑡$ 𝑚2 𝑚2 #/$
∴ $= ⇒ = =v x
𝑡# 𝑚1 𝑡# 𝑚1 𝑚1
q q
E E
q
E
q Þ Enet = 0 26 (a)
E
E 1 𝐹CRS
E 𝐹∝ 𝑖. 𝑒. =𝐾
q q 𝐾 𝐹TUVRWT
q –q 27 (a)
2E & # # #
q E E Net field at origin 𝐸 = *=> ¨#! + $! + *! + … . ∞©
120o '
qÞ
E E
E 2E 𝑞 1 1
E 2E = [1 + + + … . ∞]
q –q 4𝜋𝜀( 4 16
Enet = 2E

2q
𝑞 1
2q = ¼ ½ = 12 × 103 𝑞 𝑁/𝐶
2E 4𝜋𝜀( 1 − #
E 2E *
q q Þ Enet = 0
E 28 (c)
2E
2E
2q 2q
2q q
E
2E E E
q 2q Þ
2E E 2E 2E
E 2E
2q q
Enet = 0

The electric field due to the spherical shell at

point +𝑃.

1 𝑞
20 (d) 𝐸= . (∵ 𝑟 > 𝑅)
4𝜋𝜀( 𝑟 $
H# H!
𝑄# + 𝑄$ = 𝑄 …(i) and 𝐹 = 𝑘 ?!
…(ii)
1
From (i) and (ii) 𝐹 =
7H# (H!H# ) or 𝐸 ∝
?! 𝑟$
MN H
For 𝐹 to be maximum MH = 0 ⇒ 𝑄# = 𝑄$ = $ or 𝐸 ∝ 𝑟 !$
#

Page|7
 According to Gauss’s law inside the shell electric Resultant on 𝒬 becomes zero only when 𝑞 charges
field is zero. are of negative nature.

1 𝒬×𝒬
𝑖𝑒, • 𝑬. 𝒅𝒔 = 0 𝐹*$ =
4𝜋𝜀( •√2𝑑“$

or 𝐸 = 0 MH 𝒬×H
⇒ √2 M! =
$M !
the electric field due to the shell at a point inside
is zero and varies as 𝑟 !$ outside it.

29 (d)
At an instants
𝑇 cos θ = 𝑚g . . (i)
𝑇 sinθ = 𝐹1 … (ii)
78 !
= 9!
𝒬×𝒬
√2 × q =
2
𝒬
∴𝑞=
2√2
𝒬
or = −2√2
𝑞
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we have
78 ! 33 (d)
=𝑚g tan 𝜃
9! #
𝑚g 𝑥 $ 𝑎 𝐹 ∝ ? ! ; so when 𝑟 is halved the force becomes
⟹ 𝑞$ = 𝑥 £tan𝜃 ≈ ¤
𝑘 2𝑙 2𝑙 four times
𝑚g
⟹ 𝑞$ = 𝑥% … (iii) 34 (d)
2𝑘𝑙
𝑑𝑞 3𝑚g $ 𝑑𝑥 The electric field intensity at a point lying outside
⟹ 2𝑞 = 𝑥 the sphere (non-conducting) is
𝑑𝑡 2𝑘𝑙 𝑑𝑡
#
𝑚g % ! 𝑑𝑞 3𝑚g $ 1 𝑞
⟹ 2£ 𝑥 ¤ = 𝑥 𝑣 𝐸=
2𝑘𝑙 𝑑𝑡 2𝑘𝑙 4𝜋𝜀( 𝑟 $
#
𝑚g % !
Ã∵ 𝑞 = £ 𝑥 ¤Ä Where 𝑟 is the distance of that point from centre
2𝑘𝑙
of sphere.
⟹ 𝑣𝑥 #/$ =constant
⟹ 𝑣 ∝ 𝑥 !#/$ 1
30 (d) 𝐸∝ … . (𝑖)
𝑟$
Electric field lines do not form closed loop. This
follows from the conservative nature of electric The electric field intensity at surface of sphere
field 𝑞
31 (c) 𝐸=
4𝜋𝜀( 𝑅$
Gauss’s law is based on the inverse square
dependence on distance contained in the Or
Coulomb’s law. Any violation of Gauss’s law will
1
indicate departure from the inverse square law 𝐸∝ … . (ii)
𝑅$
32 (a)
Three forces 𝐹*# , 𝐹*$ and 𝐹*% acting on 𝒬 as shown R, being the radius of sphere.
resultant of 𝐹*# + 𝐹*%
The electric field intensity at a point lying inside
1 𝒬𝑞 the sphere is
= √2𝐹 UCXY = √2
4𝜋𝜀( 𝑑$

Page|8
 𝑞𝑟
𝐸=
4𝜋𝜀( 𝑅%

Or 𝐸 ∝ 𝑟 … … . (iii)

Also at the centre of sphere r=0.

Hence,

The graphical distribution is shown below

𝑙
𝑇 = 2𝜋
g

When it is suspended between vertical plates of a

charged parallel plate capacitor, then acceleration
due to electric field,

𝑞𝐸
𝑎=
35 (a) 𝑚
‘‘‘‘⃗
Electric flux, 𝜙5 = ∫ 𝐸‘⃗ . 𝑑𝑆 This acceleration is acting horizontally and
= Å 𝐸𝑑𝑆 cos 𝜃 = Å 𝐸𝑑𝑆 cos 90° = 0 acceleration due to gravity is acting vertically. So
effective acceleration.
The lines are parallel to the surface
36 (b)
6P E
𝑞𝐸 $
According to the question, 𝑒𝐸 = 𝑚𝑔 ⇒ 𝐸 = g = -g $ + a$ = g$ +v x
1 𝑚
37 (d)
Time period of simple pendulum in air Hence,

1
𝑇 E = 2𝜋
¡ $
¢g $ + £&5 ¤
6

Page|9
 Electric Potential and Capacitance
1. What is the potential difference between points 𝐴 and 𝐵 in the circuit shown?

a) 2 V b) 4 V c) 3 V d) 12 V
2 A square of side 𝑎has charge 𝒬at its centre and charge q at one of the corners. The work required to be
done in moving the charge q from the corner to the diagonally opposite corner is
a) Zero 𝒬𝑞 𝒬𝑞√2 𝒬𝑞
b) c) d)
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑎 4𝜋𝜀! 𝑎 2𝜋𝜀! 𝑎
3. In the arrangement of capacitors shown in figure, each capacitor is of 9 µF, Then the equivalent
capacitance between in points A and B is

a) 9 µF b) 18 µF c) 4.5 µF d) 15 µF
4. A slab of copper of thickness 𝑏 is inserted in between the plates of parallel plate capacitor as shown in
figure. The separation between the plates is 𝑑 if 𝑏 = 𝑑/2, then the ratio of capacities of capacitors after
and before inserting the slab will be
d

a) √2 : 1 b) 2 : 1 c) 1 : 1 d) 1 : √2
5. In bringing an electron towards another electron, the electrostatic potential energy of the system
a) Decreases b) Increases c) Remains same d) Becomes zero
6. 𝐶, 𝑉, 𝑈 and 𝑄 are capacitance, potential difference, energy stored and charge of a parallel plate capacitor
respectively. The quantities that increase when a dielectric slab is introduced between the plates without
disconnecting the battery are
a) 𝑉 and 𝐶 b) 𝑉 and 𝑈 c) 𝑈 and 𝑄 d) 𝑉 and 𝑄
7. Identify the wrong statement.
a) The electrical potential energy of a system of two protons shall increase if the separation between the
two is decreased.
b) The electrical potential energy of a proton-electron system will increase if the separation between the
two is decreased.
c) The electrical potential energy of a proton-electron system will increase if the separation between the
two is increased.
d) The electrical potential energy of system of two electrons shall increase if the separation between the
two is decreased.
8. A capacitor is charged to store an energy 𝑈. the charging battery is disconnected. An identical capacitor is
now connected to the first capacitor in parallel. The energy in each of the capacitor is
a) 3 𝑈/2 b) 𝑈 c) 𝑈/4 d) 𝑈/2
9. For the circuit shown in figure the charge on 4 µF capacitor is

1 F
4 F
3 F 5 F

+ -
10 V

a) 40 µC b) 30 µC c) 24 µC d) 54 µC
10. Two thin wire rings each having a radius R are placed at a distance 𝑑 apart with their axes coinciding. The
charges on the two rings are +q and –q. The potential difference between the centres of two rings is
𝑞𝑅 𝑞 1 1
a) " b) g − i
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑑 2𝜋𝜀! 𝑅 √𝑅" + 𝑑"
c) Zero 𝑞 1 1
d) g − i
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑅 √𝑅" + 𝑑"
11. Consider the arrangement of three metal plates A, B, and C of equal surface area and separation d as
shown in figure. The energy stored in the arrangement, when the plates are fully charged, is
A
d
- +
B
d V
C

!# "# $ 𝜀! 𝐴𝑉 " 2𝜀 𝐴𝑉 " 3𝜀 𝐴𝑉 "

a) b) c) ! d) !
$% 𝑑 𝑑 2𝑑
12. A dielectric of dielectric constant 𝐾 is introduced such that half of its area of a capacitor of capacitance 𝐶 is
occupied by it. The new capacity is
𝐶 (1 + 𝐾)𝐶
a) 2𝐶 b) c) d) 2𝐶(1 + 𝐾)
2 2

13. In the case of a charged metallic sphere, potential (V) changes with respect to distance(S) from the I as

a) b) c) d)
14. Two spheres of radii 𝑅% and 𝑅" joined by a fine wire are raised to a potential V. Let the surface charge
densities at these two spheres be σ% and σ" respectively. Then the ratio !!"# has a value
&& 𝑅" c) 1 𝑅 "
a) b) d) q " r
&$ 𝑅% 𝑅%
15. Charges 2𝑞, −𝑞 and – 𝑞 lie at the vertices of a triangle. The value of E and V at the centroid of equilateral
triangle will be
a) E ≠ 0 and V ≠ 0 b) E = 0 and V = 0 c) E ≠ 0 and V = 0 d) E = 0 and V ≠ 0
16. Two plates are 20 cm apart and the potential difference between them is 10 V. The electric field between
the plates is
a) 50 Vm'% b) 500 Vm'% c) 0.5 Vm'% d) 20 Vm'%
17. A hollow conducting sphere or radius R has a charge (+Q) on its surface. What is the electric potential
within the sphere at a distance r = R /3 from its I?
1 𝑄 1 𝑄 1 𝑄 d) Zero
a) . b) . " c) .
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑟 4𝜋𝜀! 𝑟 4𝜋𝜀! 𝑅
18. The electric potential V at any point 𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧 (all the metre) in space is given by 𝑉 = 4𝑥 " volt. The electric
field at the point (1m, 0, 2m) in Vm'% is
a) −8ı̇| b) +8ı̇| c) −16ı̇| d) 16k~
19. Two charged spheres of radii 𝑅% and 𝑅" having equal surface charge density. The ratio of their potential is
𝑅 " 𝑅 %
a) 𝑅% /𝑅" b) 𝑅" /𝑅% c) q % r d) q " r
𝑅" 𝑅%
20. A soap bubble is charged to a potential of 16V. Its radius is, then doubled. The potential of the bubble now
will be
a) 16V b) 8V c) 4V d) 2V
21. Consider three concentric shells of metal A, B and C are having radii a, b and c respectively as shown in the
figure (𝑎 < 𝑏 < 𝑐). Their surface charge densities are 𝜎, −𝜎 and 𝜎 respectively. Calculate the electric
potential on the surface of shell A

𝜎 𝜎 𝜎 𝜎
a) (𝑎 − 𝑏 + 𝑐) b) (𝑎 − 𝑏 − 𝑐) c) (𝑎" + 𝑏" + 𝑐 " ) d) (𝑎 + 𝑏 − 𝑐)
𝜀! 𝜀! 𝜀! 𝜀!
22. Two capacitors of capacitances 𝐶% and 𝐶" are connected in parallel across a battery. If 𝑄% and 𝑄"
respectively be the charges on the capacitors, then $$# will be equal to
"
(" (# (#" %"
a) (#
b) ("
c) (""
d) "
%"
#

23. A capacitor of capacitance 1 µF is filled with two dielectrics of dielectric constant 4 and 6. What is the new
capacitance?

a) 10 µF b) 5 µF c) 4 µF d) 7 µF
24. The equivalent capacitance of the combination of three capacitors, each of capacitance C shown in figure
between points A and B is

C1 C3
A B

C2

𝐶 3𝐶 1 d) 2C
a) b) c)
2 2 3𝐶
25. The energy stored in a capacitor is in the form of
a) Kinetic energy b) Potential energy c) Elastic energy d) Magnetic energy
26. A particle A has charge +𝑞 and particle B has charge +4𝑞 with each of them having the save mass 𝑚.
When allowed to fall from rest through the same electrical potential difference, the ration of their steeds
𝑣) /𝑣* will become
a) 2 : 1 b) 1 : 2 c) 1 : 4 d) 4 : 1
27. Three capacitors of capacitances 4 µF, 6 µF and 12 µF are connected first in series and then in parallel.
What is the ratio of equivalent capacitance in the two cases?
a) 2 : 3 b) 1 : 11 c) 11 : 1 d) 1 : 3
28. The ratio of momenta of an electron and proton which are accelerated from rest by a potential difference
50 V is
𝑚+ 𝑚+ 𝑚, 𝑚,
a) 𝑚 b) ˆ c) d) ˆ
, 𝑚, 𝑚+ 𝑚+
29. 27 small drops each having charge 𝑞 and radius 𝑟 coalesce to form big drop. How many times charge and
capacitance will become?
a) 3, 27 b) 27, 3 c) 27, 27 d) 3, 3
30. In the figure, a proton moves a distance d in a uniform electric field E as shown in the figure. Does the
electric field do a positive or negative work on the proton? Does the electric potential energy of the proton
increase or decrease?

a) Negative, increase b) Positive, decrease c) Negative, decrease d) Positive, increase

31. An air parallel plate capacitor has capacity 𝐶. The capacity and distance between plates are doubled when
immersed in a liquid then dielectric constant of the liquid is
a) 1 b) 2 c) 3 d) 4

32. Work done in carrying a charge 𝑄% once round a circle of radius 𝑅 with a charge 𝑄" at the center is
- - b) Zero 𝑄% 𝑄" d) Infinite
a) ./0# 1" " c)
' 4𝜋𝜀! 𝑅
33. Two parallel plate capacitors of capacitance 𝐶 and 2𝐶 are connected in parallel and charged to a potential
difference 𝑉! . The battery is then disconnected and the region between the plates of the capacitor 𝐶 is
completely filled with a material of dielectric constant 2. The potential difference across the capacitors
now becomes
𝐹 𝑉 3𝑉
a) ! b) ! c) ! d) 𝑉!
4 2 4
34. When two conductors of charges and potentials 𝐶% , 𝑉% and 𝐶" , 𝑉" respectively are joined, the common
potential will be
𝐶% 𝑉% + 𝐶" 𝑉" 𝐶% 𝑉%" + 𝐶" 𝑉"" 𝐶% 𝑉% + 𝐶" 𝑉"
a) b) " " c) 𝐶% + 𝐶" d)
𝑉% + 𝑉" 𝑉% + 𝑉" 𝐶% + 𝐶"
35. In which of the states shown in figure is the potential energy of a electric dipole maximum?

a) b) c) d)

36. The equivalent capacitance between 𝐴 and 𝐵 in figure is

3 F

A B
6 F 6 F

3 F

a) 4 µF b) 2 µF c) 10.5 µF d) 3 µF
37. A parallel plate air capacitor has a capacitance 18 µF.If the distance between the plates is trapled and a
dielectric medium is introduced, the capacitance becomes 72 𝜇F. The dielectric constant of the medium is
a) 4 b) 9 c) 12 d) 2

38. A parallel plate capacitor is made by stacking 𝑛 equally spaced plates connected alternatively. If the
capacitance between any two adjacent plates is 𝐶, then the resultant capacitance is
a) (𝑛 − 1)𝐶 b) (𝑛 + 1)𝐶 c) 𝐶 d) 𝑛𝐶
39. A parallel plate capacitor is charged. If the plates are pulled apart
a) The capacitance increases b) The potential difference increases
c) The total charge increases d) The charge and potential difference remain the
same
40. If dielectric constant and dielectric strength be denoted by 𝐾 and X respectively, then a material suitable
for use as a dielectric in a capacitor must have
a) High 𝐾 and high 𝑋 b) High 𝐾 and low 𝑋 c) Low 𝐾 and high 𝑋 d) Low 𝐾 and low 𝑋
41. The electric potential inside a conducting sphere
a) Increases from © to surface b) Decreases from © to surface
c) Remains constant from © to surface d) Is zero at every point inside
42. Two positive point charges of 12 µ C and 8 µC are placed 10 cm, apart in air. The work done to bring them
4 cm closer is
a) Zero b) 3.5 J c) 4.8 J d) 5.8 J
43. A charge q is fixed. Another charge 𝒬 is brought near it and rotated in a circle of radius r around it. Work
done during rotation is
a) Zero 𝒬𝑞 𝒬𝑞 d) None of these
b) c)
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑟 2𝜋𝜀! 𝑟
44. In the electric field of a point charge 𝑞, a certain point charges is carried from point A to B, C, D and E as
shown in figure. The work done is

a) Least along the path AE b) Least along the path AC

c) Zero along any one of the paths d) Least along AB
45. The capacitance 𝐶 of a capacitor is
a) Independent of the charge and potential of the capacitor
b) Dependent on the charge and independent of potential
c) Independent of the geometrical configuration of the capacitor
d) Independent of the dielectric medium between the two conducting surface of the capacitor
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :
1 (a) 𝑊
𝑉) − 𝑉* =
Consider the charge distribution as shown. 𝑞
Considering the branch on upper side, we have
Both work (W) and charge (q) are scalar
quantities hence potential difference (𝑉) −
𝑉* )will also be a scalar quantity.

Here,

1 𝒬
𝑉) = 𝑉* =
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑎/√2

Since, 𝒬is same for both,

𝑉) − 𝑉* = 0

𝑊=0
3 '5
4( '4)
= 4 × 10
𝑞
= 2 × 10'5
𝑉) − 𝑉6
Here, 𝑉7 = 6 volt, 𝑉6 = 0
3
∴ 5'4)
= 4 × 10'5
…(i)
3
4) '!
= 2 × 10'5
…(ii) 3 (d)
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get The arrangement can be redrawn as shown in the
4)
=2 adjoining figure.
5'4)
𝐶%9 = 𝐶% + 𝐶9 = 9 + 9 = 18µF
∴ 𝑉) = 4volt
𝐶" × 𝐶%9 9µF × 18µF
Similarly for the lower side branch 𝐶"'%9 = = = 6µF
38 𝐶" + 𝐶%9 (9 + 18)µF
= 2 × 10'5
5'4 * ∴ 𝐶 = 𝐶"'%9 + 𝐶. = 6µF × 9µF = 15µF.
…(iii) C2
38 C1
4* '!
= 4 × 10'5
A B
...(iv)
From Eqs. (iii) and (iv) C4 C3
4* %
5'4*
="
4 (b)
∴ 𝑉* = 2 volt 𝐴𝜀!
∴ 𝑉) − 𝑉* = 4 − 2 = 2 volt 𝐶=
𝑑
2 (a) After inserting the slab
The potential due to charge 𝑞 at distance 𝑟 is 𝐴𝜀! 𝐴𝜀!
𝐶8 = =
given by (𝑑 − 𝑏) 𝑑 − :
"
1 𝑞 ")0' (+ "
𝑉= 𝐶′ = :
∴ (
=%
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑟 5 (b)
If 𝑊 be the work done in moving the charge from Electrostatic potential energy of system of two
𝐴 to 𝐵 then the potential difference (𝑉) is given by electrons

Page|7
 1 (−𝑒)(−𝑒) 1 𝑒" 12 ©
𝑈= =
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑟 4𝜋𝜀! 𝑟 The dielectric is introduced such that, half of its
area is occupied by
Thus, as 𝑟 decreases, potential energy 𝑈 increases. It.
6 ©
When battery remains connected
𝐶 8 = 𝑘𝐶
𝑄8 = 𝑘𝑄
𝑉8 = 𝑉
𝐸8 = 𝐸
𝑈 8 = 𝑘𝑈
𝑈 and 𝑄 Both increases.
7 ©
Potential energy In the given case the two capacitors are in
𝑞% 𝑞" parallel.
𝑈= ∴ 𝐶 8 = 𝐶% + 𝐶"
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑟 )0'
𝐶% = ":
%
Or 𝑈 ∝ And 𝐶" =
>)0'
;
":
8 )0' >)0'
When 𝑟 decreases 𝑈 increases and 𝑣𝑖𝑐𝑒 − 𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑠𝑎. Thus, 𝐶 = +
": ":
Moreover, potential energy as well as force is 𝐶
𝐶 8 = (1 + 𝐾)
positive, if there is repulsion between the 2
particles and negative if there is attraction. 13 ©
If we take a charge from one point to another
8 © inside a charged spherical shell, then no work will
As battery is disconnected, total charge 𝑄 is be done. This means that inside a spherical charge
shared equally by two capacitors. Energy of each the potential at all points is the same and its value
capacitor is equal to that on the surface, that is
(𝑄/2)" 1 𝑄" 1
= = = 𝑈
2𝐶 4 2𝐶 4
9 ©
Combined capacity of 1 µF and 5µF = 1 + 5=6 µF
Now, 4µF and 6µF are in series.
1 1 1 3+2 5
∴ = + + =
𝐶< 4 6 12 12
12
𝐶< = µF
5
Charge in the arm containing 4µF capacitor is
%"
𝑞 = 𝐶< × 𝑉 = =
× 10 = 24 µC
1 𝑞
𝑉= volt
10 (b) 4𝜋𝜀! 𝑅

Also outside the metallic sphere

11 (b)
The arrangement behaves as a combination of 2 1 𝑞
0' ) 𝑉= .
capacitors each of capacitance 𝐶 = . 4𝜋𝜀! 𝑟
:
Thus, equivalent capacity = 2𝐶 1
∴ total energy stored 𝑈 = " ×
%
(2𝐶)𝑉 " "
= 𝐶𝑉 = 𝑉∝
𝑟
0' )
:
𝑉" 14 (a)

Page|8
 Since the two spheres are joined by a wire, their ª̇ Vm'%
¨⃗ = −8 × 1ı̇| = −8©
Ë
potential are equal 𝑖𝑒, 19 (b)
𝑞% 𝑞" 𝑞% 𝑅%
= ⇒ =
4πε! 𝑅% 4πε! 𝑅" 𝑞" 𝑅" 20 (b)
3
Now, 𝜎% = .?@#1" Potential on bubble,
' #
3"
And 𝜎" = .?@ " , 1 𝑞
' 1"
"
𝑉=
𝛔𝟐 𝛔𝟐 B#" B B 4𝜋𝜀! 𝑟
Hence = × = ¡B " ¢ ¡B # ¢
𝛔𝟏 𝛔𝟏 B"" # "
C" B# 𝑉% 𝑟"
⇒ =
C# B" ∴ =
𝑉" 𝑟%
15 ©
The potential due to charge q at a distance 𝑟 is 16 2
⟹ = ⟹ 𝑉" = 8 𝑉
given by 𝑉" 1

1 𝑞 21 (a)
𝑉=
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑟 The electric potential on the surface of shell 𝐴

Since, potential is a scalar quantity, it can be

added to find the sum due to individual charges.

∑𝑉 = 𝑉) + 𝑉* + 𝑉(

1 2𝑞
𝑉) = .
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑥

1 𝑞 𝑉) = 𝑉D + 𝑉E + 𝑉F
𝑉* = − .
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑥 1 𝑞D 1 𝑞E 1 𝑞F
𝑉) = . + + + .
1 𝑞 4𝜋𝜀! 𝑎 4𝜋𝜀! 𝑏 4𝜋𝜀! 𝑐
𝑉( = − .
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑥
Or
1 2𝑞 𝑞 𝑞
∴ 𝑉= q − − r=0 1 4𝜋𝑎" 𝜎 1 4𝜋𝑏" (−𝜎)
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑥 𝑥 𝑥 𝑉) = . + .
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑎 4𝜋𝜀! 𝑏
Electric field is a vector quantity, hence 1 4𝜋𝑐 " 𝜎
+ .
component along 𝑂𝐷 is taken 4𝜋𝜀! 𝑐

1 2𝑞 2𝑞 (∵ 𝑞 = 4𝜋𝑟 " 𝜎)
𝐸= q + cos θr ≠ 0
4𝜋𝜀! 𝑥 " 𝑥 "
𝜎
or 𝑉) = (𝑎 − 𝑏 + 𝑐)
16 (a) 𝜀!
Potential gradient relates with electric field
:4
according to the relation,𝐸 = − :;
10 22 (b)
=− = 50 Vm'%
20 × 10'" In parallel, potential is same, say 𝑉
17 © 𝑄% 𝐶% 𝑉 𝐶%
Electric potential inside the hollow conducting = =
𝑄" 𝐶" 𝑉 𝐶"
sphere is constant and equal to potential at the 23 (b)
-
surface of the sphere = ./0 1. Initially, the capacitance of capacitor
'
18 (a)
∵ 𝑉 = 4𝑥 "
ª̇
¨⃗ = − :4 = −8𝑥©
Hence, Ë
:;
¨⃗ at (1m, 0, 2m) will be
Hence, value of Ë
Page|9
 Linear momentum of photon, 𝑝, = ®2𝑚, 𝑒𝑉

𝑝+ ®2𝑚+ 𝑒𝑉
=
𝑝, ®2𝑚, 𝑒𝑉

𝜀! 𝐴 𝑝+ 𝑚+
𝐶= =ˆ
𝑑 𝑝, 𝑚,
0' )
∴ = 1µF
:
…(i) 29 (b)
When it is filled with dielectric of dielectric Let 𝑅 and 𝑟 be the radii of bigger and each smaller
constant 𝐾% and 𝐾" as shown, then there are two drop. Charge remains conserved.
capacitors connected is parallel. So, Hence, charge on bigger drop
)
># 0' G H
)
>" 0' G H = 27 ×charge on smaller drop
𝐶8 = "
+ "
𝑖𝑒, 𝑞8 = 27𝑞
: :
(as area Now, before and after coaleseing, volume remains
becomes half) same.
4𝜀! 𝐴 6𝜀! 𝐴 2𝜀! 𝐴 3𝜀! 𝐴 That is,
𝐶′ = + = +
2𝑑 2𝑑 𝑑 𝑑 . .
𝜋𝑅9 = 27 × 9 𝜋𝑟 9
Using Eq. (i), we obtain 9
∴ 𝑅 = 3𝑟
𝐶 8 = 2 × 1 + 3 × 1 = 5 µF
Hence, capacitance of bigger drop
24 (d)
𝐶 8 = 4𝜋𝜀! 𝑅 = 4𝜋𝜀! (3𝑟)
In the arrangement shown both plates of
capacitors 𝐶9 are joined to point 𝐵. Hence, it does = 3(4𝜋𝜀! 𝑟) = 3𝐶
not act as a capacitor and is superfluous. Now 𝐶%
and 𝐶" are in parallel, hence 𝐶)* = 𝐶% + 𝐶" = 𝐶 +
𝐶 = 2𝐶 30 (d)
25 (b) Since, the proton is moving against the direction
When a conductor of capacitance 𝐶 is given a of electric field so, work is done by the proton
against electric field. It implies that electric field
charge 𝑞, it acquires a potential given by
3 does negative work on the proton.
𝑉=(
The work done in charging the conductor is Again, proton is moving in electric field from low
stored as potential energy in the electric field in potential region to high potential region hence, its
the vicinity of the conductor. potential energy increases.
26 (b)
% " 31 (d)
𝐸) " 𝑚𝑣) 𝑊) (𝑞)𝑉 The capacitance of parallel plate air capacitor
= = =
𝐸* % 𝑚𝑣*" 𝑊* (4𝑞)𝑉 0' )
" 𝐶= :
…(i)
𝑣) 1
= where 𝐴 is the area of each plate and 𝑑 is the
𝑣* 2 distance between the plates. In a medium of
27 (b) dielectric constant 𝐾 and with given condition
1 1 1 1 3+2+1 6 1 >0' )+
= + + = = = 𝐶8 =
𝐶< 4 6 12 12 12 2 :8
𝐶< = 2 µF Given, 𝐴8 = 𝐴, 𝑑8 = 2𝑑, 𝐶 8 = 2𝐶
>0' )
𝐶, = 4 + 6 + 12 = 22 µF ∴ 2𝐶 = …(ii)
":
𝐶< 2 1 Equating Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
= =
𝐶, 22 11 𝐾=4
28 (b) 32 (b)
Linear momentum of electron, 𝑝+ = ®2𝑚+ 𝑒𝑉 Since electrical potential at any point of circle of
radius 𝑅 due to charge 𝑄" at its centre is same

P a g e | 10
 -" conducting wire, charge redistributes in these
𝑉= , hence work done in carrying a charge
./0' 1
conductors till potential of both the conductors
𝑄% round the circle is zero.
become equal, known as common potential.
33 (c) IJK LMNOPJ
The charge 𝑞% = 𝐶𝑉! Common potential =KQKNR LNSNLTKU
or 𝑞% + 𝑞"
𝑖𝑒 𝑉=
𝐶% + 𝐶"
3# (# 4# V(" 4"
𝑉! = …(i) or 𝑉 =
( (# V("
35 (a)
Potential energy of electric dipole, 𝑈 = −p̈⃗
¨⃗ = −𝑝𝐸 cos θ.
. Ë
In Fig. (a), θ = π rad hence 𝑈 = −𝑝𝐸 cos π =
+𝑝𝐸 = maximum.
∴ Capacitors are in parallel, in parallel 𝑉! is same
for all capacitors.
3
∴ For second capacitor 𝑉! = "(" …(ii) 36 (b)
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), 𝐶, = 3 + 3 = 6 µF
𝑞" = 2𝑞% …(iii) 1 1 1 1 3 1
= + + = =
After disconnecting the battery, the region 𝐶< 6 6 6 6 2
between the plates of the capacitor 𝐶 is 𝐶< = 2µ F
completely filled with a material of dielectric 37 ®
0' )
constant (𝐾 = 2). 𝐶! = :
=18
3 3 >0' )
Then, 𝑉% = (># = "(# 𝐶! = =72
9:
3" "3# 3#
and 𝑉% = "( = = [from Eq. (iii)] Dividing Eq. (ii) by Eq. (i)
"( (
𝑘 72
= =4
3 18
𝐾 = 12
38 (a)
Each plate is taking part in the formation of two
capacitors except the plates at the ends.
These capacitors are in parallel and 𝑛 plates form
Charge will flow from 2 to 1 till (𝑛 − 1) 11apacitors.
𝑞"8 𝑞′% Thus, equivalent capacitance between points
= 𝐴 and 𝐵 = (𝑛 − 1)𝐶
2𝐶 𝐾𝐶
𝑞"8 𝑞%8 39 (b)
=
2𝐶 2𝐶 The electric field between the plates is
𝑖𝑒, 𝑞%8 = 𝑞"8 𝑉
3 𝐸=
Earlier potential 𝑉! = # 𝑑
(
or 𝑉 = 𝐸𝑑 or 𝑉 ∝ 𝑑
3#+
Now it is 𝑉! = Hence, if the plates are pulled apart the potential
"(
Now, 𝑞% + 𝑞" = 3𝑞% [from Eq.(iii)] difference increases.
and 𝑞%8 + 𝑞"8 = 3𝑞% 40 (a)
93# The material suitable for use as dielectric must
or 2𝑞%8 = 3𝑞% or q8% = "
3#+ 93#
have high dielectric strength X and large dielectric
∴ Now potential "(
= .( constant K.
94'
𝑉= 41 ®
.
[∵ 𝑞% = 𝑉! 𝐶] Electric potential inside a conductor is constant
34 (d) and it is equal to that on the surface of conductor.
When two conductors of capacities 𝐶% and 𝐶" and 42 (d)
potentials 𝑉% and 𝑉" are connected by a
P a g e | 11
 3# 3" % %
Work done = 𝑈" − 𝑈% = ² − ³
./0' ;" ;#

'5 '5
10" 10"
W
= 12 × 10 × 8 × 10 × 9 × 10 ´ − µ
6 10
4
𝑊 = 96 × 9 × 10'9 × 10" × = 5.8J
60
43 (a)
Potential due to charge (q) at point ® is given by

1 𝑞
𝑉= .
4𝜋𝑒! 𝑟

Since, charge 𝒬 is rotated in a circle of radius 𝑟, 44 (c)

hence its potential remains same at all points on For charge 𝑞 placed at the centre of circle, the
the path, hence ∆𝑉 = 0. circular path is an equipotential surface and
Also, work done = 𝑞∆𝑉 hence works done along all paths 𝐴𝐵 or AC or AD
or AE is zero.
Where q is charge and ∆𝑉 = 0. 45 (c)
-
Capacitance 𝐶 =
∴ Work done =0. 4
0)
For a dielectric media 𝐶 =
:
∴ Capacitance 𝐶 of a capacitor is independent of
the geometrical configuration of the capacitor.

P a g e | 12
 Current Electricity
RED ZONE

1. Figure shows a network of three resistance. When some potential difference is applied across the
network, the thermal powers dissipated by 𝐴,𝐵 and 𝐶 in the ratio
3R

A C

B R

6R

a) 2 : 3 : 4 b) 2 : 4 : 3 c) 4 : 2 : 3 d) 3 : 2 : 4
2. If an increase in length of copper wire is 0.5% due to stretching, the percentage increase in its resistance
will be
a) 0.1% b) 0.2% c) 1% d) 2%
3. The resistance between the terminal points 𝐴 and 𝐵 of the given infinitely long circuit will be
1W 1W 1W
A

1W 1W Upto
infinity

B
1W 1W 1W

a) (√3 − 1) b) (1 − √3) c) (1 + √3) d) (2 + √3)

4. A battery having e.m.f. 5𝑉 and internal resistance 0.5 Ω is connected with a resistance of 4.5 Ω then the
voltage at the terminals of battery is
a) 4.5 𝑉 b) 4 𝑉 c) 0 𝑉 d) 2 𝑉
5. The length of a conductor is doubled and its radius is halved, its specific resistance is
a) Unchanged b) Halved c) Doubled d) Quadrupled
6. Equivalent resistance between the points 𝐴 and 𝐵 is (in Ω)

A 1W 1W 1W 1W 1W B

1 1 1 1
a) b) 1 c) 2 d) 3
5 4 3 2
7. A 100 W bulb 𝐵! and two 60 W bulbs 𝐵" and 𝐵# are connected to a 250 V source as shown in figure. Now
𝑊! , 𝑊" and 𝑊# are the output powers of the bulbs 𝐵! , 𝐵" and 𝐵# respectively, then
 a) 𝑊! > 𝑊" = 𝑊# b) 𝑊! > 𝑊" > 𝑊# c) 𝑊! < 𝑊" = 𝑊# d) 𝑊! < 𝑊" < 𝑊#
8. A current of 6𝐴 enters one corner 𝑃 of an equilateral triangle 𝑃𝑄𝑅 having 3 wires of resistances 2Ω each
and leaves by the corner 𝑅. Then the current 𝐼! and 𝐼" are

a) 2𝐴, 4𝐴 b) 4𝐴, 2𝐴 c) 1𝐴, 2𝐴 d) 2𝐴, 3𝐴

9. In a Wheatstone bridge, 𝑃 = 90Ω, 𝑄 = 110Ω, 𝑅 = 40Ω and 𝑆 = 60Ω and a cell of 4 V emf. Then the
potential difference between the diagonal along which a galvanometer is connected is
a) −0.2 V b) +0.2 V c) −1 V d) +1 V
10. Two electric bulbs, one of 200 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡 40 𝑤𝑎𝑡𝑡 and the other 200 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡 100 𝑤𝑎𝑡𝑡 are connected in a house
wiring circuit
a) They have equal currents through them
b) The resistance of the filaments in both the bulbs is same
c) The resistance of the filament in 40 𝑤𝑎𝑡𝑡 bulb is more than the resistance in 100 𝑤𝑎𝑡𝑡 bulb
d) The resistance of the filament in 100 𝑤𝑎𝑡𝑡 bulb is more than the resistance in 40 𝑤𝑎𝑡𝑡 bulb
11. Masses of the three wires of same material are in the ratio of 1: 2: 3 and their lengths in the ratio of 3: 2: 1.
Electrical resistance of these wires will be in the ratio of
a) 1: 1: 1 b) 1: 2: 3 c) 9: 4: 1 d) 27: 6: 1
12. Five equal resistances each of resistance 𝑅 are connected as shown in the figure. A battery of 𝑉 volts is
connected between 𝐴 and 𝐵. The current flowing in 𝐴𝐹𝐶𝐸𝐵 will be
C

R R R
F
R A
B
R
D E
3𝑉 𝑉 𝑉 2𝑉
a) b) c) d)
𝑅 𝑅 2𝑅 𝑅
13. The power of heater is 750 W at 1000℃. What will be its power at 200℃ if 𝑎 = 4 × 10$% per℃ ?
a) 400 W b) 990 W c) 250 W d) 1500 W
14. A current of 2A flows in an electric circuit as shown in figure. The potential difference(𝑉& − 𝑉' ), in volts(
𝑉& − 𝑉' are potentials at R and S respectively) is
R

3Ω 7Ω
P Q
2A 2A
7Ω 3Ω
S

a) -4 b) +2 c) +4 d) -2
15. If in the circuit shown below, the internal resistance of the battery is 1.5 Ω and 𝑉( and 𝑉) are the
potentials at 𝑃 and 𝑄 respectively, what is the potential difference between the points 𝑃 and 𝑄
20 V 1.5 Ω
+ –

3Ω P 2Ω

2Ω Q 3Ω

a) Zero b) 4 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠 (𝑉* > 𝑉+ ) c) 4 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠 (𝑉+ > 𝑉( ) d) 2.5 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠 (𝑉+ > 𝑉( )
16. 𝑊𝑎𝑡𝑡-ℎ𝑜𝑢𝑟 meter measures
a) Electric energy b) Current c) Voltage d) Power
17. Seven resistance are connected as shown in the figure. The equivalent resistance between 𝐴 and 𝐵 is
10Ω

A 10Ω 3Ω B

5Ω 8Ω 6Ω 6Ω

a) 3 Ω b) 4 Ω c) 4.5 Ω d) 5 Ω
18. The value of current I in figure is
3A

1A 2A

a) 4A b) 6A c) 3A d) 5A
19. The following four wires are made of the same material and are at the same temperature. Which one of
them has the highest electrical resistance?
a) Length=50 cm, diameter=0.5 mm b) Length=100 cm, diameter=1 mm
c) Length=200 cm, diameter=2 mm d) Length=300 cm, diameter=3 mm
20. The current in a conductor varies with time 𝑡 as 𝐼 = 2𝑡 + 3𝑡 " where 𝐼 is in 𝑎𝑚𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑒 and 𝑡 in 𝑠𝑒𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑑𝑠.
Electric charge flowing through a section of the conductor during 𝑡 = 2 𝑠𝑒𝑐 to 𝑡 = 3 𝑠𝑒𝑐 is
a) 10 𝐶 b) 24 𝐶 c) 33 𝐶 d) 44 𝐶
21. In the following Wheatstone bridge 𝑃/𝑄 = 𝑅/𝑆. If key 𝐾 is closed, then the galvanometer will show
deflection
P Q

R S

a) In left side b) In right side c) No deflection d) In either side

22. An electric heater of 1.08 Kw is immersed in water. After the water has reached a temperature of 100℃,
how much time will be required to produce 100 g of steam?
a) 420 s b) 210 s c) 105 s d) 50 s
23. 160W-60V lamp is connected at 60 V DC supply. The number of electrons passing through the lamp in 1
min is (the charge of electron 𝑒 = 1.6 × 10$!, C)
a) 10!, b) 10"! c) 1.6 × 10!, d) 1.4 × 10"-
24. Two heater wires of equal length are first connected in series and then in parallel. The ratio of heat
produced in the two cases is
 a) 1 : 4 b) 4 : 1 c) 1 : 2 d) 2 : 1
25. ", #
A conductor wire having 10 free electrons/m carries a current of 20A. If the cross-section of the wire is
1mm" , then the drift velocity of electrons will be
a) 6.25 × 10$# ms$! b) 1.25 × 10$. ms$! c) 1.25 × 10$# ms$! d) 1.25 × 10$% ms$!
26. Two bulbs 𝑋 and 𝑌 having same voltage rating and of power 40 W and 60 W respectively are connected in
series across a potential difference of 300 V, then

a) 𝑋 will glow brighter b) Resistance of 𝑌 will be greater than 𝑋

c) Heat produced in 𝑌 will be greater than 𝑋 d) Voltage drop in 𝑋 will be greater than 𝑌
27. A potential difference of 𝑉 is applied at the ends of a copper wire of length 𝑙 and diameter 𝑑. On doubling
only 𝑑, the drift velocity,
a) Becomes two times b) Becomes half c) Does not change d) Becomes one-fourth
28. Consider a cylindrical element as shown in the figure. Current flowing through element is I and resistivity
of material of the cylinder is 𝜌. Choose the correct option out the following

a) Power loss is second half is four times the power loss in first half
b) Voltage drop in first is twice of voltage drop in second half
c) Current density in both halves are equal
d) Electric field in both halves is equal
29. Resistance as shown in figure is negative at

I A C

V
a) 𝐴 b) 𝐵 c) 𝐶 d) None of these
30. A thin wire of resistance 4 Ω is bent to form a circle. The resistance across any diameter is
a) 4 Ω b) 2 Ω c) 1 Ω d) 8 Ω
31. "
The current flowing through a wire depends on time as 𝐼 = 3𝑡 + 2𝑡 + 5. The charge flowing through the
cross-section of the wire in time from 𝑡 = 0 to 𝑡 = 2 sec. is
a) 22 C b) 20 C c) 18 C d) 5 C
32. The total current supplied to the given circuit by the battery is

a) 9 A b) 6 A c) 2 A d) 4 A
33. Two electric bulbs rated 𝑃! watt 𝑉 volts and 𝑃" watt 𝑉 volts are connected in parallel and 𝑉 volts are
applied to it. The total power will be
𝑃! 𝑃" 𝑃! + 𝑃"
a) 𝑃! + 𝑃" 𝑤𝑎𝑡𝑡 b) ‹𝑃! 𝑃" 𝑤𝑎𝑡𝑡 c) 𝑤𝑎𝑡𝑡 d) 𝑤𝑎𝑡𝑡
𝑃! + 𝑃" 𝑃! 𝑃"
34. To get a maximum current through a resistance of 2.5Ω, one can use 𝑚 rows of cells each row having 𝑛
cells. The internal resistance of each cell is 0.5Ω. What are the values of 𝑚 and 𝑛 if the total number of
cells are 20?
a) 𝑚 = 2, 𝑛 = 10 b) 𝑚 = 4, 𝑛 = 5 c) 𝑚 = 5, 𝑛 = 4 d) 𝑛 = 2, 𝑚 = 10
35. In the figure given below, the current passing through 6Ω resistor is
6W

1.2 A

4W

a) 0.40 𝑎𝑚𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑒 b) 0.48 𝑎𝑚𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑒 c) 0.72 𝑎𝑚𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑒 d) 0.80 𝑎𝑚𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑒

36. A wire is broken in four equal parts. A packet is formed by keeping the four wires together. The resistance
of the packet in comparison to the resistance of the wire will be
a) Equal b) One fourth c) One eight 1
d) 𝑡ℎ
16
37. The plot represents the flow of current through a wire at three different times.

The ratio of charges flowing through the wire at different times is

a) 2 : 1 : 2 b) 1 : 3 : 3 c) 1 : 1 : 1 d) 2 : 3 : 4
38. The magnitude of I in ampere is
60 Ω

15 Ω 5Ω
1A 1A
10Ω

a) 0.1 b) 0.3 c) 0.6 d) None of the above

39. A wire of resistance 10 Ω is bent to form a circle. 𝑃 and 𝑄 are points on the circumference of the circle
dividing it into a quadrant and are connected to a battery of 3 𝑉 and internal resistance 1 Ω as shown in
the figure. The currents in the two
parts of the circle are

3V
Q
1Ω

/ !0 . !. % !" # ,
a) "# 𝐴 and "# 𝐴 b) "/ 𝐴 and "/ 𝐴 c) ".
𝐴 and ". 𝐴 d) ". 𝐴 and ". 𝐴
40. If 𝑉12 = 4𝑉 in the given figure, then resistance 𝑋 will be
 10W 5V

A B

2V X

a) 5 Ω b) 10 Ω c) 15 Ω d) 20 Ω
41. As the temperature rises the resistance offered by metal
a) Increase b) Decrease c) Remains same d) None of these
42. The drift velocity of free electrons in a conductor is ′𝑣′ when a current ′𝑖′ is flowing in it. If both the radius
and current are doubled, then drift velocity will be
𝑣 𝑣 𝑣
a) 𝑣 b) c) d)
2 4 8
43. The current 𝑖 and voltage 𝑉 graphs for a given metallic wire at two different temperatures 𝑇! and 𝑇" are
shown in the figure. It is concluded that

a) 𝑇! > 𝑇" b) 𝑇! < 𝑇" c) 𝑇! = 𝑇" d) 𝑇! = 2𝑇!

44. If 𝑡! and 𝑡" are the times taken by two different coils for producing same heat with same supply, then the
time taken by them to produce the same heat when connected in parallel will be
𝑡! 𝑡" 2𝑡! 𝑡"
a) 𝑡! + 𝑡" b) c) d) 𝑡! 𝑡"
𝑡! + 𝑡" 𝑡! + 𝑡"

45. In a metre bridge experiment, resistances are connected as shown in figure. The balancing length 𝑙! is
55 𝑐𝑚. Now an unknown resistance 𝑥 is connected in series with 𝑃 and the new balancing length is found
to be 75 𝑐𝑚. The value of 𝑥 is

54 20 48 11
a) Ω b) Ω c) Ω d) Ω
12 11 11 48
46. Find the equivalent resistance across 𝐴𝐵
A
2W
2W
2W
2W
2W
B
a) 1 Ω b) 2 Ω c) 3 Ω d) 4 Ω
47. $!
The temperature coefficient of resistance for a wire is 0.00125° C .At 300 K its resistance is 1 Ω.The
temperature at which the resistance becomes 1.5 Ω is?
a) 450 K b) 727 K c) 454 K d) 900 K
48. A source of emf E=15V and having negligible internal resistance, is connected to a variable resistance, so
that the current in the circuit increases with time as I=1.2t+3. Then, the total charge that will flow in first
5s will be
a) 10C b) 20C c) 30C d) 40C
49. Three electric bulbs of rating 60𝑊 each are joined in series and then connected to electric mains. The
power consumed by these three bulbs will be
 20
a) 180 𝑊 b) 60 𝑊 c) 20 𝑊 d) 𝑊
3
50. In the given circuit the current 𝐼! is
30 W

I1
40 W

I3
I2 40V
40 W

80V
a) 0.4 𝐴 b) −0.4 𝐴 c) 0.8 𝐴 d) −0.8 𝐴
51. The potential difference between A and B in the following figure is
6Ω 4V
A B
2A 12 V9Ω

a) 32 V b) 48 V c) 24 V d) 14 V
52. If current in an electric bulb changes by 1%, then the power will change by
a) 1% b) 2% c) 4% 1
d) %
2

53. The potential difference between 𝐴 and 𝐵 in the following figure is

a) 24 𝑉 b) 14 𝑉 c) 32 𝑉 d) 48 𝑉
54. If potential 𝑉 = 100 ± 0.5 𝑉𝑜𝑙𝑡 and current 𝐼 = 10 ± 0.2 𝑎𝑚𝑝 are given to us, then what will be the value
of resistance
a) 10 ± 0.7 𝑜ℎ𝑚 b) 5 ± 2 𝑜ℎ𝑚 c) 0.1 ± 0.2 𝑜ℎ𝑚 d) None of these
55. What is the reading of voltmeter in the following figure

a) 3 𝑉 b) 2 𝑉 c) 5 𝑉 d) 4 𝑉
56. The resistance of a wire is 5Ω at 50℃ and 6Ω at 100℃.The resistance of the wire at 0℃ will be
a) 2Ω b) 1Ω c) 4Ω d) 3Ω
57. A current of 2 𝐴 flows in a system of conductors as shown. The potential difference (𝑉1 − 𝑉2 ) will be
A

2W 3W
2A
D C
3W 2W

B
a) +2𝑉 b) +1𝑉 c) −1𝑉 d) −2𝑉
58. A meter bridge is set-up as shown in figure, to determine an unknown resistance X using a standard
10 Ω resistor. The galvanometer shows null point when tapping key is at 52cm mark. The end-corrections
are 1cm and 2cm respectively for the ends A and B. the determined value of x is
 X 10 Ω

A B

a) 10.2 Ω b) 10.6 Ω c) 10.8 Ω d) 11.1 Ω

59. In the circuit shown the equivalent resistance between A and B is

9Ω
A B
9Ω 9Ω

a) 27 Ω b) 18 Ω c) 9 Ω d) 3 Ω
60. Twelve wires of equal length and same cross-section are connected in the form of a cube. If the resistance
of each of the wires is 𝑅, then the effective resistance between the two diagonal ends would be

5
a) 2 𝑅 b) 12 𝑅 c) 𝑅 d) 8 𝑅
6
61. If 𝜎! , 𝜎" and 𝜎# are the conductances of three conductors, then their equivalent conductance, when they
are joined in series, will be
1 1 1 𝜎! 𝜎" 𝜎# d) None of these
a) 𝜎! + 𝜎" + 𝜎# b) + + c)
𝜎! 𝜎" 𝜎# 𝜎! + 𝜎" + 𝜎#
62. A heater coil is cut into two equal parts and only one part is now used in the heater. The heat generated
will now be
a) Doubled b) Four times c) One-fourth d) Halved
63. If 𝑛, 𝑒, 𝜏 and 𝑚 respectively represent the density, charge relaxation time and mass of the electron, then
the resistance of a wire of length 𝑙 and area of cross-section 𝐴 will be
𝑚𝑙 𝑚𝜏 " 𝐴 𝑛𝑒 " 𝜏𝐴 𝑛𝑒 " 𝐴
a) " b) c) d)
𝑛𝑒 𝜏𝐴 𝑛𝑒 " 𝑙 2𝑚𝑙 2𝑚𝜏𝑙
64. Consider the circuit shown in the figure. The current 𝐼# is equal to
28W 54W

6V
I3

8V 12 V
a) 5 𝑎𝑚𝑝 b) 3 𝑎𝑚𝑝 c) −3 𝑎𝑚𝑝 d) −5/6 𝑎𝑚𝑝
65. A coil of wire of resistance 50 Ω is embedded in a block of ice and a potential difference of 210 V is applied
across it. The amount of ice which melts in 1 sec is
a) 0.262 g b) 2.62 g c) 26.2 g d) 0.0262 g
66. In the circuit shown, the point ′𝐵′ is earthed. The potential at the point ′𝐴′ is
 5W 7W B
A
10W

50V C

3W
E D

a) 14 𝑉 b) 24 𝑉 c) 26 𝑉 d) 50 𝑉
67. In the following circuit, 5Ω resistor develops 45 𝐽/𝑠 due to current flowing through it. The power
developed per second across 12 Ω resistor is
i2 9W 6W

12 W

i1 5W
a) 16 𝑊 b) 192 𝑊 c) 36 𝑊 d) 64 𝑊
68. As the switch 𝑆 is closed in the circuit shown in figure, current passed through it is
10 V 4 Ω 2Ω 5V

2Ω

a) Zero b) 1 A c) 2 A d) 1.6 A
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :
1 (c) # # #
Hence 𝑅# : 𝑅! : 𝑅" = #** : +* : +*
Let current flow from 𝑏 to 𝑎 as shown
2
3R 3
I Now the combined potential difference across
I
𝐵# and 𝐵! is same as the potential difference
a
R I b across 𝐵" . Hence, 𝑊" is more than 𝑊# and 𝑊! ,
6R 1 being in series, carry same current and 𝑅# < 𝑅! ,
3 I
therefore 𝑊# < 𝑊! ,
! ! # !
Ratio of thermal power is 6 " 𝐼8 3𝑅 ∶ 6 " 𝐼8 6𝑅 ∶
∴ 𝑊# < 𝑊! < 𝑊"
𝐼! 𝑅
or
$ !
: : 1 or 4 : 2 : 3. 8 (a)
" " 2
2 (c) 𝐼# = × 6 = 2𝐴
2+4
Approximate change in resistance=2 × % change 𝐼! = 4 𝑎𝑚𝑝
in length by stretching 9 (a)
3 (c) Current through resistance 𝑃 and 𝑄,
Let equivalent resistance between 𝐴 and 𝐵 be 𝑅, 4 1
then equivalent resistance between 𝐶 and 𝐷 will 𝑖# = = A
90 + 110 50
also be 𝑅
1W 1
A C 𝑉& − 𝑉' = 𝑃𝑖# = 90 × = 1.8 V
50

R 1W R Current through resistance 𝑅 and 𝑆,

B
1W 4 1
D 𝑖! = = A
𝑅 40 + 60 25
𝑅% = +2=𝑅
𝑅+1 1
⇒ 𝑅! − 2𝑅 − 2 = 0 𝑉& − 𝑉, = 𝑅𝑖! = 40 × = 1.6 V
25
2 ± √4 + 8
∴𝑅= = √3 + 1 𝑉' − 𝑉, = (𝑉& − 𝑉, ) − (𝑉& − 𝑉' )
2
4 (a)
= 1.6 − 1.8 = −0.2V
𝐸 5
𝑖= = = 1𝐴
𝑅 + 𝑟 4.5 + 0.5 10 (c)
𝑉 = 𝐸 − 𝑖𝑟 = 5 − 1 × 0.5 = 4.5 Volt 𝑉! 𝑉#! (200)!
5 (a) 𝑃= ⇒ 𝑅# = = = 1000Ω
𝑅 𝑃# 40
Specific resistance is independent of dimensions (!! (!**)!
of conductor but depends on nature of conductor. and 𝑅 ! = )!
= #**
= 400Ω
11 (d)
6 (c) Mass, 𝑀 = volume × density = 𝐴𝑙 × 𝑑
1W 1W 1W 1W 1W
A B or 𝐴 = 𝑀/𝑙𝑑

Resistance 𝑅 = ρ𝑙/𝐴 = ρ𝑙/(𝑀/𝑙𝑑)

1 1
𝑅&' =2+ =2 Ω ρ𝑙 ! 𝑑
3 3 =
7 (d) 𝑀
(!
As resistance of a bulb 𝑅 = )
, So 𝑅 ∝ 𝑙 ! /𝑀
 /! /! /! 17 (b)
Thus, 𝑅# : 𝑅! : 𝑅" = 0" : 0! : 0#
" ! # The given circuit can be simplified as follows
3! 2! 1! 10Ω
= : : = 27: 6: 1
1 2 3 A 10Ω 3Ω
B
12 (b) 5Ω 8Ω 6Ω 6Ω
The given circuit can be redrawn as follows
A
R
F C A 5Ω 3Ω
B
R R R Þ 5Ω 8Ω 3Ω

D Now it is a balanced Wheatstone bridge

R B
So,
Equivalent resistance between 𝐴 and 𝐵 is 𝑅 and 8Ω
(
current 𝑖 = 1
13 (b) 8Ω

𝑅#*** = 𝑉 ! /750 and 𝑅!** = 𝑉 ! /𝑃; 8 × 8 64

Now, 𝑅#*** = 𝑅!** (1 + 𝛼 × 800) ⇒ 𝑅&' = = = 4Ω
8 + 8 16
(! (!
So, 23*
= )
(1 + 4 × 104$ × 800) 18 (a)
or 𝑃 = 750(1 + 0.32) = 990 W From Kirchhoff’s first law, in an electric circuit the
14 (c) algebraic sum of the currents meeting at any
Current through each arm junction is zero,
PRQ and PSQ=1A 3A

𝑉5 − 𝑉1 = 3𝑣
𝑉5 − 𝑉6 = 7𝑉
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
1A 2A
𝑉1 − 𝑉6 = +4𝑉
15 (d) I
5
𝑅78 = Ω
2
20
𝑖=3 = 5𝐴 𝑖𝑒., ∑𝑖 = 0
+ 1.5
! ∴ Taking inward direction of current as positive
20V, 1.5Ω
and outward as negative, we have
1A − 3A − 2A + 𝐼 = 0
i 3Ω 2Ω i
⟹ 𝐼 = 4𝐴
i/2 P
19 (a)
X 2Ω 3Ω <= $<=
Resistance of a wire 𝑅 = &
= >,! where 𝐷 is
i/2 Q
diameter of wire
Potential difference between 𝑋 and 𝑃,
3 #
𝑉9 − 𝑉) = 6 8 × 3 = 7.5𝑉 ….(i) As 𝑅 ∝ 𝐿 and 𝑅 ∝ ,! , hence it is clear that
!
3 =
𝑉9 − 𝑉: = ! × 2 = 5𝑉 ….(ii) resistance will be maximum if ,! is maximum. On
On solving (i) and (ii) 𝑉) − 𝑉: = −2.5 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡; 𝑉: > calculation we find
𝑉)
=
Short Trick : ‡𝑉) − 𝑉: ˆ = (𝑅! − 𝑅# ) = (2 −
; 3 maximum when, 𝐿 = 50 cm and 𝐷 = 0.5 mm
,!
! !
3) = −2.5 20 (b)
⇒ 𝑉: > 𝑉)
16 (a) 21 (d)
𝑊𝑎𝑡𝑡-ℎ𝑜𝑢𝑟 𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟 measures electric energy
 Pressing the key does not disturb current in all 26 (a)
resistances as the bridge is balanced. Therefore, (!
Resistance of bulb 𝑅 =
)
deflection in the galvanometer in whatever
direction it was, will stay 1
22 (b) 𝑅∝
𝑃
Heat produced by heater per second = 1.08 ×
Here 𝑃9 = 40 W, and 𝑃F = 60 W
10" J
Heat taken by water to form steam 𝑚𝐿 ∴ 𝑅9 > 𝑅F
= 100 × 540 cal
= 100 × 540 × 4.2 J So, potential drop across bulb 𝑋 𝑖𝑒, of 40 W bulb
∴ 1.08 × 10" × 𝑡 = 100 × 540 × 4.2 will be greater and it will glow brighter.
#**×3$*×$.!
or 𝑡 = = 210 s
#.*A×#*# 27 (c)
23 (b) 𝐼 1 𝑉
(! 𝑣E = = ×
Power, 𝑃 = 𝑛𝐴𝑙 𝑛𝐴𝑒 𝑅
1
𝑉 ! (60)! 1 𝑉 𝑉
𝑅= = = 22.5Ω = × =
𝑃 160 𝑛𝐴𝑒 (ρ𝑙/𝐴) 𝑛𝑒ρ𝑙
Now, according to Ohm’s law
V=IR As 𝑣E is independent of area of cross-section
60 hence drift velocity will not change, when
∴ 𝐼=
22.5 diameter is doubled
⟹ 𝐼 = 2.6𝐴
Here, 𝑡 = 60𝑠 28 (a)
B7
As 𝐼= C
𝐼×𝑡
⟹ 𝑛=
𝑒
26 × 60
= ≈ 10!# = =
1.6 × 104#D 𝐼. 𝜌. 𝐿&' 𝐼. 𝜌 6!8 𝐼 𝜌. 6!8
24 (a) 𝑉&' = 𝐼. 𝑅&' = = =
𝐴# 𝜋(2𝑟)! 𝜋4𝑟 !
Let the resistance of each heater wire is 𝑅. When 𝐼 𝜌. 𝐿
two wires are connected in series, the heat 𝑉&' =
8𝜋𝑟 !
developed is 𝐼. 𝜌. 𝐿
𝑉'G = 𝐼. 𝑅'G =
𝐴!
𝑉!𝑡 = H.I.=
𝐻# = … (i) 𝐼. 𝜌. !
𝐼. 𝜌. 𝐿 𝑉&' A>J ! 2 1
2𝑅 = = ⇒ = = =
𝜋(𝑟 ) 2𝜋𝑟 !
! 𝑉'G H.I.K 8 4
!>J !
When two heater wires are connected in parallel,
𝑉'G
the heat developed is 𝑉&' =
4
𝑉 ! 𝑡 2𝑉 ! 𝑡 Now for power loss
𝐻! = = … (ii) 𝑃&' = 𝑉&.' . 𝐼
𝑅/2 𝑅
𝑃'G = 𝑉'G . 𝐼
Dividing Eq. (i) by Eq. (ii), we get 𝑃&' 𝑉&' 1 𝑃'G
= = ⇒ 𝑉&' =
𝑃'G 𝑉'G 4 4
𝐻# 1 29 (a)
= or 𝐻# ∶ 𝐻! = 1 ∶ 4
𝐻! 4 At point 𝐴 the slope of the graph will be negative.
Hence resistance is negative
25 (c)
𝐼 20 30 (c)
𝑣E = = !D Given that the resistance of the total wire is 4Ω.
𝑛𝐴𝑒 10 × 10 × 1.6 × 104#D
4+

= 1.25 × 104" m/s

 C For maximum current 𝑅 = 𝑛 𝑟⁄𝑚
A B or 2.5 = 𝑛 × 0.5/𝑚 or 𝑛 = 5𝑚

D
From Eq.(i), 𝑚 × 5𝑚 = 20 or 𝑚! = 4

or 𝑚 = 2. Therefore, 𝑛 = 5 × 2 = 10
Here, ACB(2Ω) and ADB (2Ω) are in parallel.
So, the resistance across any diameter is 35 (b)
1 1 1 2 +×$
⟹ = + = =1 P.d. across the circuit = 1.2 × +M$ = 2.88 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡
𝑅 2 2 2
!.AA
⟹ R = 1Ω Current through 6 𝑜ℎ𝑚 resistance = = 0.48 𝐴
+
31 (a) 36 (d)
𝑑𝑞
𝐼= = 3𝑡 ! + 2𝑡 + 5 Let the resistance of the wire be 𝑅, then we know
𝑑𝑡 that resistance is proportional to the length of the
∴ 𝑑𝑞 = (3𝑡 ! + 2𝑡 + 5)𝑑𝑡
CL!
wire. So each of the four wires will have 𝑅/4
resistance and they are connected in parallel. So
∴𝑞= (3𝑡 ! + 2𝑡 + 5)𝑑𝑡
the effective resistance will be
CL*
1 4 𝑅
3𝑡 " 2𝑡 ! 2 2 = ¢ £ 4 ⇒ 𝑅# =
= + + 5𝑡 ¡ = 𝑡 " + 𝑡 ! + 5𝑡¡ = 22 𝐶 𝑅# 𝑅 16
3 2 0 0
32 (b) 37 (c)
The equivalent circuit of the given circuit is as Since, charge (q)=current (i) × times (t)
shown Therefore, charge is equal to area under the
curve.
3Ω ∴ Ist rectangle =q=lb=2
IInd rectangle =q=lb=2
6Ω
1.5 Ω
1
IIIrd triangle = q = lb = 2
2Ω 2
Hence, ratio is 1:1:1.
_𝑉=9V
38 (a)
Resistances 6Ω and 2Ω are in parallel All the resistances are in parallel order, so voltage
6×2 3 across them will be equal.
∴ 𝑅% = = Ω
6+2 2 60 Ω
"
Resistances ! Ω and 1.5Ω are in series
𝐼
3 15 Ω 5 Ω
∴ 𝑅%% = + 1.5 = 3Ω
2 1A 𝐼! 1A
Resistances 3Ω and 3Ω are in parallel 1 − 𝐼 − 𝐼! 10 Ω
3×3 3
∴ 𝑅= =
3+3 2 ∴ 60𝐼 = (15 + 5)𝐼#
(
The current, 𝐼 = 1 ⟹ 60𝐼 = 20𝐼#
9 ⟹ 𝐼# = 3𝐼
= = 6𝐴
3/2 Again (15 + 5)𝐼# = 10(1 − 𝐼 − 𝐼# )
33 (a) ⟹ 2𝐼# = 1 − 𝐼 − 𝐼#
If resistances of bulbs are 𝑅# and 𝑅! respectively ⟹ 2(3𝐼) = 1 − 𝐼 − 3𝐼
then in parallel ⟹ 6𝐼 + 4𝐼 = 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 ⟹ 10𝐼 = 1
= + ⇒ ! = (! + (! 1
𝑅) 𝑅# 𝑅! ¢( £ 6 8 6 8
)" )! ∴ 𝐼= = 0.1𝐴
)$ 10
⇒ 𝑃) = 𝑃# + 𝑃! 39 (a)
34 (a) In the following figure
𝑚 𝑛 = 20 …(i) Resistance of part 𝑃𝑁𝑄;
 i2
M 45 9 27
⇒𝑄 =3× =3× = Ω
i P 55 11 11
When 𝑥 is connected in series with 𝑃, 𝑙# = 75𝑐𝑚
i1
N Q
𝑃 + 𝑥 75 𝑐𝑚 27
⇒ = ⇒3+𝑥 =3×
3V, 1Ω 𝑄 25 𝑐𝑚 11
81 48
⇒𝑥= −3⇒𝑥 = Ω
#* 11 11
𝑅# = = 2.5Ω and
$ 46 (a)
Resistance of part 𝑃𝑀𝑄; A A
3 2W
𝑅! = × 10 = 7.5Ω 2W
2W
4 2W Þ 2W
𝑅# 𝑅! 2.5 × 7.5 15 2W 2W
𝑅78 = = = Ω
𝑅# + 𝑅! (2.5 + 7.5) 8 B B
" !$
Main Current 𝑖 = "% = !" 𝐴 2×2
&
M# 𝑅&' = = 1Ω
1! !$ 2.3 #A 2+2
So, 𝑖# = 𝑖 × 61 8 = !" × 6!.3M2.38 = !" 𝐴 47 (b)
" M1!

and 𝑖! = 𝑖 − 𝑖# =
!$
−
#A
=
+
𝐴 𝑅! = 𝑅N (1 + α𝑡! ) and 𝑅C" = 𝑅N (1 + α𝑡# )
!" !" !"
40 (d) 𝑅C! 1 + α𝑡!
5𝑋 + 2 × 10 ∴ =
𝑉&' =4= ⇒𝑋 𝑅C" 1 + α𝑡#
𝑋 + 10
𝐸! 𝑟# + 𝐸# 𝑟! #.3 #M*.**#!3×C
= 20Ω, ¦𝑣 = § or = #M*.**#!3×!2!
𝑟# + 𝑟! #

41 (a) On solving we get; 𝑡! = 454°C = 454 + 273 =

Near room temperature, the electric resistance of 727K
a typical metal conductor increases linearly with
temperature. 48 (c)
𝑅 = 𝑅* (1 + 𝛼𝑇) Charge (q) is given by
Where 𝛼 is the thermal resistance coefficient.
𝑞 = 𝐼𝑑𝑡
42 (b)
𝑖 𝑖 𝑣 𝑖# 𝑟! ! Given, 𝐼 = 1.2𝑡 + 3
𝑣E = !
⇒ 𝑣 E ∝ !
⇒ %
= × ¢ £ ⇒ 𝑣% Integrating the expression using
𝑛𝑒𝜋𝑟 𝑟 𝑣 𝑖! 𝑟#
𝑣 𝑥 BM#
= 𝑥 B 𝑑𝑥 =
2 𝑛+1
43 (a) We have
Slope of the graph will give us reciprocal of
𝑞 = 𝐼𝑑𝑡 = 1.2 𝑡 𝑑𝑡 + 3 𝑑𝑡
resistance. Here resistance at temperature 𝑇# is
greater than that at 𝑇! . Since resistance of metallic 3
𝑡!
wire is more at higher temperature then at lower 𝑞 = 1.2 ® ¯ + 3[𝑡]3*
2 *
temperature, hence 𝑇# > 𝑇! 1.2
𝑞= × 25 + 3 × 5
44 (b) 2
# # # 𝑞 = 15 + 15 = 30𝐶
In parallel C = C + C
$ " ! 49 (c)
𝑡# 𝑡! ) +*
In series 𝑃% = B = " = 20 𝑤𝑎𝑡𝑡𝑠
𝑡5 =
𝑡# + 𝑡!
50 (b)
45 (c)
The circuit can be simplified as follows
For the given meter bridge B C
𝑃 𝑙# 30W
= i1
i3
𝑄 100 − 𝑙# i3
A D
𝑙# = 55𝑐𝑚 ⇒ 100 − 𝑙# = 45𝑐𝑚 i2
40W 40V
∵ 𝑃 = 3𝑄 E
F
40W 80V
 Applying 𝐾𝐶𝐿 at junction 𝐴 ∴ Current drawn from the cell
𝑖" = 𝑖# + 𝑖! …(i) 10 3
𝑖= = 𝐴
Applying Kirchhoff’s voltage law for the loop (2500/3) 250
𝐴𝐵𝐶𝐷𝐴 Reading of voltmeter 𝑖. 𝑒.
" #***
−30𝑖# − 40𝑖" + 40 = 0 Potential difference across 𝐴𝐵 = !3* × =4𝑉
"
⇒ −30𝑖# − 40(𝑖# + 𝑖! ) + 40 = 0 56 (c)
⇒ 7𝑖# + 4𝑖! = 4 …(ii) From
Applying Kirchhoff’s voltage law for the loop 𝑅C = 𝑅* (1 + 𝛼𝑡)
𝐴𝐷𝐸𝐹𝐴 5 = 𝑅N (1 + 50𝛼) … (𝑖)
−40𝑖! − 40𝑖" + 80 + 40 = 0 and 6 = 𝑅N (1 + 100𝛼) … (𝑖𝑖)
⇒ −40𝑖! − 40(𝑖# + 𝑖! ) = −120 5 1 + 50𝛼
⇒ 𝑖# + 2𝑖! = 3 …(iii) ∴ =
6 1 + 100𝛼
On solving equation (ii) and (iii) 𝑖# = −0.4𝐴 1
51 (b) ⟹𝛼=
200
From the given circuit Putting value of 𝛼in Eq. (i), we get
𝑉& − (6 × 2) − 12 − (9 × 2) + 4 − (5 × 2) = 𝑉' 1
5 = 𝑅* ¢1 + 50 × £
Or 𝑉& − 12 − 12 − 18 + 4 − 10 = 𝑉' 200
Or 𝑉& − 𝑉' =48 volt ∴ 𝑅* = 4Ω
52 (b) 57 (b)
∆𝑃 2∆𝑖 Current through each arm 𝐷𝐴𝐶 and 𝐷𝐵𝐶 = 1𝐴
𝑃 = 𝑖!𝑅 ⇒ = [𝑅 → Constant] 𝑉, − 𝑉& = 2 and 𝑉, − 𝑉' − 3 ⇒ 𝑉& − 𝑉' = +1𝑉
𝑃 𝑖
⇒ % change in power = 2 × % change in current 58 (b)
= 2 × 1 = 2% Using the concept of balanced wheat stone bridge,
53 (d) we have
𝑃 𝑅
=
𝑄 𝑆
𝑥 10
This is a series connection. Further, whatever =
52 + 1 48 + 2
current enters 𝐴 has to pass . 𝐼 = 2 𝐴. 10 × 53
The total resistance = 6 + 9 + 5 = 20Ω. The 𝑥 =
50
effective potential across the resistances is = 10.6Ω
20Ω × 2A = 40𝑉. But (+12 − 4)𝑉 is opposing the 59 (d)
potential difference caross 𝐴𝐵 therefore the The three resistances between A and B are
potential difference applied across 𝐴𝐵 is 40𝑉 + parallel,
8𝑉 = 48𝑉 1 1 1 1
= + +
54 (d) 𝑅OPQR 𝑅# 𝑅! 𝑅"
𝑉 100 ± 0.5 1 1 1
𝑅= = = 10 ± 0.25Ω = + +
𝑖 10 ± 0.2 9 9 9
55 (d) 1 3
=
#***×3**
Resistance between 𝐴 and 𝐵 = (#3**) = "
#*** 𝑅OPQR 9
⟹ 𝑅OPQR = 3Ω
So, equivalent resistance of the circuit 60 (c)
The given circuit can be simplified as follows

A B C D

5𝑅
∴ 𝑅&, =
6
1000 2500 61 (d)
𝑅78 = 500 + =
3 3 In series, effective resistance,
 1 1 1 1 Current in the given circuit 𝑖 =
3*
= 2𝐴
𝑅7SS = 𝑅# + 𝑅! + 𝑅" ⇒ = + + (3M2M#*M")
𝜎7SS 𝜎# 𝜎! 𝜎"
Potential difference between 𝐴 and 𝐵, 𝑉& − 𝑉' =
𝜎! 𝜎" + 𝜎# 𝜎" + 𝜎# 𝜎!
= 2 × 12
𝜎# 𝜎! 𝜎"
𝜎# 𝜎! 𝜎" ⇒ 𝑉& − 0 = 24𝑉 ⇒ 𝑉& = 24 𝑉
∴ 𝜎7SS = 67 (b)
𝜎! 𝜎" + 𝜎# 𝜎" + 𝜎# 𝜎!
62 (a) 𝑖# 15 3
= = … (i)
𝑉! 𝑖! 5 1
𝐻# = 𝑡 i2 9W 6W
𝑅
12 W
𝑉!
𝐻! = 𝑡 i
𝑅/2
i1
𝐻! 5W
∴ =2 U
𝐻# Also = 𝑖 𝑅 ⇒ 45 = (𝑖# )! × 5
!
C
⇒ 𝑖# = 3 𝐴 and from equation (i) 𝑖! = 1 𝐴
⇒ 𝐻! = 2𝐻#
So 𝑖 = 𝑖# + 𝑖! = 4 𝐴
63 (a) Hence power developed in 12 Ω resistance
𝑙 𝑚 𝑙 𝑃 = 𝑖 ! 𝑅 = (4)! × 12 = 192𝑊
𝑅=𝜌 = .
𝐴 𝑛𝑒 ! 𝜏 𝐴 68 (c)
64 (d) Let 𝑉 be the potential at 𝐶
Suppose current though different paths of the
circuit is allows : Using Kirchhoff’s first law 𝑖# + 𝑖! = 𝑖"
28W 54W
10 − 𝑉 5 − 𝑉 𝑉 − 0
+ =
6V 4 2 2
1 2
i3 ( $
On solving, 𝑉 = 4 Volt, 𝑖" = !
= ! = 2A
8V 12 V

After applying 𝐾𝑉𝐿 for loop (1) and loop (2) 10 V 4Ω C 2Ω 5V

#
We get 28𝑖# = −6 − 8 ⇒ 𝑖# = − ! 𝐴 A i1 i3 i2 B
#
and 54i! = −6 − 12 ⇒ 𝑖! = − " 𝐴
3 2Ω
hence 𝑖" = 𝑖# + 𝑖! = − + 𝐴
65 (b)
( !C S
Heat produced = $.! 1 = 𝑚𝐿
(! (!#*)! ×#
or 𝑚 = $.! 1 = = $.!×3*×A* = 2.62 g
66 (b)
 Moving Charges and Magnetism
RED ZONE

1. A particle moving in a magnetic field increases its velocity then its radius of the circle
a) Decreases b) Increases c) Remains the same d) Becomes half
2. A wire carrying current 𝐼 and other carrying 2𝐼 in the same direction produces a magnetic field 𝐵 at the
mid point. What will be the field when 2𝐼 wire is switched off
a) 𝐵/2 b) 2𝐵 c) 𝐵 d) 4𝐵
3. An infinitely long straight conductor 𝐴𝐵 is fixed and a current is passed through it. Another movable
straight wire 𝐶𝐷 of finite length and carrying current is held perpendicular to it and released. Neglect
weight of the wire
A
i1

C D i2

a) The rod 𝐶𝐷 will move upwards parallel to itself

b) The rod 𝐶𝐷 will move downward parallel to itself
c) The rod 𝐶𝐷 will move upward and turn clockwise at the same time
d) The rod 𝐶𝐷 will move upward and turn anti-clockwise at the same time
4. Two similar coils of radius 𝑅 are lying concentrically with their planes at right angles to each other. The
currents flowing in them are 𝐼 and 2𝐼, respectively. The resultant magnetic field induction at the centre
will be
√5𝜇! 𝐼 3𝜇 𝐼 𝜇 𝐼 𝜇 𝐼
a) b) ! c) ! d) !
2𝑅 2𝑅 2𝑅 𝑅
5. A current of 𝑖 ampere flows in a circular area of wire which subtends an angle of (3𝜋/2) radian at its
centre, whose radius is 𝑅. The magnetic induction 𝐵 at the centre is
a) µ! 𝑖/𝑅 b) µ! 𝑖/2𝑅 c) 2µ! 𝑖/𝑅 d) 3µ! 𝑖/8𝑅
6. A wire in the form of a circular loop of one turn carrying a current produces a magnetic field 𝐵 at the
centre. If the same wire is looped into a coil of two turns and carries the same current, the new value of
magnetic induction at the centre is
a) 3𝐵 b) 5𝐵 c) 4𝐵 d) 2𝐵
7. Two charged particles are projected into a region in which a magnetic field is perpendicular to their
velocities. After they enter the magnetic field, you can conclude that
a) The charges are deflected in opposite directions
b) The charges continue to move in a straight line
c) The charges move in circular paths
d) The charges move in circular paths but in opposite directions
8. A thin circular wire carrying a current 𝐼 has a magnetic moment 𝑀. The shape of the wire is changed to a
square and it carries the same current. It will have a magnetic moment
4 4 𝜋
a) 𝑀 b) " 𝑀 c) 𝑀 d) 𝑀
𝜋 𝜋 4
9. Two parallel long wires carry currents 𝑖# and 𝑖" with 𝑖# > 𝑖" . When the currents are in the same direction,
the magnetic field midway between the wires is 10𝜇𝑇. When the direction of 𝑖" is reversed, it becomes
40 𝜇𝑇. The ratio 𝑖# /𝑖" is
a) 3 ∶ 4 b) 11 ∶ 7 c) 7 ∶ 11 d) 5 ∶ 3

10. A circular current carrying coil has a radius 𝑅. The distance from the centre of the coil on the axis of the
#
coil, where the magnetic induction is $ th of its value at the centre of the coil is
2 𝑅
a) √3𝑅 b) 𝑅/√3 c) ` a 𝑅 d)
√3 2√3
11. The coil of a galvanometer consists of 100 turns and effective area of 1 𝑠𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑟𝑒 𝑐𝑚. The restoring couple is
10%$ 𝑁 − 𝑚/𝑟𝑎𝑑𝑖𝑎𝑛. The magnetic field between the pole pieces is 5 𝑇. The current sensitively of this
galvanometer will be
a) 5 × 10%& 𝑟𝑎𝑑/𝜇 𝑎𝑚𝑝 b) 5 × 10%' 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑎𝑚𝑝 c) 2 × 10%( 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑎𝑚𝑝 d) 5 𝑟𝑎𝑑/𝜇 𝑎𝑚𝑝
12. A charged particle of mass 𝑚 and charge 𝑞 travels in a circular path of radius 𝑟 that is perpendicular to a
magnetic field 𝐵. The time taken by the particle to complete one revolution is
2𝜋𝐵 2𝜋 𝑚 2𝜋 𝑚𝑞 2𝜋 𝑞" 𝐵
a) b) c) d)
𝑚 𝑞𝐵 𝐵 𝑚
13. A charged particle of mass 𝑚 and charge 𝑞 describes circular motion of radius 𝑟 in a uniform magnetic
field of strength 𝐵. The frequency of revolution is
𝐵𝑞 𝐵𝑞 2𝜋𝑚 𝐵𝑚
a) b) c) d)
2𝜋𝑚 2𝜋𝑟𝑚 𝐵𝑞 2𝜋𝑞
14. The magnetic force acting on a charge particle of charge −2𝜇𝑐 in a magnetic field of 2𝑇 actin in 𝑦
direction, when the particle velocity is (2𝑖 + 3𝑗) × 10' 𝑚𝑠 %# is
a) 8 𝑁 in −𝑧 direction b) 8 𝑁 in 𝑧 direction c) 8 𝑁 in 𝑦 direction d) 8 𝑁 in 𝑧 direction
15. Magnetic field induction at the centre 𝑂 of a square loop of side ‘𝑎’ carrying current 𝐼 as shown in figure is

𝜇! 𝐼 𝜇! 𝐼 2𝜇! 𝐼
a) b) 2√2 c) d) 0
√2𝜋𝑎 𝜋𝑎 𝜋𝑎

16. A charge moves in a circle perpendicular to a magnetic field. The time period of revolution is independent
of
a) Magnetic field b) Charge
c) Mass of the particle d) Velocity of the particle
17. A stream of electrons is projected horizontally to the right. A straight conductor carrying a current is
supported parallel to electron stream and above it. If the current in the conductor is from left to right,
then what will be the effect on electron stream?
a) The electron stream will be speeded up towards b) The electron stream will be retarded
the right
c) The electron stream will be pulled upward d) The electron stream will be pulled downward
18. The magnetic field at the centre of a circular current carrying conductor of radius 𝑟 is 𝐵) . The magnetic
field on its axis at a distance 𝑟 from the centre is 𝐵* . The value of 𝐵) : 𝐵* will be
a) 1 ∶ √2 b) 1 ∶ 2√2 c) 2 √2 ∶ 1 d) √2 ∶ 1
19. A conducting loop carrying a current 𝐼 is placed in a uniform magnetic field pointing into the plane of the
paper as shown. The loop will have a tendency to
B Y
x

a) Contract
b) Expand
c) Move towards +ve 𝑥 − axis
d) Move towards −ve 𝑥 − axis
20. 𝐴 and 𝐵 are two conductors carrying a current 𝑖 in the same direction. 𝑥 and 𝑦 are two electron beams
moving in the same direction
A
B
x
y

a) There will be repulsion between 𝐴 and 𝐵 attraction between 𝑥 and 𝑦

b) There will be attraction between 𝐴 and 𝐵 repulsion between 𝑥 and 𝑦
c) There will be repulsion between 𝐴 and 𝐵 and also 𝑥 and 𝑦
d) There will be attraction between 𝐴 and 𝐵 and also 𝑥 and 𝑦
21. Equal current 𝑖 flows in two segments of a circular loop in the direction shown in figure. Radius of the
loop is 𝑟. The magnitude of magnitude field induction at the centre of the loop is

a) zero µ! 𝑖θ µ! 𝑖 µ! 𝑖
b) c) (𝜋 − θ) d) (2𝜋 − θ)
4𝜋 𝑟 2𝜋 𝑟 2𝜋 𝑟
22. A wire carrying current 𝑖 is shaped as shown. Section 𝐴𝐵 is a quarter circle of radius 𝑟. The magnetic field
is directed

i A C

a) At an angle 𝜋/4 to the plane of the paper

b) Perpendicular to the plane of the paper and directed in to the paper
c) Along the bisector of the angle 𝐴𝐶𝐵 towards 𝐴𝐵
d) Along the bisector of the angle 𝐴𝐶𝐵 away from 𝐴𝐵
23. If same current 𝐼 passing through two parallel wires separated by a distance 𝑏, then force per unit length
will be
µ 2𝐼 " µ 𝐼 µ 𝐼" µ 𝐼"
a) ! b) ! " c) ! d) !
4𝜋 𝑏 4𝜋𝑏 4𝜋𝑏" 4𝜋𝑏
24. 𝑃𝑄 and 𝑅𝑆 are long parallel conductors separated by certain distance. 𝑀 is the mid-point between them
(see the figure). The net magnetic field at 𝑀 is 𝐵. Now, the current 2 A is switched off. The field at 𝑀 now
becomes
P R

2A 1A

Q S

𝐵
a) 2𝐵 b) 𝐵 c) d) 3𝐵
2
25. 𝐴 and 𝐵 are two concentric circular conductors of centre 𝑂 and carrying currents 𝑖# and 𝑖" as shown in the
adjacent figure. If ratio of their radii is 1 ∶ 2 and ratio of the flux densities at 𝑂 due to 𝐴 and 𝐵 is 1 : 3, then
the value of 𝑖# /𝑖" is
B

A
r2
r1
O
i1
i2

a) 1/6 b) ¼ c) 1/3 d) ½
26. What is the net force on the square coil
10 cm

2A
1A 15 cm

2 cm

a) 25 × 10%( 𝑁 moving towards wire b) 25 × 10%( 𝑁 moving away from wire

c) 35 × 10%( 𝑁 moving towards wire d) 35 × 10%( 𝑁 moving away from wire
27. An electron and a proton of equal linear momentum enter in the direction perpendicular to uniform
-
magnetic field. If the radii of their circular paths be 𝑟+ and 𝑟, respectively, then -! , is equal to 𝑚+ = mass of
"

electron, 𝑚, = mass of proton.

𝑚, #/" d) 1
𝑚, #/" 𝑚
a) ` a b) c) Š + ‹
𝑚+ 𝑚+ 𝑚,
28. An electron of mass 𝑚 and charge 𝑞 is travalling with a speed 𝑣 along a circular path of radius 𝑟 at right
angles to a uniform of magnetic field 𝐵. If speed of the electron is doubled and the magnetic field is halved,
then resulting path would have a radius of
𝑟 𝑟
a) b) c) 2𝑟 d) 4𝑟
4 2
29. A charged particle enters in a magnetic field whose direction is parallel to velocity of the particle, then the
speed of this particle
a) In straight line b) In coiled path c) In circular path d) In ellipse path
30. A long solenoid has 200 turns/cm and carries a current 𝑖. The magnetic field at its centre is
6.28 × 10%" Wb/m" . Another long solenoid has 100 turns/cm and it carries a current 𝑖/3. The value of the
magnetic field at its centre is
a) 1.05 × 10%" Wbm%" b) 1.05 × 10%/ Wbm%" c) 1.05 × 10%0 Wbm%" d) 1.05 × 10%& Wbm%"
31. A charge + 𝑄 is moving upwards vertically. It enters a magnetic field directed to north. The force on the
charge will be towards
a) North b) South c) East d) West
32. The magnetic moment of a circular coil carrying current is
a) Directly proportional to the length of the wire in the coil
b) Inversely proportional to the length of the wire in the coil
c) Directly proportional to the square of the length of the wire in the coil
d) Inversely proportional to the square of the length f the wire in the coil
33. A galvanometer of resistance 100 Ω gives a full scale deflection for a current of 10%/ A. To convert it into a
ammeter capable of measuring upto 1A, we should connect a resistance of
a) 1 Ω in parallel b) 10%0 Ω in parallel c) 10/ Ω in series d) 100 Ω in series

34. Two wires of same length are shaped into a square and a circle. If they carry same current, ratio of the
magnetic moment is
a) 2 ∶ 𝜋 b) 𝜋 ∶ 2 c) 𝜋 ∶ 4 d) 4 ∶ 𝜋
35. A coil having 𝑁 turns carry a current 𝐼 as shown in the figure. The magnetic field intensity at point 𝑃 is

R
P
I

𝜇! 𝑁𝐼𝑅" 𝜇! 𝑁𝐼 𝜇! 𝑁𝐼𝑅" d) Zero

a) b) c)
2(𝑅" + 𝑥 " )0/" 2𝑅 (𝑅 + 𝑥) "

36. In a cyclotron, the angular frequency of a charged particle is independent of

a) Mass b) Speed c) Charge d) Magnetic field
37. An electron and a proton are projected at right angles to a uniform magnetic field with the same kinetic
energy. Then
a) The electron trajectory will be less curved than b) The electron trajectory will be more curved than
proton trajectory proton trajectory
c) Both the trajectories will be equally curved d) Both particles continue to move along a straight
line
38. An electron and a proton with equal momentum enter perpendicularly into a uniform magnetic field, then
a) The path of proton shall be more curved than that of electron
b) The path of proton shall be less curved than that of electron
c) Both are equally curved
d) Path of both will be straight line
39. A proton (mass 𝑚 and charge +𝑒) and an 𝛼-particle (mass 4𝑚 and charge +2𝑒) are projected with the
same kinetic energy at right angles to the uniform magnetic field. Which one of the following statements
will be true
a) The 𝛼-particle will be bent in a circular path with a small radius that for the proton
b) The radius of the path of the 𝛼-particle will be greater than that of the proton
c) The 𝛼-particle and the proton will be bent in a circular path with the same radius
d) The 𝛼-particle and the proton will go through the field in a straight line
40. When a magnetic field is applied in a direction perpendicular to the direction of cathode rays, then their
a) Energy decreases b) Energy increases
c) Momentum increases d) Momentum and energy remain unchanged

41. The magnetic induction at the centre 𝑂 in the figure shown is

𝜇! 𝑖
(𝑅# + 𝑅" )
𝜇! 𝑖 1 1 𝜇! 𝑖 1 1 𝜇! 𝑖 4
a) ` − a b) ` + a c) (𝑅# − 𝑅" ) d)
4 𝑅# 𝑅" 4 𝑅# 𝑅" 4

42. A proton, a deuteron and an α − particle with the same kinetic energy enter a region of uniform magnetic
field moving at right angles to 𝐵. What is the ratio of the radii of their circular paths?
a) 1 ∶ √2 ∶ √2 b) 1 ∶ √2 ∶ 1 c) √2 ∶ 1 ∶ 1 d) √2 ∶ √2 ∶ 1
43. The forces existing between two parallel current carrying conductors is 𝐹. If the current in each conductor
is doubled, then the value of force will be
a) 2𝐹 b) 4 𝐹 c) 5 𝐹 d) 𝐹/2
44. A beam of electrons and protons move parallel to each other in the same direction, then they
a) Attract each other b) Repel each other
c) No relation d) Neither attract nor repel
45. A current 𝐼 flowing through the loop as shown in figure. The magnetic field at centre 𝑂 is

7 𝜇! 𝐼 7 𝜇! 𝐼 7 𝜇! 𝐼 5 𝜇! 𝐼
a) ⨂ b) ⨀ c) ⨀ d) ⨀
16𝑅 16𝑅 16𝑅 16𝑅
46. The magnetic field due to a straight conductor of uniform cross section of radius 𝑎 and carrying a steady
current is represented by
a) B b) B c) B d) B

r r r r
a a a a

47. The deflection in a galvanometer falls from 50 division to 20 when a 12 Ω shunt is applied. The
galvanometer resistance is
a) 18 Ω b) 36 Ω c) 24 Ω d) 30 Ω
48. Current 𝐼 is flowing in conductor shaped as shown in the figure. The radius of the curved part is 𝑟 and the
length of straight portion is very large. The value of the magnetic field at the centre 𝑂 will be

µ! 𝐼 3𝜋 µ! 𝐼 3𝜋 µ! 𝐼 𝜋 µ! 𝐼 𝜋
a) ` + 1a b) ` − 1a c) ” + 1• d) ” − 1•
4𝜋𝑟 2 4𝜋𝑟 2 4𝜋𝑟 2 4𝜋𝑟 2

49. A straight rod of mass 𝑚 and length 𝐿 is suspended from the identical springs as shown in figure. The
spring is stretched a distance 𝑥! due to the weight of the wire. The circuit has total resistance𝑅. When the
magnetic field perpendicular to the plane of paper is switched on, springs are observed to extend further
by the same distance. The magnetic field strength is

2𝑚g𝑅 𝑚g𝑅 𝑚g𝑅 𝑚g𝑅

a) b) c) d)
𝐿𝐸 𝐿𝐸 2𝐿𝐸 𝐸
50. Ampere’s circuital law is equivalent to
a) Biot-Savart law b) Coulomb’s law c) Faraday’s law d) Kirchhoff’s law
51. We have a galvanometer of resistance 25 Ω. It is shunted by a 2.5 Ω wire. The part of total current 𝑖! that
flows through the galvanometer is given as
a) (𝑖/𝑖! ) = (1/11) b) (𝑖/𝑖! ) = (1/10) c) (𝑖/𝑖! ) = (1/9) d) (𝑖/𝑖! ) = (2/11)
52. A candidate connects a moving coil ammeter 𝐴 and a moving coil voltmeter 𝑉 and a resistance R as shown
in figure
20V
+ V -

+A -
RΩ
4A

If the voltmeter reads 20 V and the ammeter reads 4 𝐴, then 𝑅 is

a) Equal to 5 Ω b) Greater than 5 Ω
Greater or less than 5 Ω depending upon its
c) Less than 5 Ω d)
material
53. A closed loop 𝑃𝑄𝑅𝑆 carrying a current is placed in a uniform magnetic field. If the magnetic forces on
segment PS, SR and RQ are 𝐹# , 𝐹" and 𝐹0 respectively and are in the plane of the paper and along the
directions shown, the force on the segment QP is

a) Ÿ(𝐹0 − 𝐹# )" − 𝐹"" b) 𝐹0 + 𝐹# − 𝐹" c) 𝐹0 − 𝐹# + 𝐹" d) Ÿ(𝐹0 − 𝐹# )" + 𝐹""

54. The relation between voltage sensitivity (𝜎1 ) and current sensitivity (𝜎2 ) of a moving coil galvanometer is
(Resistance of galvanometer = 𝐺)
𝜎2 𝜎1 𝐺 𝐺
a) = 𝜎1 b) = 𝜎2 c) = 𝜎2 d) = 𝜎1
𝐺 𝐺 𝜎1 𝜎2
55. Which is a vector quantity
a) Density b) Magnetic flux
c) Intensity of magnetic field d) Magnetic potential
56. For the arrangement as shown in the figure, the magnetic induction at the centre is

3µ! 𝑖𝜋 µ 𝑖 µ 𝑖 3µ 𝑖
a) b) ! (1 + 𝜋) c) ! d) !
4𝑎 4𝜋𝑎 4𝜋𝑎 8𝑎𝑙
57. A proton, a deutron and an α − particle having the same kinetic energy are moving in circular trajectories
in a constant magnetic field. If 𝑟, , 𝑟3 and 𝑟4 denote respectively the radii of the trajectories of these
particles, then
a) 𝑟4 = 𝑟3 > 𝑟, b) 𝑟4 = 𝑟3 = 𝑟, c) 𝑟4 < 𝑟3 < 𝑟, d) 𝑟4 = 𝑟, < 𝑟3
58. Which of the following graph represents the variation of magnetic flux density B with distance 𝑟 for a
straight long wire carrying an electric current?

a) b) c) d)
59. An electron is revolving around a proton in a circular path of diameter 0.1 nm. It produces a magnetic
field 14 T at a proton. Then the angular speed of the electron is
a) 8.8 × 10' rad s%# b) 4.4 × 10#' rad s%# c) 2.2 × 10#' rad s%# d) 1.1 × 10#' rad s%#
60. A uniform electric field and a uniform magnetic field exist in a region in the same direction. An electron is
projected with a velocity pointed in the same direction. Then the electron will
a) Be deflected to the left without increase in speed
b) Be deflected to the right without increase in speed
c) Not be deflected but its speed will decrease
d) Not be deflected but its speed will increase
61. A particle of mass 𝑚, charge 𝑄 and kinetic energy 𝑇 enters a transverse uniform magnetic field of
induction 𝐵¤⃗ . After 3 seconds the kinetic energy of the particle will be
a) 𝑇 b) 4 𝑇 c) 3 𝑇 d) 2 𝑇
62. A charged particle is moving in a circular orbit of radius 6 cm with a uniform speed of 3 × 10' 𝑚/𝑠 under
the action of a uniform magnetic field 2 × 10%& 𝑤𝑏/𝑚" at right angles to the plane of the orbit. The charge
to mass ratio of the particle is
a) 5 × 105 𝐶/𝑘𝑔 b) 2.5 × 10## 𝐶/𝑘𝑔 c) 5 × 10## 𝐶/𝑘𝑔 d) 5 × 10#" 𝐶/𝑘𝑔
63. A conducting rod of length 𝑙 and mass m is moving down a smooth inclined plane of inclination θ with
constant speed 𝑣. A vertically upward magnetic field B ¤⃗ exists in space there. The magnitude of magnetic
¤⃗ is
field B

67 𝑚g 𝑚g 𝑚g
a) sin θ b) cos θ c) tan θ d)
28 𝑖𝑙 𝑖𝑙 𝑖𝑙 sin θ
64. A beam of electrons passes undeflected through mutually perpendicular electric and magnetic fields. If
the electric field is switched off and the same magnetic field is maintained the electrons move
a) In an elliptical orbit b) In a circular orbit
c) Along a parabolic path d) Along a straight line
65. A charged particle is projected in a plane perpendicular to a uniform magnetic field. The area bounded by
the path described by the particle is proportional to
a) The velocity b) The momentum c) The kinetic energy d) None of these
66. 0
A voltmeter with a resistance 50 × 10 Ω is used to measure voltage in a circuit. To increase its range to 3
times, the additional resistance to be put in series is
a) 9 × 10' Ω b) 10/ Ω c) 1.5 × 10/ Ω d) 9 × 10/ Ω
67. A galvanometer has a resistance 𝐺 and a current 𝑖7 flowing in it produces full scale deflection. 𝑆# is the value
of the shunt which converts it into a ammeter or range 0 to 𝑖 and 𝑆" is the value of the shunt for the range
9#
0 to 2 𝑖. The ratio is
9$
2𝑖 − 𝑖7 1 𝑖 − 𝑖7 c) 2 d) 1
a) Š ‹ b) Š ‹
𝑖 − 𝑖7 2 2𝑖 − 𝑖7
68. Energy in a current carrying coil is stored in the form of
a) Electrical energy b) Magnetic field c) Heat d) None of these
69. The dimension of the magnetic field intensity 𝐵 is
a) 𝑀𝐿𝑇 %" 𝐴%# b) 𝑀𝑇 %" 𝐴%# c) 𝑀𝐿" 𝑇𝐴%" d) 𝑀" 𝐿𝑇 %" 𝐴%#
70. If in a circular coil 𝐴 of radius 𝑅, current 𝑖 is flowing and in another coil 𝐵 of radius 2𝑅 a current 2𝑖 is
flowing, then the ratio of the magnetic fields, 𝐵: and 𝐵; produced by them will be
a) 1 b) 2 1 d) 4
c)
2
71. In the figure shown there are two semicircles of radii 𝑟# and 𝑟" in which a current 𝑖 is flowing. The
magnetic induction at the centre 𝑂 will be

r1

O
r2

𝜇! 𝑖 𝜇 𝑖 𝜇! 𝑖 𝑟# + 𝑟" 𝜇! 𝑖 𝑟" − 𝑟#
a) (𝑟# + 𝑟" ) b) ! (𝑟# − 𝑟" ) c) ` a d) ` a
𝑟 4 4 𝑟# 𝑟" 4 𝑟# 𝑟"
72. A uniform electric field and a uniform magnetic field are produced, pointing in the same direction. If an
electron is projected with its velocity pointing in the same direction
a) The electron will turn to its right
b) The electron will turn to its left
c) The electron velocity will increase in magnitude
d) The electron velocity will decrease in magnitude
1 (b) Magnetic field at the centre of a current carrying
For motion of a charged particle in a magnetic loop is given by
field, we have 𝑟 = 𝑚𝑣/𝑞𝐵 𝑖. 𝑒. 𝑟 ∝ 𝑣
µ! 𝑛𝑖
2 (c) 𝐵=
2𝑟
When two parallel conductors are carrying
current 𝐼 and 2𝐼 in same direction, then magnetic Here, 𝑛 = no. of turns in loop
field at the midpoint is
𝑖 = current, 𝑟' = radius of loop, 𝑟' = 𝑟
I 2I
For 𝑛 = 1 turn
+ ,
r r
𝐵 = $&! …(i)
"
𝜇! 2𝑙 𝜇! 𝐼 𝜇! 𝐼 &
𝐵= − = When 𝑛 = 2 turns and radius 𝑟$ = , 𝑖$ = 𝑖
2𝜋𝑟 2𝜋𝑟 2𝜋𝑟 $
When current 2𝐼 is switched off then magnetic
field due to conductor carrying current 𝐼 is 𝐵 = µ! × 2 × 𝑖
𝐵$ = &
"! # 2 h$ i
$%&

$+! , × $
3 (c) or 𝐵$ = …(ii)
$&
Since the force on the rod 𝐶𝐷 is non-uniform it
Now, from Eqs. (i) and (ii)
will experience force and torque. From the left
hand side it can be seen that the force will be 𝐵$
upward and torque is clockwise =4
𝐵
A
i1
Hence, 𝐵$ = 4𝐵

i2
7 (c)
C D
When a charged particle is projected into a region
B
of magnetic field such that magnetic field is
4 (a) perpendicular to the velocity vector of charged
𝜇! 𝐼 particles then charged particles will follow
𝐵' =
2𝑅 circular path.
𝜇! (2𝐼)
𝐵$ = 8 (d)
2𝑅
Initially for circular coil 𝐿 = 2𝜋𝑟 and 𝑀 = 1 × 𝜋𝑟 $
𝐵()* = U𝐵'$ + 𝐵$$ 𝐿 $ 𝑖𝐿$
= 𝑖 ×𝜋o p = … (i)
𝜇! (𝐼) √5𝜇! 𝐼 2𝜋 4𝜋
= √1 + 4 = 0 $ ,0#
2𝑅 2𝑅 Finally for square coil 𝑀/ = 𝑖 × h1i = '2
… (ii)
5 (d)
For a loop, magnetic induction at centre, r
µ! 2π𝑖
𝐵= ×
4π 𝑅
When loop subtends angle θ at centre, then i
L/4
µ! θ𝑖 %3
𝐵= × Solving equation (i) and (ii) 𝑀/ =
4π 𝑅 1
In the given problem, θ = 3π/2 9 (d)
µ! 3π 𝑖 3µ! 𝑖 Initially when wires carry currents in the same
∴𝑏= × × =
4π 2 𝑅 8𝑅 direction as shown:
6 (c) Magnetic field at mid point 𝑂 due to wires 1 and 2
are respectively
 ⇒ 𝑥 = √3. 𝑎
i1 i2
Given, 𝑎 = 𝑅
O
x x ∴ 𝑥 = √3𝑅
11 (d)
1 2 ; <=>
Current sensitivity , =
𝜇! 2𝑖' ?
𝐵' = . ⨂ 𝜃 100 × 5 × 1051
4𝜋 𝑥 ⇒ = = 5 𝑟𝑎𝑑/𝜇 𝑎𝑚𝑝
" $,
and 𝐵$ = 1%! . 4# ⨀ 𝑖 105:
12 (b)
" $
Hence net magnetic field at 𝑂 𝐵()* = 1%! × 4 ×
(𝑖' − 𝑖$ ) 13 (a)
𝜇! 2 Time period is given by 𝑇 =
$%@
⇒ 10 × 1052 = . (𝑖 − 𝑖$ ) … (𝑖) A=
4𝜋 𝑥 ' ' A=
If the direction of 𝑖$ is reversed then ⇒ Frequency 𝑣 = B = $%@
14 (a)
i1 i2
𝐹⃗ = 𝑞‡𝑣⃗ × 𝐵
ˆ⃗ ‰ = −2
O
x x × 1052 [{(2𝚤̂ + 3𝚥̂) × 102 } × 2𝚥̂]
𝐹⃗ = −8𝑘’
1 2
15 (d)
𝜇! 2𝑖'
𝐵' = . ⊗ 𝐴𝐵 and 𝐷𝐶, 𝐴𝐷 and 𝐵𝐶 are in the opposite
4𝜋 𝑥
" $, direction pairs. They are so situated that currents
and 𝐵$ = 1%! . 4# ⊗
of each pair produce equal and opposite magnetic
"! $
So 𝐵()* = . (𝑖' + 𝑖$ ) fields at the centre 𝑂 of the loop. Hence, the
1% 4
𝜇! 2 resultant magnetic field induction at the centre 𝑂
⇒ 40 × 1052 = . (𝑖 + 𝑖$ ) … (ii) of the loop is zero
4𝜋 𝑥 '
, 6, 1 , 7 16 (d)
Dividing equation (ii) by (i) ," 5,# = ' ⇒ ," = 8
" # # 2𝜋𝑚
10 (a) 𝑇= ⇒ 𝑇 𝛼 𝑣C
𝑞𝐵
For a circular coil of radius 𝑎 carrying a current 𝑖,
17 (d)
the magnetic field at point 𝑃, distance 𝑥 from coil
Magnetic field due to current through a linear
is given by
conductor from the left to right at a point below
the conductor is acting horizontally upwards. The
electron beam moving from left to right will cause
current right to left. The force on the electron will
be vertically downwards according to Fleming’s
hand rule.
18 (c)
Magnetic induction at the centre of the coil of
radius 𝑟 is
µ! 𝑖𝑎$ µ! 𝑛𝐼
𝐵= NA5' m5' … (i) 𝐵D = … (i)
2(𝑎$ + 𝑥 $ )8/$ 2𝑟
At the centre of coil 𝑥 = 0 Magnetic induction on the axial line of a circular
𝜇! 𝑖 coil at a distance 𝑥 from the centre is
∴ 𝐵/ = NA5' m5' … (ii)
2𝑎 µ! 𝑛𝑟 $ 𝐼
Given, 𝐵 = 𝐵′
' 𝐵E =
: 2(𝑟 $ + 𝑥 $ )8/$
µ! 𝑖𝑎$ 1 µ! 𝑖 Given 𝑥 = 𝑟
∴ = o p µ! 𝑛𝑟 $ 𝐼
2(𝑎$ + 𝑥 $ )8/$ 8 2𝑎
∴ 𝐵E = … (ii)
𝑎$ 1 2(2𝑟 $ )8/$
⇒ $ = From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
(𝑎 + 𝑥 ) $ 8/$ 8𝑎
⇒ 8𝑎 = (𝑎 + 𝑥 )8/$
8 $ $ 𝐵D 2√2
=
⇒ 𝑎$ + 𝑥 $ = 4𝑎$ 𝐵E 1
19 (b) 𝑟' : 𝑟$ = 1: 2 and 𝐵' : 𝐵$ = 1: 3. We know that
Net force on a current carrying loop in uniform 𝜇! 2𝜋𝑛𝑖 𝑖' 𝐵' 𝑟' 1 × 1 1
𝐵= . ⇒ = = =
magnetic field is zero. Hence the loop can’t 4𝜋 𝑟 𝑖$ 𝐵$ 𝑟$ 3 × 2 6
translate. So, options (c) and (d) are wrong. From 26 (a)
Fleming’s left hand rule we can see that if Force on side 𝐵𝐶 and 𝐴𝐷 are equal but opposite
magnetic field is perpendicular to paper inwards so their net will be zero
and current in the loop is clockwise (as shown) B
10 cm
C
the magnetic force 𝐅@ on each element of the loop 2A 15 cm
is radially outwards, or the loops will have a
FAB FCD
tendency to expand.
A D

2cm
$×$×'
But 𝐹>= = 105M × $×'!$# × 15 × 105$ = 3 ×
1052 𝑁
$×$×'
and 𝐹?N = 105M × ('$×'!$# ) × 15 × 105$ =
0.5 × 1052 𝑁
⇒ 𝐹()* = 𝐹>= − 𝐹?N = 2.5 × 1052 𝑁
20 (b) = 25 × 105M 𝑁, towards the wire
Current carrying conductors will attract each 27 (d)
other, while electron beams will repel each other Given, linear momentum of electron = linear
21 (c) momentum of proton.
Magnetic field induction at 𝑂 due to current or 𝑚) 𝑣) = 𝑚O 𝑣O
+! ,F The radius of circular path is
through 𝐴𝐶𝐵 is 𝐵' = 1%& 𝑚𝑣
𝑟=
It is acting perpendicular to the paper 𝑞𝐵
downwards. For an electron the radius of circular path is
Magnetic field induction at 𝑂 due to current 𝑚) 𝑣)
𝑟) =
through 𝐴𝐵𝐷 is 𝐵$ = 1%
+! ,($%5F) 𝑞𝐵
&
For a proton the radius of circular path is
It is acting perpendicular to paper upwards. 𝑚O 𝑣O
∴ Total magnetic field at 𝑂 due to current loop is 𝑟O =
𝑞𝐵
+! , +! , &
𝐵 = 𝐵$ − 𝐵' = 1% & (2𝜋 − θ) 1% & θ Hence, &% = 1
&
µ! 𝑖
= (𝜋 − θ) 28 (d)
2𝜋 𝑟
In a perpendicular magnetic field,
22 (b)
Magnetic force = centripetal force
Use Right hand palm rule or Maxwell’s Cork screw
𝑚𝑣 $
rule 𝑖𝑒, 𝐵𝑞𝑣 =
23 (a) 𝑟
𝑚𝑣
⇒ 𝑟= ⇒ 𝑟 ∝ 𝑣$
𝐵𝑟
24 (b) 𝑟$ 𝑣$$ 2𝑣 $
Magnetic field at mid-point 𝑀 in first case is 𝐵 = ∴ = = o p =4
𝑟 𝑣'$ 𝑣
𝐵IJ − 𝐵KL ⇒ 𝑟$ = 4𝑟
(∴ 𝐵IJ and 𝐵KL are in opposite directions) 29 (a)
4 µ! 2 µ! 2 µ! If the particle enters in the magnetic field parallel
= − =
4π𝑑 4π𝑑 4π𝑑 to the direction of the field, then it will move in a
When the current 2 A is switched off, the net
straight line.
magnetic field at 𝑀 is due to current 1 A 30 (a)
µ! × 2 × 1
/
𝐵 = =𝐵 Magnetic field due to a long solenoid is given by
4π𝑑
25 (a)
 𝐵 = µ! 𝑛𝑖
36 (b)
From given data, 2𝜋 𝑞𝐵 2𝜋𝑚
𝜔= = ⇒ 𝜔 ∝ 𝑣° §∵ 𝑇 = ¨
𝑇 𝑚 𝑞𝐵
6.28 × 105$ = µ! × 200 × 10$ × 𝑖
37 (b)
…(i)
𝑚𝑣 𝐸
𝑟= = 𝑒𝑉 = 𝑒𝑣𝐵 ⇒ 𝑣 =
and
,
𝐵 = µ! × 100 × 10$ × h8i 𝑞𝐵 𝐵
Radius of electron’s orbit will be more, so proton’s
…(ii)
trajectory will be less curved.
Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get 38 (c)
𝑟 = 𝑚𝑣/𝑞𝐵
𝐵 = 1.05 × 105$ Wb/m$ Since both have same momentum, therefore the
circular path of both will have the same radius
31 (d)
39 (c)
32 (c)
√2𝑚𝐾 √𝑚
𝑀 = 𝑁𝑖𝐴 ⇒ 𝑀 ∝ 𝐴 ⇒ 𝑀 ∝ 𝑟 $ [As 𝐼 = 2𝜋𝑟 ⇒ 𝑙 ∝ 𝑟= 𝑖. 𝑒. 𝑟 ∝
𝑞𝐵 𝑞
𝑟]
Here kinetic energy 𝐾 and 𝐵 are same
⇒ 𝑀 ∝ 𝑙$
𝑟O ¬𝑚O 𝑞U ¬𝑚O 2𝑞O
33 (b) ∴ = . = . =1
𝐺 = 100 Ω 𝑟U ¬𝑚U 𝑞O ¬4𝑚O 𝑞O
𝐼P = 1057 A 40 (d)
𝐼 =1A Since force is perpendicular to direction of
𝑆 =? motion, energy and magnitude of momentum
𝐼P × 𝐺 = (𝐼 − 𝐼P ) × 𝑆 remains constant
𝐼P 1057 41 (a)
𝑆 =¡ ¢×𝐺 = × 100 In the following figure, magnetic fields at 𝑂 due to
𝐼 − 𝐼P 1 − 1057
section 1, 2, 3 and 4 are considered as 𝐵' , 𝐵$ , 𝐵8
'!$'
Or = '5!.!!!!'
= 1058 Ω and 𝐵1 respectively
34 (c) 𝐵' = 𝐵8 = 0
T $ 𝜇! 𝜋𝑖
Suppose length of each wire is 𝑙. 𝐴RASE&) =h i = 𝐵 $ = ∙ ⨂
1 4𝜋 𝑅'
T# 𝜇! 𝜋𝑖
'2 𝐵1 = ∙ ⨀ As |𝐵$ | > |𝐵1 |
4𝜋 𝑅$
"! , ' '
So 𝐵()* = 𝐵$ − 𝐵1 ⇒ 𝐵()* = 1
hK − K i ⨂
" #

l/4

42 (b)
𝑚𝑣 $
$
𝑙 $ 𝑙$ = 𝑞𝑣𝐵
𝐴D,&DT) = 𝜋𝑟 = 𝜋 o p = 𝑅
2𝜋 4𝜋 @V √$3& X
∵ Magnetic moment For proton, 𝑅O = =A
= A& =
𝑀 = 𝑖𝐴 Similarly for deuteron and α-particle
𝑀RASE&) 𝐴RASE&) Z$3( X Z$3) X
⇒ = 𝑅Y = and 𝑅U =
𝑀D,&DT) 𝐴D,&DT) A& = A) =
$
𝑙 /16 𝜋 According to the question
= $ =
𝑙 /4𝜋 4 ∴ 𝑅O ∶ 𝑅Y ∶ 𝑅U
35 (a)
 Z3& Z3( Z3) X
or ∶ ∶ the current in the rod is 𝑖 =
A& A( A* K
X0=
√1 √2 √4 ∴ Magnetic force on the rod is 𝐹@ = 𝐵𝑖𝐿 = K
∴ ∶ ∶ or 1 ∶ √2 ∶ 1
1 1 2
43 (b)
+ $," ,#
As, 𝐹 = 1%! &
𝑖𝑒, 𝐹 ∝ 𝑖' 𝑖$ . Therefore force will
becomes four time 𝑖𝑒, 4𝐹.

44 (a) In downward direction

=0X
∴ 2𝑘𝑥! = 𝑚g + 0X
45 (a) …..(ii)
The effective magnetic field at 𝑂 =0X
From Eqs. (i) and (ii); we get 4𝑘𝑥! = 2𝑘𝑥! + K
𝜇! 3 𝜋𝐼 𝜇! 𝜋 𝐼
𝐵 = 𝐵IX + 𝐵KL = . + . . 2𝑘𝑥! 𝑅 𝑚g𝑅
4𝜋 2 𝑅 4𝜋 2 2𝑅 𝐵= =
𝜇! 𝐼 3 1 7 𝜇! 𝐼 𝐸𝐿 𝐿𝐸
⇒𝐵= § + ¨= 50 (a)
4𝑅 2 4 16 𝑅
As per Fleming’s Right Hand rule, direction of
51 (c)
magnetic field is perpendicular and in the plane of
𝑖𝑆 𝑖! × 2.5 𝑖!
paper 𝑖P = = = .
𝐺 + 𝑆 25 + 2.5 9
46 (a)
52 (b)
Magnetic field inside the conductor 𝐵,( ∝ 𝑟 and
'
Here, 𝑖 = 4A; V = 20 Volt; so,
magnetic field outside the conductor 𝐵[\] ∝ & ` $!
𝑅 = = = 5A. Since, voltmeter is connected
# 1
[where 𝑟 is the distance of observation point from
in parallel with resistance 𝑅, the effective
axis]
resistance of this combination is 5 Ω only if the
47 (a)
resistance R is greater than 5Ω, since total
𝑖 = 50 𝑘; 𝑖P = 20𝑘, where 𝑘 is the figure of metit of
resistance in parallel combination becomes less
galvanometer; 𝑆 = 𝑖P 𝐺/(𝑖 − 𝑖P ); than individual resistance.
$!^._
So, 12 = (7!^5$!^)
53 (d)
On solving we get 𝐺 = 18Ω. Since all the given forces are lying in plane, so the
48 (a) given loop is in equilibrium
𝐵> = 0

µ! (2π − π/2)𝐼 µ! 3𝜋𝐼 𝐹1// = 𝐹1 cos 𝜙 = 𝐹$

𝐵= = ⊗= 𝐹1//// = 𝐹1 sin 𝜙 = 𝐹8 − 𝐹'
4π 𝑟 4π 2𝑟
µ! 𝐼 ⇒ 𝐹1$ = 𝐹$$ + (𝐹8 − 𝐹' )$
𝐵? = ⊗
4π𝑟
So, net magnetic field at the centre ⇒ 𝐹1 = U𝐹$$ + (𝐹8 − 𝐹' )$
= 𝐵> + 𝐵= + 𝐵? 54 (a)
µ! 3π𝐼 µ! 𝐼 µ! 𝐼 3π 𝜃 𝜃 𝜎,
=0+ + = o + 1p 𝜎, = = . 𝐺 = 𝜎V 𝐺: = 𝜎V
4π 2𝑟 4π𝑟 4π 𝑟 2 𝑖 𝑖𝐺 𝐺
49 (b) 55 (c)
In the absence of magnetic field
𝑚g = 2𝑘𝑥! 56 (d)
…..(i)
 µ! 𝑖𝑎 µ! 3𝜋
𝐵= = .
4𝜋𝑟 4𝜋𝑎 2
3µ! 𝑖
=
8𝑎
57 (a)

58 (c)
Magnetic field induction at a point due to a long 𝐵𝑖𝑙 cos θ = 𝑚gsin θ
@P cdeF gP
current carrying wire is related with distance 𝑟 Or 𝐵 = = tanθ
,T f[RF dh
by relation 𝐵 ∝ 1/𝑟. Therefore graph (c) is 64 (b)
correct. If both electric and magnetic fields are present
59 (b) and perpendicular to each other and the particle
Here, 2𝑟 = 0.1 nm = 0.1 × 105a m = 105'! m; is moving perpendicular to both of them with 𝐹) =
𝑒 𝑒𝜔
𝑖= = ˆ⃗ ≠ 0 and 𝐁
𝐹@ . In this situation 𝐄 ˆˆ⃗ ≠ 0.
𝑇 2𝜋
+ $%(, + $%( )b
Now, 𝐵 = ! = ! h i
1% & 1% & $%
+ ()b
= 1%! &
1% &
Or 𝜔 = 𝐵. h + i × ()
!
1 (105'! )/2
= 14 × ×
105M 1 × 1.6 × 105'a
= 4.4 × 10'2 rads5' . But if electric field becomes zero, then only force
60 (c) due to magnetic field exists. Under this force, the
Magnetic force on electron = 𝐵𝑒𝑣 sin 𝜃 charge moves along a circle
= 𝐵𝑒𝑣 sin 0 = zero 65 (c)
Electron will not be deflected due to magnetic √$@i %($@i)
𝑟= and 𝐴 = 𝜋𝑟 $ ⇒ 𝐴 = ⇒𝐴∝𝐾
field. Electric force on electron = 𝐸𝑒 A= A#=#
This force is opposite to direction of motion of the 66 (b)
electron. The speed of electron will decrease. 𝑅/ 𝑉 /
𝑉 = 𝑖P 𝑅 and 𝑉 / = 𝑖P 𝑅/ or =
Hence the electron will not be deflected but its 𝑅 𝑉
`+ 8`
speed is decreased Or 𝑅/ = 𝑅= × 50 × 108 = 1.5 × 107 Ω
` `
61 (a) ∴ Additional resistance
When a charged particle having K.E. 𝑇 is subjected = 1.5 × 107 − 0.5 × 107 = 107 Ω
to a transverse uniform magnetic field, it 67 (a)
describes a circular path in the magnetic field 𝑖P 𝐺 𝑖P 𝐺 𝑆' 2𝑖 − 𝑖P
without any change in its speed. Thus, the K.E. of 𝑆' = ; 𝑆$ = ; so, = ¡ ¢
𝑖 − 𝑖P 2𝑖 − 𝑖P 𝑆$ 𝑖 − 𝑖P
the charged particle remains 𝑇 at all times
68 (b)
62 (b)
Here, 𝑣 = 3 × 102 𝑚𝑠 5' ,
69 (b)
𝐵 = 2 × 1051 𝑤𝑏 𝑚5$ = 2 × 1051 𝑇
[𝐹] 𝑀𝐿𝑇 5$
5$
𝑅 = 6𝑐𝑚 = 6 × 10 𝑚. As 𝐵𝑞𝑣 =
@V # A V
or @ = =K 𝐹 = 𝐵𝑖𝑙 ⇒ [𝐵] = = = 𝑀𝑇 5$ 𝐴5'
K [𝑖][𝑙] 𝐴𝐿
Substituting the given values, we get
𝑞 3 × 102
= = 0.25 × 10'$ 𝐶/𝑘𝑔
𝑚 2 × 1051 × 6 × 105$
= 2.5 × 10'' 𝐶/𝑘𝑔 70 (a)
63 (c) Magnetic field in circular coil 𝐴 is
Magnetic force on the rod 𝐹@ = 𝐵𝑖𝑙. It acts in the
+ <,
direction as shown in figure. The rod will move Similarly, 𝐵> = !
$K
with a constant speed if the net force on the rod is
zero. It will be so if 𝑅 is radius and 𝑖 is current flowing in coil.
 µ! 𝑁(2𝑖) 𝜇! 𝑖 𝜇! 𝑖 𝜇! 𝑖 𝑟' + 𝑟$
𝐵= = ∴ 𝐵 = 𝐵' + 𝐵$ = + = o p⨂
2 . (2𝑅) 4𝑟' 4𝑟$ 4 𝑟' 𝑟$
72 (d)
µ! 𝑁𝑖
= Since electron is moving parallel to the magnetic
2𝑅 field, hence magnetic force on it 𝐹@ = 0
®
𝐵> 1 E
= =1
𝐵= 1
–
e v
71 (c) F = eE
®
The magnetic induction due to both semicircular B
parts will be in the same direction perpendicular The only force acting on the electron is electric
to the paper inwards force which reduces it’s speed
 Magnetism and Matter
1. A solenoid has core of a material with relative permeability 500 and its windings carry a current of 1𝐴.
The number of turns of the solenoid is 500 per metre. The magnetization of the material is nearly
a) 2.5 × 10! 𝐴𝑚"# b) 2.5 × 10$ 𝐴𝑚"# c) 2.0 × 10! 𝐴𝑚"# d) 2.0 × 10$ 𝐴𝑚"#
2. Curie’s law can be written as
1 1
a) 𝜒 ∝ (𝑇 − 𝑇% ) b) 𝜒 ∝ c) 𝜒 ∝ d) 𝜒 ∝ 𝑇
𝑇 − 𝑇% 𝑇
3. A magnet of magnetic moment 𝑀 is rotated through 360° in a magnetic field 𝐻. The work done will be
a) 𝑀𝐻 b) 2𝑀𝐻 c) 2𝜋𝑀𝐻 d) Zero
4. The force between two magnetic poles is F. If the distance between the poles and pole strengths of each
pole are doubled, then the force experienced is
a) 2F 𝐹 𝐹 d) F
b) c)
2 4
5. Two equal bar magnets are kept as shown in the figure. The direction of resultant magnetic field,
indicated by arrowhead at the point 𝑃 is (approximately)

a) b) c) d)
6. A magnetic dipole is placed at right angles to the direction of lines of force of magnetic induction 𝐵. If it is
rotated through an angle of 180°, then the work done is
a) 𝑀𝐵 b) 2 𝑀𝐵 c) −2 𝑀𝐵 d) Zero
7. The given figure represents a material which is

a) Paramagnetic b) Diamagnetic c) Ferromagnetic d) None of these

8. The magnetic field of a small bar magnet varies in the following manner by the influence of a magnet
placed at a large distance d.
1 1 1 1
a) b) & c) ! d) '
𝑑 𝑑 𝑑 𝑑

9. The effect due to uniform magnetic field on a freely suspended magnetic needle is as follows
a) Both torque and net force are present b) Torque is present but no net force
c) Both torque and net force are absent d) Net force is present but not torque
10. Two magnets, each of magnetic moment ‘𝑀’ are placed so as to form a cross at right angles to each other.
The magnetic moment of the system will be
a) 2 𝑀 b) √2 𝑀 c) 0.5 𝑀 d) 𝑀
11. Which of the following is true
a) Diamagnetism is temperature dependent
b) Paramagnetism is temperature dependent
c) Paramagnetism is temperature dependent
d) None of these
12. A steel wire of length 𝑙 has a magnetic moment 𝑀. It is bent at its middle point at an angle of 60°. Then
the magnetic moment of new shape of wire will be
a) 𝑀/√2 b) 𝑀/2 c) 𝑀 d) √2𝑀
13. Two bar magnets having same geometry with magnetic moments 𝑀 and 2 𝑀 are firstly placed in such a
way that their poles are same side. Time period of oscillations is 𝑇# . Now the polarity of one of the
magnets is reversed, and time period of oscillations is 𝑇# . Now the polarity of one of the magnets is
reversed, and time period of oscillations is 𝑇& .
a) 𝑇# < 𝑇& b) 𝑇# = 𝑇& c) 𝑇# > 𝑇& d) 𝑇& = ∞
14. The incorrect statement regarding the lines of force of the magnetic field 𝐵 is
a) Magnetic intensity is a measure of lines of force passing through unit area held normal to it
b) Magnetic lines of force form a closes curve
c) Inside a magnet, its magnetic lines of force move from north pole of a magnet towards its south pole
d) Due to a magnet magnetic lines of force never cut each other
15. The most appropriate magnetization 𝑀 versus magnetizing field 𝐻 curve for a paramagnetic substance is
M C
+ A
0 H

– B
D

a) 𝐴 b) 𝐵 c) 𝐶 d) 𝐷
16. Resultant force acting on a diamagnetic material in a magnetic field is in direction
a) From stronger to the weaker part of the magnetic field
b) From weaker to the stronger part of the magnetic field
c) Perpendicular to the magnetic field
d) In the direction making 60° to the magnetic field
17. The dimensions of magnetic permeability are
a) [MLT "& A"& ] b) [ML& T "& A"& ] c) [ML& T "& A"# ] d) [M"# LT "& A"& ]
18. Choose the correct statement
a) A paramagnetic material tends to move from a strong magnetic field to weak magnetic field
b) A magnetic material is in the paramagnetic phase below its Curie temperature
c) The resultant magnetic moment in an atom of a diamagnetic substance is zero
d) Typical domain size of a ferromagnetic material is 1 nm
19. A bar magnet of length 3 𝑐𝑚 has points 𝐴 and 𝐵 along its axis at distances of 24 𝑐𝑚 and 48 𝑐𝑚 on the
opposite sides. Ratio of magnetic fields at these points will be

a) 8 b) 1/2 √2 c) 3 d) 4
20. The figure shows the various positions (labelled by subscripts) of small magnetised needless 𝑃 and 𝑄.
The arrows show the direction of their magnetic moment. Which configuration corresponds to the lowest
potential energy among all the configurations shown

a) 𝑃𝑄! b) 𝑃𝑄' c) 𝑃𝑄$ d) 𝑃𝑄(

21. Ferromagnetic show their properties due to
a) Filled inner subshells b) Vacant inner subshells
c) Partially filled inner subshells d) All the subshells equally filled
22. The strength of the magnetic field in which the magnet of a vibration magnetometer is oscillating is
increased 4 times its original value. The frequency of oscillation would then become
a) Twice its original value b) Four times it original value
c) Half its original value d) One-fourth its original value
23. The magnetic susceptibility of any paramagnetic material changes with absolute temperature 𝑇 as
a) Directly proportional to 𝑇 b) Remains constant
c) Inversely proportional to 𝑇 d) Exponentially decaying with 𝑇
24. The magnetic field lines due to a bar magnet are correctly shown in
a) b)
N N

c) d)
S S

25. A current carrying loop is placed in a uniform magnetic field in four different orientations, I, II, III and IV,
arrange them in the decreasing order of potential energy

I. II.

II. IV.

III > 𝐼𝑉 > 𝐼 > 𝐼𝐼

a) I > 𝐼𝐼𝐼 > 𝐼𝐼 > 𝐼𝑉 b) I > 𝐼𝐼 > 𝐼𝐼𝐼 > 𝐼𝑉 c) I > 𝐼𝑉 > 𝐼𝐼 > 𝐼II d)
26. Magnetic lines of force
a) Always intersect b) Are always closed
c) Tend to crowd far away from the poles of magnet d) Do not pass through vacuum
27. With a standard rectangular bar magnet the time period of a vibration magnetometer is 4 s. The bar
magnet is cut parallel to its length into four equal pieces. The time period of vibration magnetometer
when one piece is used (in second) (bar magnet breadth is small) is
a) 16 b) 8 c) 4 d) 2
28. The time period of oscillation of a bar magnet suspended horizontally along the magnetic meridian is 𝑇) .
If this magnet is replaced by another magnet of the same size and pole strength but with double the mass,
the new time period will be
𝑇 𝑇)
a) ) b) c) √2𝑇) d) 2𝑇)
2 √2
29. If a ferromagnetic material is inserted in a current carrying solenoid, the magnetic field of solenoid
a) Large increases b) Slightly increases c) Largely decreases d) Slightly decreases
30. Which one of the following characteristics is not associated with a ferromagnetic material?
a) It is strongly attracted by a magnet
b) It tends to move from a region of strong magnetic field to a region of low magnetic field
c) Its origin is the spin of electrons
d) Above the Curie temperature, it exhibits paramagnetic properties
31. If a magnetic substance is kept in a magnetic field then which of the following substance is thrown out?
a) Paramagnetic b) Ferromagnetic c) Diamagnetic d) Antiferromagnetic
32. Three identical bar magnets each of magnetic moment 𝑀 are placed in the form of an equilateral triangle
as shown. The net magnetic moment of the system is

a) Zero 3𝑀
b) 2 𝑀 c) 𝑀√3 d)
2
33. A magnet of magnetic moment 𝑀 and pole strength 𝑚 is divided in two equal parts, then magnetic
moment of each part will be
a) 𝑀 b) 𝑀/2 c) 𝑀/4 d) 2𝑀
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :
1 (b) 10 (b)
Here, 𝑛 = 500 turns/m, 𝐼 = 1𝐴, 𝜇* = 500 ®
M ®
Mnet
Magnetic intensity, 𝐻 = 𝑛𝐼 = 500𝑚"# × 1𝐴 = N
500𝐴𝑚"# S N Þ
As 𝜇* = 1 + 𝜒, where 𝜒 is the magnetic S ®
M
susceptibility of the material
or 𝜒 = (𝜇* − 1) ⇒ 𝑀./0 = Š𝑀& + 𝑀& = √2 𝑀
Magnetisation, 𝑀 = 𝜒𝐻 = (𝜇* − 1)𝐻 11 (b)
= (500 − 1) × 500𝐴𝑚"# = 499 × 500𝐴𝑚"# With rise in temperature their magnetic
#
= 2.495 × 10$ 𝐴𝑚"# susceptibility decrease, 𝑖. 𝑒. , 𝜒1 ∝ 2
= 2.5 × 10$ 𝐴𝑚"# 12 (b)
2 © 3
Pole strength = 𝑚 = 4 . When the wire is bent at

3 (d) its middle point 𝑂 at 60°, then as is clear from

𝑊 = 𝑀𝐵(cos 𝜃# − cos 𝜃& ); 𝜃# = 0° and 𝜃& = figure.
360° ⇒ 𝑊 = 0
4 (d)
µ) 𝑚# 𝑚&
𝐹= . … (i)
4𝜋 𝑟 &

When pole strength of each pole become double.

60° + θ + θ = 180°
µ) (2𝑚# )(2𝑚& ) 2θ = 180° − 60° = 120°,
∴ 𝐹+ = . =𝐹
4𝜋 (2𝑟)& ∴ 𝑂𝐴𝐵 is an equilateral triangle.
∴ 𝐴𝐵 = 2𝑙 + = 𝑙/2
5 (b)
New magnetic moment
𝑚𝑙 𝑀
𝑀+ = 𝑚(2𝑙 + ) = =
6 (d) 2 2
13 (a)
θ# = 90°, θ& = 270°,
When polarity is reversed, net magnetic moment
𝑊 = −𝑀𝐵[cos270° − cos90°] =zero
2𝑀 − 𝑀 = 𝑀, decreases. Therefore time period of
7 (b)
oscillation increases 𝑖𝑒, 𝑇& > 𝑇# or 𝑇# < 𝑇& .
14 ©
8 ©
Inside a magnet, magnetic lines of force move
Magnetic field due to short magnet
from south pole to north pole
2𝑀 15 (a)
𝐵 = 10",
𝑑! For paramagnetic substance magnetization 𝑀 is
#
proportional to 5agnetizing field 𝐻, and 𝑀 is
Or 𝐵 ∝ -! positive
16 (a)
Resultant force acting on a diamagnetic material
9 (b) in a magnetic field is in direction from stronger to
When a magnetic needle is placed in a uniform the weaker part of the magnetic field.
magnetic field, equal and opposite forces act on
the poles of the needle which give rise to a torque,
but not net force.
17 (a) 27 (c)
5" 1 # 1 $
From Coulomb’s law, 𝐹 = ; where, 𝑚# , 𝑚& Time period of magnet, 𝑇 = 2𝜋•
:
'6 *$
38%
are pole strengths
4𝜋𝑟 & 𝐹 [L& (MLT "& )] When magnet is cut parallel to its length into four
∴ µ) = = = [MLT "& A"& ]
𝑚# 𝑚& (AL)& 3
equal pieces. Then new magnet moment, 𝑀’ =
'

18 © :
New moment of inertia, 𝐼 + = '
Diamagnetic substances are those substances in
which resultant magnetic moment in an atom is
:&
zero. ∴ New time period, 𝑇’ = 2𝜋•3& 8
%
A paramagnetic material tends to move from a
weak magnetic field to strong magnetic field. ⇒ 𝑇 = 𝑇 + = 4𝑠
A magnetic material is in the paramagnetic phase
above its Curie temperature.
Typical domain size of a ferromagnetic material is 28 (c)
1 mm. 1
𝑇 = 2𝜋— ⇒ 𝑇 ∝ √𝐼 ∝ √𝑤 ⇒ 𝑇 + = √2 𝑇)
The susceptibility of a ferromagnetic material is 𝑀𝐵9
𝜒 >> 1
29 (a)
19 (a)
Both points 𝐴 and 𝐵 lie on axial position
30 (b)
1 𝐵7 𝑑8 ! 48 ! 8 Ferromagnetic material moves from a region of
𝐵∝ !⇒ =Ž • =Ž • =
𝑑 𝐵8 𝑑7 24 1 small magnetic field to a region of strong
20 (d) magnetic field.
𝑃𝑄( corresponds to the lowest potential energy
among all the configurations shown 31 (c)
21 © Magnetic substance when kept in a magnetic field
Partially filled inner subshells are responsible for is feebly repelled or thrown out if the substance is
ferro-magnetic behaviour of such substances. diamagnetic.
22 (a)
Frequency 𝑣 ∝ Š𝐵9
23 ( c)
32 (b)
24 (d)
The resultant magnetic moment can be calculated
as follows:
25 ©
Potential energy, 𝑈 = 𝑴. 𝑩 = −𝑀𝑁 cos θ

Here M = magnetic moment of the loop

θ = angle between M and B

𝑈 is maximum when θ = 180° and minimum 33 (b)

when θ = 0°. So as θ decrease from 180° to 0° its If cut along the axis of magnet of length 𝑙, then
1
PE also decreases. new pole strength 𝑚+ = & and new length 𝑙 + = 𝑙
1 14 3
∴ New magnetic moment 𝑀+ = ×𝑙 = =
26 (b) & & &

S N S N

Page|6
If cut perpendicular to the axis of magnet, then 4 14 3
∴ New magnetic moment 𝑀+ = 𝑚 × = =
& & &
new pole strength 𝑚+ = 𝑚 and new length, 𝑙 + =
𝑙/2

Page|7
 Electromagnetic Induction
1. A horizontal loop 𝑎𝑏𝑐𝑑 is moved across the pole pieces of a magnet as shown in fig. with a constant speed
𝑣. When the edge 𝑎𝑏 of the loop enters the pole pieces at time 𝑡 = 0 𝑠𝑒𝑐, which one of the following graphs
represents correctly the induced emf in the coil

c b N
v
d a

a) e b) e c) e d) e

O t
t O t O t
O

2. Which of the following is not an application of eddy currents

a) Induction furnace b) Galvanometer damping
c) Speedometer of automobiles d) X-ray crystallography
3 When the current changes from +2 A to -2 A in 0.05 s, an emf of 8 V is induced in a coil. The coefficient of
self-induction of the coil is
a) 0.2 H b) 0.4 H c) 0.8 H d) 0.1 H
4. A coil having an area 𝐴! is placed in a magnetic field which changes from 𝐵! to 4𝐵! in a time interval 𝑡. The
e.m.f. induced in the coil will be
3𝐴 𝐵 4𝐴 𝐵 3𝐵! 4𝐵!
a) ! ! b) ! ! c) d)
𝑡 𝑡 𝐴! 𝑡 𝐴! 𝑡
5. Two conducting circular loops of radii 𝑅" and 𝑅# are placed in the same plane with their centres
coinciding. If 𝑅" ≫ 𝑅# , the mutual inductance 𝑀 between them will be directly proportional to
a) 𝑅" /𝑅# b) 𝑅# /𝑅" c) 𝑅"# /𝑅# d) 𝑅## /𝑅"
6. If the current is halved in a coil, then the energy stored is how much times the previous value
1 1 c) 2 d) 4
a) b)
2 4
7. A 50 mH coil carries a current of 2 A, the energy stored in joule is
a) 1 b) 0.05 c) 10 d) 0.1
8. Voltage in the secondary coil of a transformer does not depend upon
a) Voltage in the primary coil b) Ratio of number of turns in the two coils
c) Frequency of the source d) Both (a) and (b)
9. The current carrying wire and the rod 𝐴𝐵 are in the same plane. The rod moves parallel to the wire with a
velocity 𝑣. Which one of the following statements is true about induced emf in the rod
A i

B
a) End 𝐴 will be at lower potential with respect to 𝐵
b) 𝐴 and 𝐵 will be at the same potential
c) There will be no induced e.m.f. in the rod
d) Potential at 𝐴 will be higher than that at 𝐵
10. The flux linked with circuit is given by ϕ = 𝑡 $ + 3𝑡 − 7. The graph between time (𝑥 − axis) and induced
emf (𝑦 − axis) will be a
a) Straight line through the origin b) Straight line with positive intercept
c) Straight line with negative intercept d) Parabola not through the origin
11. The total charge, induced in a conducting loop, when it is moved in a magnetic field depends on
a) Rate of change of magnetic on b) Initial magnetic flux only
c) Total change in magnetic flux and resistance d) Final magnetic flux only
12. What is the mutual inductance of a two-loop system as shown with centre separation 𝑙
1 2
a a

l >>a

𝜇! 𝜋𝑎% 𝜇 𝜋𝑎% 𝜇 𝜋𝑎% 𝜇 𝜋𝑎%

a) b) ! c) ! d) !
8𝑙 $ 4𝑙 $ 6𝑙 $ 2𝑙 $
13. A circular metal plate of radius 𝑅 is rotating with a uniform angular velocity 𝜔 with its plane
perpendicular to a uniform magnetic field B. Then the emf developed between the centre and the rim of
the plate is
a) 𝜋𝜔𝐵𝑅# b) 𝜔𝐵𝑅# c) 𝜋𝜔𝐵𝑅# /2 d) 𝜔𝐵𝑅# /2
14. Two circular coils 𝐴 and 𝐵 are facing each other as shown in figure. When the current 𝑖 through 𝐴 is
altered
A B

a) There will be repulsion between 𝐴 and 𝐵 if 𝑖 is increased

b) There will be attraction between 𝐴 and 𝐵 if 𝑖 is increased
c) There will be neither attraction nor repulsion when 𝑖 is changed
Attraction or repulsion between 𝐴 and 𝐵 depends on the direction of current. It does not depend
d)
whether the current is increased or decreased
15. A rectangular loop of length l and breadth b is placed at distance of 𝑥 from infinitely long wire carrying
current i such that the direction of current is parallel to breadth. If the loop moves away from the current
wire in a direction perpendicular to it with a velocity 𝑣, the magnitude of the emf in the loop is
(µ =permeability of free space)
µ 𝑖𝑣 1 + 𝑏 µ 𝑖#𝑣 𝑏 µ! 𝑖𝑙𝑏𝑣
a) ! r s b) ! log r s c) d)
2𝜋 𝑥 𝑏 #
4π 𝑥 𝑙 2π 𝑥(𝑙 + 𝑥)
16. In what form is the energy stored in an inductor or
A coil of inductance 𝐿 is carrying a steady current 𝑖. What is the nature of its stored energy
a) Magnetic b) Electrical
c) Both magnetic and electrical d) Heat
17. Flux ϕ (in weber) in a closed circuit of resistance 20Ω varies with time t (in second) according to
equation ϕ = 6𝑡 # − 5𝑡 + 1.
The magnitude of the induced current at t =0.25 s is
a) 1.2 A b) 0.8 A c) 0.6 A d) 0.1 A
18. A square coil 𝐴𝐵𝐶𝐷 lying in 𝑥 − 𝑦 plane with it’s centre at origin. A long straight wire passing through
origin carries a current 𝑖 = 2𝑡 in negative 𝑧-direction. The induced current in the coil is
y
A B

C D

a) Clockwise b) Anticlockwise c) Alternating d) Zero

19. According to Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction
a) The direction of induced current is such that it opposes the cause producing it
b) The magnitude of induced e.m.f. produced in a coil is directly proportional to the rate of change of
magnate flux
c) The direction of induced e.m.f. is such that it opposes the cause producing it
d) None of the above
20. Which of the following figure correctly depicts the Lenz’s law. The arrows show the movement of the
labelled pole of a bar magnet into a closed circular loop and the arrows on the circle show the direction of
the induced current

a) b) c) d)

21. In step-up transformer, relation between number of turns in primary (𝑁& ) and number of turns is secondary
(𝑁' ) coils is
a) 𝑁' is greater than 𝑁& b) 𝑁& is greater than 𝑁' c) 𝑁' is equal to 𝑁& d) 𝑁& = 2𝑁'
22. In a transformer, the number of turns in primary coil and secondary coil are 5 and 4 respectively. If 240 𝑉
is applied on the primary coil, then the ratio of current in primary and secondary coil is
a) 4 : 5 b) 5 : 4 c) 5 : 9 d) 9 : 5
23. A transformer has an efficiency of 80%. It is connected to a power input of 5kW at 200 V. If the secondary
voltage is 250 V, the primary and secondary currents are respectively
a) 25 A, 20 A b) 20 A, 16 A c) 25 A, 16 A d) 40 A, 25 A
24. Near a circular loop of conducting wire as shown in the figure an electron moves along a straight line. The
direction of the induced current if any in the loop is

a) Variable b) Clockwise c) Anticlockwise d) Zero

25. A 100% efficient transformer has 100 turns in the primary and 25 turns in its secondary coil. If the current
in the secondary coil is 4 amp, then the current in the primary coil is
a) 1 𝑎𝑚𝑝 b) 4 𝑎𝑚𝑝 c) 8 𝑎𝑚𝑝 d) 16 𝑎𝑚𝑝
26. Core of transformer is made up of
a) Soft iron b) Steel c) Iron d) Alnico
27. A straight wire of length 𝐿 is bent into a semicircle. It is moved in a uniform magnetic field with speed 𝑣
with diameter perpendicular to the field. The induced emf between the ends of the wire is

2𝐵𝑣𝐿
a) 𝐵𝐿𝑣 b) 2𝐵𝐿𝑣 c) 2𝜋𝐵𝐿𝑣 d)
𝜋
28. Figure (i) shows a conducting loop being pulled out of a magnetic field with a speed 𝑣. Which of the four
plots shown in figure (ii) may represent the power delivered by the pulling agent as a function of the
speed 𝑣

a) 𝑎 b) 𝑏 c) 𝑐 d) 𝑐′
29. Two similar circular loops carry equal currents in the same direction. On moving coils further apart, the
electric current will
a) Increase in both b) Decrease in both
c) Remain unaltered d) Increases in one and decreases in the second
30. A varying magnetic flux linking a coil is given by ϕ − 𝑋 𝑡 # . If at time t =3 s, the emf induced is 9V, then the
value of X is
a) 0.66 Wbs (# b) 1.5 Wbs (# c) −0.66 Wbs (# d) −1.5 Wbs (#
31. A moving conductor coil in a magnetic field produces an induced e.m.f. This is in accordance with
a) Ampere’s law b) Coulomb’s law c) Lenz’s law d) Faraday’s law
32. A solenoid is placed inside another solenoid, the length of both being equal carrying same magnitude of
current. The parameters like radius and number of turns are in the ratio 1 : 2 for the two solenoids. The
mutual inductance on each other would be
a) 𝑀"# = 𝑀#" b) 𝑀"# = 2𝑀#" c) 2𝑀"# = 𝑀#" d) 𝑀"# = 4𝑀#"
33. Quantity that remains unchanged in a transformer is
a) Voltage b) Current c) Frequency d) None of these
34. A short solenoid of length 4 cm, radius 2 cm and 100 turns is placed inside and on the axis of a long
solenoid of length 80 cm and 1500 turns. A current of 3 A flows through the short solenoid. The mutual
inductance of two solenoids is
a) 2.96 × 10(% H b) 5.3 × 10() H c) 3.52 × 10($ H d) 8.3 × 10() H
35. A step up transformer connected to a 220 𝑉 𝐴𝐶 line is to supply 22 𝑘𝑉 a neon sign in secondary circuit. In
primary circuit a fuse wire is connected which is to blow when the current in the secondary circuit
exceeds 10 𝑚𝐴. The turn ratio of the transformer is
a) 50 b) 100 c) 150 d) 200
36. A current carrying solenoid is approaching a conducting loop as shown in the figure. The direction of
induced current as observed by an observer on the other side of the loop will be

v
Observer

a) Anticlockwise b) Clockwise c) East d) West

37. A generator at a utility company produces 100 A of current at 4000 V. The voltage is stepped up to 240000
V by a transformer before it is sent on a high voltage transmission line. The current in transmission line is
a) 3.67 A b) 2.67 A c) 1.67 A d) 2.40 A
38. In a uniform magnetic field of induction𝐵, a wire in the form of semicircle of radius 𝑟 rotates about the
diameter of the circle with angular frequency 𝜔. If the total resistance of the circuit is 𝑅, the mean power
generated per period of rotation is
𝐵𝜋𝑟 # 𝜔 (𝐵𝜋𝑟 # 𝜔)# (𝐵𝜋𝑟𝜔)# (𝐵𝜋𝑟𝜔# )#
a) b) c) d)
2𝑅 5 𝑅𝑡 2𝑅 8𝑅
39. A copper ring having a cut such as not to form a complete loop is held horizontally ad a bar magnet is
dropped through the ring with its length along the axis of the ring, figure. The acceleration of the falling
magnet is

a) G b) Less than g c) More than g d) Zero

40. Self-inductance of a coil is 50 𝑚𝐻. A current of 1 𝐴 passing through the coil reduces to zero at steady rate
in 0.1 sec., the self-induced 𝑒𝑚𝑓 is
a) 5 volts b) 0.05 volts c) 50 volts d) 0.5 volts
41. The magnitude of the earth’s magnetic field at a place is 𝐵! and the angle of dip is 𝛿. A horizontal conductor
of length 𝑙, lying north-south, moves eastwards with a velocity 𝑣. The emf induced across the rod is
a) Zero b) 𝐵! 𝑙𝑣 c) 𝐵! 𝑙𝑣sin 𝛿 d) 𝐵! 𝑙𝑣 cos 𝛿
42. The current 𝑖 in a coil varies with time as shown in the figure. The variation of induced emf with time
would be

a) b)

c) d)
43. A loop of area 0.1 𝑚# rotates with a speed of 60 rps perpendicular to a magnetic field of 0.4 T. If there are
100 turns in the loop, maximum voltage induced in the loop is
a) 15.07 V b) 1507 V c) 250 V d) 150 V
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :
1 (d) At 𝑡 = 0; 𝑒 = −3 V
When loop enters in field between the pole pieces, Therefore, shape of graph will be a parabola not
flux linked with the coil first increases through origin.
(constantly) so a constant emf induces. When coil 11 (c)
enters completely within the field, there is no flux Total charge induced in a loop depends on
change, so 𝑒 = 0 resistance and change in magnetic flux linked
When coil exists, flux linked with the coil with the loop.
decreases, hence again emf induces, but in 12 (d)
opposite direction Magnetic field at the location of coil (2) produced
2 (d) due to coil (1)
1 2

3 (d)
i a a
*+ ((#(#)
Induced emf, 𝑒 = −𝐿 *, = −𝐿 !.!)
P l >> a
(4)
8=𝐿
0.05
8 × 0.05 𝜇0 2𝑀
∴ 𝐿= = 0.1 H 𝐵" = .
4 4𝜋 𝑙 $
4 (a) Flux linked with coil (2)
𝑑𝜙 −3𝐵! 𝐴! 𝜇! 2𝑖(𝜋𝑎# )
𝑒=− = 𝜙 = 𝐵" 𝐴# = × (𝜋𝑎# )
𝑑𝑡 𝑡 4𝜋 𝑙 $
1! 23 "
5 (d) Also 𝜙# = 𝑀𝑖 ⇒ 𝑀 =
#4 #
Mutual inductance between two coil in the same 13 (d)
plane with their centers coinciding is given by From Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction,
𝜇! 2𝜋 # 𝑅## 𝑁" 𝑁# the emf induced between center and rim is equal
𝑀= ” • ℎ𝑒𝑛𝑟𝑦
4𝜋 𝑅" to rate of change of magnetic flux.
6 (b)
1 𝑈# 𝑖# # 1 # 1
𝑈 = 𝐿𝑖 # , 𝑖. 𝑒. , = r s = r s = ⇒ 𝑈#
2 𝑈" 𝑖" 2 4
1
= 𝑈"
4
7 (d)
𝑑ϕ
Energy stored, 𝑒=−
1 𝑑𝑡
𝑈 = 𝐿𝑖 # Where, 𝑑ϕ = 𝐵 𝑑𝐴,where 𝐵 is magnetic field and
2
1 𝑑𝐴 the area.
= × 50 × 10($ × 2 × 2 = 0.1 J 5
𝐵 ∫! 𝑑𝐴
2
8 (c) ∴ 𝑒=−
𝑇
𝐵 × 𝜋𝑅#
𝑒=−
9 (d) 𝑇
#2
By Fleming’s right hand rule Also, 𝜔 = , where 𝑇 is periodic time,
6
10 (d) 𝐵𝜋𝑅#
ϕ = 𝑡 # + 3𝑡 − 7 𝑒=−
2𝜋/𝜔
∴ Induced emf 𝐵𝑅# 𝜔
𝑑ϕ = −
𝑒=− = −(3t # + 3) = −3t # − 3 2
𝑑𝑡
14 (a) 20 (a)
With rise in current in coil 𝐴 flux through 𝐵 When a north pole of a bar magnet moves
increases. According to Lenz’s law repulsion towards the coil, the induced current in the coil
occurs between 𝐴 and 𝐵 flows in a direction such that the coil presents its
15 (d) north pole to the bar magnet as shown in figure
We can show the situation as (a). Therefore, the induced current flows in the
coil in the anticlockwise direction. When a north
pole of a bar magnet moves away from the coil,
the induced current in the coil flows in a direction
such that the coil presents its such pole to the bar
magnet as shown in figure (b)

Since, loop is moving away from the wire, so the Therefore induced current flows in the coil in the
direction of current in the loop will be as shown in clockwise direction
the figure. 21 (a)
Net magnetic field on the loop due to wire In step-up transformer, number of turns in
µ! 𝑖 1 1 primary coil is less than the number of turns in
𝐵= r − s secondary coil.
2𝜋 𝑥 𝑙 + 𝑥
µ! 𝑖𝑙 𝑖𝑒,
?$
>1
= ?%
2𝜋𝑥(𝑙 + 𝑥)
So, the magnitude of the emf in the loop 22 (a)
7 +4 9 : 𝑁' 𝑖& 𝑖& 4
𝑒 = 𝑣𝐵𝑏 = # 2 !; ("<;) = ⇒ =
𝑁& 𝑖' 𝑖' 5
23 (c)
@ABCAB C0DEF
Efficiency = GHCAB C0DEF
16 (a)
" Input power=5000 W
Energy stored = # 𝐿𝑖 # , where 𝐿𝑖 is magnetic flux
Input voltage=200 V
17 (d) )!!!
*=
∴ primary current, 𝐼& = = 25 A
#!!
From, Faraday’s second law,𝑒 = − *: I!
Output power = 5000 × "!! = 4000 W
= −[12𝑡 − 5]
= −[12 × (0.25) − 5] = +2 Output voltage =250 V
%!!!
> #
Now, 𝑖 = 5 = #! = 0.1 A Secondary current, 𝐼' = #)!
= 16 A

18 (d) 24 (a)
Magnetic lines are tangential to the coil as shown Since, electron is moving from left to right, the
in figure. Thus net magnetic flux passing through flux linked with loop will first increase and then
the coil is always zero or the induced current will decrease as the electron passes by. Therefore,
be zero induced current 𝐼 in the loop will be first
y clockwise and then will move in anticlockwise
A B direction as the electron passes by.
25 (a)
x
For 100% efficient transformer
𝑉' 𝑖& 𝑁' 𝑖& 25
C D 𝑉' 𝑖' = 𝑉& 𝑖& ⇒ = = ⇒ = ⇒ 𝑖&
𝑉& 𝑖' 𝑁& 4 100
19 (b)
=1𝐴
26 (a)

Page|8
27 (d) v
#J9K
Induced emf 𝑒 = 𝐵𝑣𝑙 ⇒ 𝑒 = 𝐵𝑣(2𝑅) = 2 N N S
28 (b)
Observer
𝐵𝑣𝑙 𝐵# 𝑣 # 𝑙#
𝑃 = 𝐹𝑣 = 𝐵𝑖𝑙 × 𝑣 = 𝐵 r s𝑙 ×𝑣 = ⇒ 𝑃 37 (c)
𝑅 𝑅
∝ 𝑣# For step-up transformer,
29 (a) 𝑉' > 𝑉& and 𝐼' < 𝐼&
On moving the coils further apart initially the flux For an ideal transformer,
linked will reduced. 𝑉' 𝐼' = 𝑉& 𝐼&
Then, according to Lenz’s law current will ∴ 240000𝐼' = 100 × 4000
increase in both the coils to increase the linked or 𝐼' = 1.67 A
flux. 38 (b)
30 (b) The flux associated with coil of area 𝐴 and
From Faraday’s law, induced emf is magnetic induction 𝐵 is
𝑑ϕ ϕ = 𝐵𝐴 cos θ
𝑒=−
𝑑𝑡 1 1
Given , ϕ = 𝑋𝑡 # = 𝐵𝜋𝑟 # cos 𝜔𝑡 «∵ 𝐴 = 𝜋𝑟 # -
2 2
−𝑑(𝑋𝑡 # ) 𝑑ϕ
∴ 𝑒= = −2𝑡𝑋 ∴ 𝑒MHNAOEN = −
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡
Given, 𝑡 = 3, 𝑒 = 9V 𝑑 1
= − r 𝐵𝜋𝑟 # cos 𝜔𝑡s
9 𝑑𝑡 2
∴ 𝑋= = 1.5Wbs(# 1
3×2 = 𝐵𝜋𝑟 # 𝜔 sin 𝜔𝑡
31 (d) 2
𝑒#
∴ power 𝑝 = MHNAOEN
32 (a) 𝑅
𝐵# 𝜋 # 𝑟 % 𝜔# sin# 𝜔𝑡
𝑀 = 𝐾¦𝐿" 𝐿# =
4𝑅
For perfect coupling 𝐾 = 1
Hence,𝑃PEQH =< 𝑝 >
𝑀"# = 𝑀#"
𝐵 # 𝜋 # 𝑟 % 𝜔# 1 1
= . r∵< sin 𝜔𝑡 >= s
4𝑅 2 2
(𝐵𝜋𝑟 # 𝜔)#
33 (c) =
8𝑅
39 (a)
34 (a) Though emf is induced in the copper ring, but
µ! 𝑁" 𝑁# 𝐴#
𝑀#" = there is no induced current because current
𝑙# because of cut in the ring. Hence nothing opposes
(4 × 3.14 × 10(L ) × 1500 × 100 ×
the free fall of the magnet. Therefore, 𝑎 = g.
{3.14(2 × 10(# )# }
∴ 𝑀#" = 40 (d)
80 × 10(#
𝐿 = 50 × 10($ 𝐻
𝑀#" = 2.96 × 10(% H
𝑑𝐼 (1 − 0)
⇒ 𝑀"# = 𝑀#" = 2.96 × 10(% H = = 10
𝑑𝑡 0.1
35 (b) 𝐿. 𝑑𝐼
𝑁' 𝑉' 22000 𝜀= = 50 × 10($ × 10 = 50 × 10(#
= = = 100 𝑑𝑡
𝑁& 𝑉& 220 = 0.5 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡
36 (b) 41 (c)
The direction of current in the solenoid is anti- Horizontal conductor intercepts vertical
clockwise as seen by observer. On displacing it component = 𝐵! sin 𝛿
towards the loop a current in the loop will be ∴ 𝑒 = (𝐵! sin 𝛿)𝑙𝑣
induced in a direction so as to oppose the
approach of solenoid. Therefore the direction of
induced current as observed by the observer will
be clockwise
Page|9
42 (b) 43 (b)
𝑑𝑖 𝑒! = 𝑛𝐴𝐵𝜔
𝜀∝−
𝑑𝑡 = 100 × 0.1 × 0.4 × (2𝜋 × 60) = 150V

P a g e | 10
 Alternating Current

1 The impedance of a circuit consists of 3 𝑜ℎ𝑚 resistance and 4 𝑜ℎ𝑚 reactance. The power factor of the
circuit is
a) 0.4 b) 0.6 c) 0.8 d) 1.0
2. An alternating 𝑒mf is applied across a parallel combination of a resistance 𝑅, capacitance 𝐶 and an
inductance 𝐿. If 𝐼! , 𝐼" , 𝐼# are the current through 𝑅, 𝐿 and 𝐶 respectively, then the diagram which correctly
represents the phase relationship among 𝐼! , 𝐼" , 𝐼# and source 𝑒mf 𝐸, is given by
a) IL b) IR c) IC d) IR
E E E E
IR IL IR IC
IC IC IL IL

3. In 𝐴𝐶 series circuit, the resistance, inductive reactance and capacitive reactance are 3Ω, 10Ω and 14Ω
respectively. The impedance of the circuit is
a) 5Ω b) 4Ω c) 7Ω d) 10Ω
4. The values of L, C and R for a circuit are 1H, 9F and 3Ω. What is the quality factor for the circuit at
resonance?
a) 1 b) 9 1 1
c) d)
9 3
5. The value of alternating emf 𝐸 in the given circuit will be

a) 220 V b) 140 V c) 100 V d) 20 V

6. At high frequency, the capacitor offers
a) More reactance b) Less reactance c) Zero reactance d) Infinite reactance
7. An 𝐿𝐶𝑅 series circuit with 𝑅 = 100Ω is connected to a 200 𝑉, 50 𝐻𝑧 a.c. source when only the capacitance
is removed, the current leads the voltage by 60°. When only the inductance is removed, the current leads
the voltage by 60°. The current in the circuit is
2
a) 2𝐴 b) 1𝐴 c) √3 𝐴 d) 𝐴
2 √3
8. An ac source of variable frequency 𝑓 is connected to an 𝐿𝐶𝑅 series circuit. Which of the graphs in figure
represents the variation of current 𝐼 in the circuit with frequency 𝑓
a) I b) I c) I d) I

0 f 0 f 0 f 0 f

9. The current in series 𝐿𝐶𝑅 circuit will be maximum when 𝜔 is

a) As large as possible b) Equal o natural frequency of 𝐿𝐶𝑅 system
c) √𝐿𝐶 d) f1/𝐿𝐶
10. An alternating voltage (in volt) given by 𝑉 = 200√2 sin(100𝑡) is connected to1𝜇𝐹 capacitor through an AC
ammeter. The reading of the ammeter will be
a) 10 mA b) 20 m A c) 40 mA d) 80 mA
11. The instantaneous values of current and emf in an ac circuit are 𝐼 = 1/√2 sin 314 𝑡 𝑎𝑚𝑝 and 𝐸 =
√2 sin(314 𝑡 − 𝜋/6) 𝑉 respectively. The phase difference between 𝐸 and 𝐼 will be
a) −𝜋/6 𝑟𝑎𝑑 b) −𝜋/3 𝑟𝑎𝑑 c) 𝜋/6 𝑟𝑎𝑑 d) 𝜋/3 𝑟𝑎𝑑
12. The time taken by an alternating current of 50 Hz in reaching from zero to its maximum value will be
a) 0.5 s b) 0.005 s c) 0.05 s d) 5 s
13. The voltage of domestic ac is 220 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡. What does the represent
a) Mean voltage b) Peak voltage
c) Root mean voltage d) Root mean square voltage
14. The initial phase angle for 𝑖 = 10 sin 𝜔𝑡 + 8 cos 𝜔𝑡 is
4 5 4
a) tan$% z { b) tan$% z { c) sin$% z { d) 90°
5 4 5
15. If 𝐴 and 𝐵 are identical bulbs, which bulb glows brighter
100 mH A

10 pF B

a) 𝐴 b) 𝐵 c) Both equally bright d) Cannot say

16. In an AC circuit the voltage applied is 𝐸 = 𝐸& sin 𝜔𝑡. The resulting current in the circuit is 𝐼 =
'
𝐼& sin ~𝜔𝑡 − ( •. The power consumption in the circuit is given by
𝐸& 𝐼& b) P = zero 𝐸& 𝐼&
a) 𝑃 = c) 𝑃 = d) 𝑃 = √2𝐸& 𝐼&
√2 2
17. The phase difference between the voltage and the current in an ac circuit is 𝜋/4. If the frequency is 50 𝐻𝑧
then this phase difference will be equivalent to a time of
a) 0.02 𝑠 b) 0.25 𝑠 c) 2.5 𝑚𝑠 d) 25 𝑚𝑠
18. In the non-resonant circuit, what will be the nature of the circuit for frequencies higher than the resonant
frequency
a) Resistive b) Capacitive c) Inductive d) None of the above
19. The graphs given below depict the dependence of two reactive impedances 𝑋% and 𝑋( on the frequency of
the alternating e.m.f. applied individually to them. We can then say that
Impedance

Impedance
X1 X2

Frequency Frequency
a) 𝑋% is an inductor and 𝑋( is a capacitor b) 𝑋% is a resistor and 𝑋( is a capacitor
c) 𝑋% is a capacitor and 𝑋( is an inductor d) 𝑋% is an inductor and 𝑋( is a resistor
20. In an electrical circuit 𝑅, 𝐿, 𝐶 and an a.c. voltage source are all connected in series. When 𝐿 is removed from
the circuit, the phase difference between the voltage and the current in the circuit is 𝜋/3. If instead, 𝐶 is
removed from the circuit, the phase difference is again 𝜋/3. The power factor of the circuit is
a) 1/2 b) 1/√2 c) 1 d) √3/2

21. The phase difference between the alternating current and emf is 𝜋/2. Which of the following cannot be the
constituent of the circuit?
a) C alone b) R, L c) L, C d) L alone
22. In a series L – C – R circuit, resistance 𝑅 = 10 Ω and the impedance 𝑍 = 10 Ω. The phase difference
between the current and the voltage is
a) 0° b) 30° c) 45° d) 60°
23. The output current versus time curve of a rectifier is shown in the figure. The average value of output
current in this case is
Current

I0

Time

a) 0 𝐼& 2𝐼
b) c) & d) 𝐼&
2 𝜋
24. A transistor-oscillator using a resonant circuit with an inductor 𝐿 (of negligible resistance) and a capacitor
𝐶 in series produce oscillation of frequency 𝑓. If 𝐿 is doubled and 𝐶 is changed to 4𝐶, the frequency will be
a) 𝑓/2√2 b) 𝑓/2 c) 𝑓/4 d) 8𝑓
25. In a series 𝐿𝐶𝑅 circuit, operated with an ac of angular frequency 𝜔, the total impedance is
%/(
1 (
a) [𝑅( + (𝐿𝜔 − 𝐶𝜔) ( ]%/( b) ‰𝑅 + z𝐿𝜔 −
(
{ Š
𝐶𝜔
$%/( %/(
1 ( 1 (
c) ‰𝑅 + z𝐿𝜔 − (
{ Š d) ‰(𝑅𝜔)( + z𝐿𝜔 − { Š
𝐶𝜔 𝐶𝜔
26. In pure inductive circuit, the curves between frequency 𝑓 and reciprocal of inductive reactance 1/𝑋" is

a) b) c) d)

f f f f

27. The maximum voltage in DC circuit is 282V. The effective voltage in AC circuit will be
a) 200 V b) 300 V c) 400 V d) 564 V
28. A resistor 30 Ω, inductor of reactance 10 Ω and capacitor of reactance 10 Ω are connected in series to an
AC voltage source 𝑒 = 300√2 sin(𝜔𝑡). The current in the circuit is
a) 10√2 A b) 10 A c) 30√11 A d) 30/√11 A
29. Q-factor can be increased by having a coil of
a) Large inductance, small ohmic resistance
b) Large inductance, large ohmic resistance
c) Small inductance, large ohmic resistance
d) Small inductance, small ohmic resistance
30. An alternating voltage is represented as 𝐸 = 20 sin 300𝑡. The average value of voltage over one cycle will
be
a) Zero 20
b) 10 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡 c) 20√2 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡 d) 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡
√2

31. The voltage across a pure inductor is represented by the following diagram. Which of the following
diagrams will represent the current
V

a) i b) i c) i d) i

t t t t

32. The current which does not contribute to the power consumed in an AC circuit is called
a) non-ideal current b) wattles current
c) convectional current d) inductance current
33. In a purely resistive ac circuit, the current
a) Lags behind the 𝑒.m.f. in phase
b) Is in phase with the 𝑒.m.f.
c) Leads the 𝑒.m.f. in phase
d) Leads the 𝑒.m.f. in half the cycle and lags behind it in the other half
34. An alternating voltage is connected in series with a resistance 𝑅 and an inductance 𝐿. If the potential drop
across the resistance is 200 𝑉 and across the inductance is 150 𝑉, then the applied voltage is
a) 350 𝑉 b) 250 𝑉 c) 500 𝑉 d) 300 𝑉
35. An 𝐿𝐶𝑅 series ac circuit is at resonance with 10 𝑉 each across 𝐿, 𝐶 and 𝑅. If the resistance is halved, the
respective voltage across 𝐿, 𝐶 and 𝑅 are
a) 10 V, 10 V and 5 V b) 10 V, 10 V and 10 V c) 20 V, 20 V and 5 V d) 20 V, 20 V and 10 V
36. If 𝐿 and 𝑅 represent inductance and resistance respectively, then dimension of 𝐿/𝑅 will be
a) [𝑀𝐿& 𝑇 & ] b) [𝑀& 𝐿& 𝑇 $% ] c) [𝑀& 𝐿& 𝑇 $( ] d) [𝑀& 𝐿𝑇 $( ]
37. In the circuit shown in figure neglecting source resistance, the voltmeter and ammeter readings will be
respectively

a) 0 V, 3 A b) 150 V, 3 A c) 150 V, 6 A d) 0 V, 8 A
38. The resistance of a coil for dc is in ohms. In ac, the resistance
a) Will remain same b) Will increase c) Will decrease d) Will be zero
39. An 𝐿𝐶𝑅 series circuit is at resonance. Then
a) The phase difference between current and voltage is 90°
b) The phase difference between current and voltage is 45°
c) Its impedance is purely resistive
d) Its impedance is zero
40. In the adjoining ac circuit the voltmeter whose reading will be zero at resonance is

a) 𝑉% b) 𝑉( c) 𝑉* d) 𝑉+
41. In an ac circuit the reactance of a coil is √3 times its resistance, the phase difference between the, voltage
across the coil to the current through the coil will be
a) 𝜋/3 b) 𝜋/2 c) 𝜋/4 d) 𝜋/6
42. In a pure inductive circuit or In an ac circuit containing inductance only, the current
a) Leads the 𝑒.m.f. by 90° b) Lags behind the 𝑒.m.f. by 90°
Sometimes leads and sometimes lags behind the
c) d) Is in phase with the 𝑒.m.f.
𝑒.m.f.
43. In L – R circuit, resistance is 8 Ω and inductive reactance is 6 Ω , then impedance is
a) 2 Ω b) 14 Ω c) 4 Ω d) 10 Ω
44. From figure shown below a series L – C – R circuit connected to a variable frequency 200 V source. 𝐶 =
80 𝜇𝐹 and 𝑅 = 40 Ω. Then the source frequency which drive the circuit at resonance is

a) 25 Hz (, c) 50 Hz ,&
b) '
Hz d) '
Hz
45. An AC voltage source of variable angular frequency 𝜔 and fixed amplitude 𝑉& is connected in series with a
capacitance C and an electric bulb of resistance R (inductance zero). When 𝜔 is increased
a) The bulb glows dimmer b) The bulb glows brighter
c) Total impedance of the circuit is unchanged d) Total impedance of the circuit increases
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :
1 (b) %
∴ 𝐿𝜔 = #. This is a resonance circuit
𝑍 = f𝑅 + 𝑋 = f4 + 3 = 5
( ( ( (
𝐸123
𝑅 3 𝑍 = 𝑅; 𝐼123 = , 𝐸123 = 200 𝑉
∴ cos 𝜙 = = = 0.6 𝑅
𝑍 5 200𝑉
∴ 𝐼123 = = 2𝐴
2 (c) 100Ω
'
𝐼" lags behind 𝐼! by a phase of ( , while 𝐼# leads by 8 (d)
' As explained in solution (1) for frequency 0 −
a phase of (
𝑓1 , 𝑍 decreases hence (𝑖 = 𝑉/𝑍) increases and for
3 (a) frequency 𝑓1 − ∞, 𝑍 increases hence 𝑖 decreases
Here, Resistance, 𝑅 = 3Ω 9 (d)
Inductive reactance, 𝑋" = 10Ω At resonant frequency current in series 𝐿𝐶𝑅
Capacitive reactance, 𝑋# = 14Ω circuit is maximum
The impedance of the series 𝐿𝐶𝑅 circuit is 10 (b)
𝑍 = f𝑅( + (𝑋# + 𝑋" )( = f(3)( + (14 − 10)(
𝑍 = 5Ω 11 (a)
4 (c) Phase difference relative to the current
𝜔𝐿 1 1 𝜋 𝜋
𝑄= = × ×𝐿 𝜙 = ~314𝑡 − • − (314 𝑡) = −
𝑅 𝑅 √𝐿𝐶 6 6
% "
12 (b)
= ! •# An alternating current is one whose magnitude
% % % changes continuously with time between zero and
= * × •- = - a maximum value and whose direction reverses
5 (c) periodically. The relation between frequency (𝑓)
For series L – C – R circuit and time (𝑇) is.
𝑉 = f𝑉!( + (𝑉" − 𝑉# )(
= f(80)( + (40 − 100)(
= 100 V
6 (b)
Capacitive reactance is given by
%
𝑋# = . #
Where C is capacitance and 𝜔 the angular
frequency (𝜔 = 2𝜋𝑓).
1
∴ 𝑋# =
2𝜋𝑓𝐶
%
⇒ 𝑋# ∝ 0
1 1
Hence, when frequency 𝑓 increases capacitive 𝑇= = = 0.02 𝑠
𝑓 50
reactance decreases. As is clear from the figure time taken to reach the
7 (a) maximum value is
If the capacitance is removed, it is an 𝐿 − 𝑅 circuit 4 &.&(
= = 0.005 s
𝜙 = 60° + +
𝑋"
tan 𝜙 = = tan 60° = √3
𝑅
If inductance is removed, it is a capacitative
circuit or 𝑅 − 𝐶 circuit. |𝜙| is the same
13 (d)

14 (a) 21 (c)
Current 𝑖 = 𝑖& sin(𝜔𝑡 + 𝜙) (i) In a circuit having C alone, the voltage lags the
'
𝑖6 = 𝑖& sin 𝜔𝑡 cos 𝜙 + 𝑖& cos 𝜔𝑡 sin 𝜙 current by ( .
Thus, 𝑖& cos 𝜙 = 10 (ii) In a circuit containing R and L, the voltage
𝑖& sin 𝜙 = 8 '
leads the current by ( .
+
Hence, tan 𝜙 = , (iii) In L – C circuit, the phase difference between
15 (a) current and voltage can have any
∵ (𝑋# ) >> (𝑋" ) '
value between 0 to ( depending on the
16 (b)
values of L and C.
For given circuit current is lagging the voltage by
(iv) In a circuit containing L alone, the voltage
𝜋/2, so circuit is purely inductive and there is no '
leads the current by ( .
power consumption in the circuit. The work done
by battery is stored as magnetic energy in the 22 (a)
inductor. Impedance,
17 I 𝑍 = f𝑅( + (𝑋" − 𝑋# )(
4 (%/,&) ' %
Time difference = (' × 𝜙 = (' × + = +&& 𝑠 = ∴ 10 = f(10( + (𝑋" − 𝑋# )(
2.5𝑚-𝑠 ⇒ 100 = 100 + (𝑋" − 𝑋# )(
18 (b) ⇒ 𝑋" − 𝑋# = 0
In non resonant circuits …(i)
% Let 𝜙 is the phase difference between current and
Impedance 𝑍 = , with rise in
! ! # voltage
9 # :;.#$ <
" $%
?% $?&
frequency 𝑍 decreases, 𝑖. 𝑒., current increases so tan 𝜙 =
!
circuit behaves as capacitive circuit 0
∴ tan 𝜙 =
19 I 𝑅
%
We have 𝑋# = #×('0 and 𝑋" = 𝐿 × 2𝜋𝑓 ⇒ 𝜙=0 [From Eq.(i)]
23 (c)
20 I 4/( 4/(
∫& 𝑖 𝑑𝑡 ∫& 𝐼& sin(𝜔𝑡)𝑑𝑡
𝐼@A = 4/(
=
𝑋# 𝜋 ∫& 𝑑𝑡 𝑇/2
= tan
𝑅 3 4/(
.4
cos ~ ( • cos 0°
2𝐼& − cos 𝜔𝑡 2𝐼&
= Ÿ = ¡− + ¢
𝑇 𝜔 & 𝑇 𝜔 𝜔
2𝐼& 2𝐼& 2𝐼&
= [− cos 𝜋 + cos 0°] = [1 + 1] =
𝜔𝑇 2𝜋 𝜋
24 (a)
𝜋 %
𝑋# = 𝑅 tan … (i) Frequency of 𝐿𝐶 oscillation = ('√"#
3
𝑋" 𝜋 𝑓% 1 𝐿( 𝐶( %/(
= tan ⇒ = f𝐿( 𝐶( = z {
𝑅 3 𝑓( f𝐿% 𝐶% 𝐿% 𝐶%
2𝐿 × 4𝐶 %/(
=z { = (8)%/(
𝐿×𝐶
0 0! 0
∴ 0! = 2√2 ⇒ 𝑓( = (√( or, 𝑓( = (√( [∵ 𝑓% = 𝑓]
#
25 (b)
𝜋
𝑋" = 𝑅 tan … (ii)
3
Net impedance 𝑍 = f𝑅( + (𝑋" − 𝑋# )( = 𝑅
!
Power factor cos 𝜙 = > = 1

Page|7
26 (c) 𝑃 = 𝐸A . 𝐼A cos 90° = zero
𝑋" = 2𝜋𝑓 Therefore, current through pure L or pure C,
⇒ 𝑋" ∝ 𝑓 which consumes no power for its maintenance in
1 1 the circuit is called ideal current or wattles
⇒ ∝
𝑋" 𝑓 current.
%
𝑖. 𝑒., graph between ? and 𝑓 will be a hyperbola
%
27 (a)
33 (b)
Maximum voltage is AC circuit
𝑉& = 282 𝑉
𝑉& 282 34 (b)
𝑉= = The applied voltage is given by 𝑉 = f𝑉!( + 𝑉"(
√2 √2
282 28200 𝑉 = f(200)( + (150)( = 250 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡
𝑉= =
1.41 141 35 (d)
𝑉 = 200 𝑉
28 (b) 36 (b)
𝑒 = 300√2 sin 𝜔𝑡 𝐿/𝑅 represents time constant of R-L circuit.
𝑒& 300√2 Therefore, its dimensions are [𝑀& 𝐿& 𝑇 % ].
𝐼& = =
𝑍 f(30)( + (10 − 10)( 37 (d)
The voltage 𝑉" and 𝑉# are equal and opposite so,
{∵ 𝑍 = f𝑅( + (𝑋" − 𝑋# )( }
voltmeter reading will be zero.
*&&√(
= *&
= 10√2 A Also, 𝑅 = 30 Ω, 𝑋" = 𝑋# = 25 Ω
C' N
∴ Current 𝐼 = = 10 A So, 𝑖=
√( M! # :(?% $?& )#
29 (a) =!=
N (+&
= 8A
*&
% "
𝑄 factor is given by • 38 (b)
! #
The coil has inductance 𝐿 besides the resistance 𝑅.
So, for large quality factor the inductance should
be large and resistance and capacitance must be Hence for ac it’s effective resistance f𝑅( + 𝑋"( will
small be larger than it’s resistance 𝑅 for dc
30 (a) 39 (c)
In series LCR, the impedance of the circuit is given
31 (d) by
In purely inductive circuit voltage leads the 𝑍 = f𝑅( + (𝑋" − 𝑋# )(
current by 90° At resonance, 𝑋" = 𝑋#
32 (b) ∴𝑍=𝑅
DEFG HIJGE At resonance, the phase difference between the
As, power factor = KHHKEGLD HIJGE
current and voltage is 0°. Current is maximum at
= cos 𝜙
!
resonance
= 40 (d)
M! # :(?% $?& )#

∴ power factor= cos 𝜙 = >

! At resonance net voltage across 𝐿 and 𝐶 is zero
41 (a)
In a non-inductive circuit, 𝑋" = 𝑋#
𝑅 𝑅 𝑋" √3 𝑅
∴ Power factor = cos 𝜙 = = =1 tan 𝜙 = = = √3 ⇒ 𝜙 = 60° = 𝜋/3
𝑅 𝑅
√𝑅( 𝑅
42 (b)
∴ 𝜙 = 0°
This is the maximum value of power factor. In a
pure inductor or an ideal capacitor
𝜙 = 90°
∴ Power factor= cos 𝜙 = cos 90° = 0
Average power consumed in a pure inductor or
ideal capacitor

Page|8
43 (d)
In series L – R circuit, impedance is given by
𝑍 = f𝑅( + 𝑋"( 44 (b)
Where R is the resistance and 𝑋" the inductive
reactance. 45 (b)
Given, 𝑅 = 8Ω, 𝑋" = 6Ω 𝑉123
𝑍 = •𝑅( + 𝑋#( ∶ 𝐼123 = (
: 𝑃 = 𝐼123 𝑅
∴ 𝑍 = f(8)( + (6)( 𝑍
%
Where 𝑋# = .#
= √64 + 36
= √100 = 10 Ω As 𝜔 is increased, 𝑋# will decrease or 𝑍 will
decrease. Hence 𝐼123 𝑜𝑟 𝑃 will increase.
Therefore, bulb glows brighter.
Hence the correct option is (b).

Page|9
 Electromagnetic Waves

1. The average value of electric energy density in an Electromagnetic Waves is (E0 is peak value)
1 𝐸" 1
a) 𝜀! 𝐸!" b) ! c) 𝜀! 𝐸!" d) 𝜀! 𝐸!"
2 2𝜀! 4
2. The speed of electromagnetic Wave in vacuum depends upon the source radiation. It
a) Increases as we move from 𝛾 − 𝑟𝑎𝑦𝑠 to radio waves
b) Decreases as we move from 𝛾 − 𝑟𝑎𝑦𝑠 to radio waves
c) Is same for all of them
d) None of the above
3. Which is having minimum wavelength?
a) X-rays b) Ultraviolet rays c) 𝛾-rays d) Cosmic rays
4. Which of the following shows green house effect?
a) Ultraviolet rays b) Infrared rays c) X-rays d) None of these
&'
5. For EM wave prorogating along 𝑥-axis, 𝐸#$% = 30 Vm . what is maximum value of magnetic
field?
a) 10-7 T b) 10-8 T c) 10-9 T d) 10-6 T
6. What is order of energy of X-rays (EX), radio waves (ER) and microwave (EM)?
a) EX < ER < EM b) EX < EM > ER c) EM > EX > ER d) EM < ER < EX
7. The magnetic field of an Electromagnetic Wave is given by
𝐵( = 3 × 10&) sin (10* 𝑥 + 6.29 × 10'" 𝑡).
The wavelength of the Electromagnetic Wave is
a) 6.28 cm b) 3.14 cm c) 0.63 cm d) 0.32 cm
8. The amplitude of electric field in a parallel beam of light of intensity 4 Wm&" is
a) 40.5 NC &' b) 45.5 NC &' c) 50.5 NC &' d) 55.5 NC &'
9. According to Maxwell’s hypothesis, a changing electric field gives rise to
a) An emf b) Electric current c) Magnetic field d) Pressure radiant
10. If 𝑐 is the speed of Electromagnetic Waves in vacuum, its speed in a medium of dielectric
constant 𝐾 and relative permeability µ, is
1 𝑐 𝐾
a) 𝑣 = b) 𝑣 = 𝑐I𝜇+! 𝐾 c) 𝑣 = d) 𝑣 =
Hµ+ , 𝐾 Hµ+ , 𝐾 √𝜇+ , 𝑐
11. According to Maxwell’s equation the velocity of light in any medium is expressed as
1 1 µ
a) b) c) Hµ/ε d) I !
Hµ! ε! √µε ε
12. An Electromagnetic Wave has
a) Electric vector only
b) Magnetic vector only
c) Electric and Magnetic vector Perpendicular to each other
d) Neither the Electric vector nor the Magnetic vector
13. A radiation of energy 𝐸 falls normally on a perfectly reflecting surface. The momentum
transferred to the surface is
𝐸 2𝐸 𝐸
a) b) c) 𝐸𝑐 d) "
𝑐 𝑐 𝑐
14. A point source of electromagnetic radiation has an average power output of 800 W. The
maximum value of electric filed at a distance 4.0 m from the source is
a) 64.7 Vm&' b) 57.8 Vm&' c) 56.72 Vm&' d) 54.77 Vm&'
15. The electric field of plane electromagnetic wave in vacuum is represented by 𝐄 Q⃗- = 0; 𝐄
Q⃗. =
0.5 cos[2𝜋 × 10/ (𝑡 − 𝑥/𝑐)]: 𝐄 Q⃗𝓏 = 0
What is the direction of propagation of electromagnetic waves?
a) Along 𝑥 − 𝓏 direction b) Along 𝑦-direction
c) Along 𝑥-direction d) A long 𝑦 − 𝓏 direction
16. Light wave is travelling along 𝑦-direction. If the corresponding E vector at any time is along the
𝑥-axis, the direction of B vector at that time is along

a) 𝑦-axis b) 𝑥- axis c) +𝑧- axis d) −𝑧- axis

-2
17. Radiations of intensity 0.5 Wm are striking a metal plate. The pressure on the plate is
&/ &" &/ &" &/ &"
a) 0.166 × 10&/ Nm&" b) 0.332 × 10 Nm c) 0.111 × 10 Nm d) 0.083 × 10 Nm
18. A large parallel plate capacitor, whose plates have an area of 1 m" and are separated from
each other by 1 mm, is being charged at a rate of 25 Vs &' . If the dielectric between the plates
has the dielectric constant 10, then the displacement current at this instant is
a) 25 µA b) 11 µA c) 2.2 µA d) 1.1 µA
19. Instantaneous displacement current of 1.0 A in the space between the parallel plate of 1 µF
capacitor can be estabilished by changing potential difference of
a) 10&1 Vs &' b) 101 Vs &' c) 1 Vs &' d) 0.1 Vs &'
20. If ε! and µ! are the electric permittivity and magnetic permeability of free space and ε and µ
are the corresponding quantities in the medium, the index of refraction of the medium in
terms of above parameter is
εµ εµ '/" ε! µ! ε µ '/"
a) b) ` a c) ` a d) ` ! ! a
ε! µ! ε! µ! εµ εµ
21. All components of the Electromagnetic Spectrum in vacuum have the same
a) Energy b) Velocity c) Wavelength d) Frequency
22. A. The wavelength of microwaves is greater than that of UV-rays.
B. The wavelength of IR rays is lesser than that of UV-rays.
C. The wavelength of microwaves is lesser than that of IR-rays.
D. Gamma rays have shortest wavelength in the Electromagnetic Spectrum.
Of the above statements
a) A and B are true b) B and C are true
c) C and D are true d) A and D are true
23. In an electromagnetic wave, the electric and magnetizing fields are 100 Vm&' and
0.265 Am&' . The maximum energy flow is
a) 26.5 Wm&" b) 36.5 Wm&" c) 46.7 Wm&" d) 765 Wm&"
24. Which of the following electromagnetic waves have the longest wavelength?
a) Heat waves b) Light waves c) Radio waves d) Ultraviolet waves
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :

1 (d) 7 (c)
Electric energy density Given, 𝐵. = 3 × 10&) sin(10* 𝑥 + 6.28 ×
1 " 10'" 𝑡).
𝑢3 = 𝜀! 𝐸4#5
2 Comparing with the general equation
𝐸!
𝐸4#5 = 𝐵. = 𝐵! sin(𝑘𝑥 + 𝜔𝑡)
√2 we get 𝑘 = 10*
1
𝑢3 = 𝜀! 𝐸!" or
"D
= 103
4 ;
2 (c) 2𝜋
⇒ 𝜆= *
Speed of Electromagnetic Waves in vacuum 10
=
'
= costant = 6.28 × 10&* m
67 " 8 " = 0.63 cm
3 (c) 8 (d)
9:
𝐸= ; minimum the wavelength, the 1
; 𝐼= 𝜀 𝐸"𝑐
maximum the energy of a 𝜆 ray. Therefore 2 ! !
"E
rays have minimum wave length or 𝐸" = I8
":
4 (b)
2×4
=n
5 (a) (8.85 × 10 ) × (3 × 10/ )
&'"

The amplitude of the electric and magnetic = 55.5 NC &'

<"
fields in free space are related by ="
=𝑐 9 (c)
According to Maxwell, a changing electric
Here, 𝐸! = 30 Vm&' , 𝑐 = 3 × 10/ ms &'
𝐸! 30 field is a source of magnetic field
∴ 𝐵! = = = 10&) T 10 (c)
𝑐 3 × 10/
6 (b)
The wavelength of X-rays is of the order of 11 (b)
1 Å to 100 Å. The wavelength of radiowaves Velocity of light in a medium,
is of the order of 10> Å to 10'.@ Å. The 1 1
𝑐= =
wavelength of microwaves is of the order of Hµ! ε! µ+ ε+ √µε
10) Å to 10> Å. 12 (c)
Thus, 𝜆A < 𝜆B < 𝜆C A changing electric field produces a changing
The waves with less wave length will have magnetic field and 𝑣𝑖𝑐𝑒 − 𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑠𝑎 which gives
more energy. rise to a transverse wave known as
Hence, Electromagnetic Wave. The time varying
𝐸A > 𝐸B > 𝐸C electric and magnetic fields are mutually
 perpendicular to each other and also propagating wave in space with electric and
perpendicular to the direction of magnetic components. These components
propagation of this wave. oscillate at right angles to each other and to
13 (b) the direction of propagation.
Initial momentum of surface
𝐸
𝑃F =
𝐶
Where, 𝑐 = velocity of light (constant).
Since, the surface is perfectly, reflecting, so
the same momentum will be reflected Hence, B is along the 𝑧-axis at that time.
completely. 17 (a)
Final momentum Intensity or power per unit area of the
<
𝑃G = :
(negative radiations,
value) 𝑃 = 𝑝𝑣
∴Change in momentum 𝑃
⇒ 𝑝=
Δ𝑝 = 𝑝G − 𝑝F 𝑣
!.L
𝐸 𝐸 2𝐸 = * × '!& = 0.166 × 10&/ Nm&"
=− − = −
𝑐 𝑐 𝑐 18 (c)
Thus , momentum transferred to the surface 𝜀! 𝐾𝐴 (8.85 × 10&'" ) × 10 × 1
is 𝐶= =
𝑑 10&*
"< &/
H
𝛥𝑝 = |∆𝑝| = : = 8.85 × 10 F
𝑑 𝑑𝑉
𝑖 = (𝐶𝑉) = 𝐶 = 8.85 × 10&/ × 25
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡
= 2.2 × 10&1 A
19 (b)
𝑄 𝐶𝑉 𝑉
14 (d) = or 𝑖M = 𝐶 ` a
𝑡 𝑡 𝑇
Intensity of electromagnetic wave is 𝐼 = N F' '.!
or O = P = '!() Vs = 101 Vs &'
&'
I#$ <"%
@D×+ %
= "K : 20 (b)
"

7" :I#$ Velocity of light in vacuum

or 𝐸! = I "D+ % '
𝑐 =
67" 8"
(4𝜋 × 10&) ) × (3 × 10/ ) × 800 velocity of light in medium
=n
2𝜋 × (4)" 𝑣 =
'
√7 8
= 54.77 Vm&' 𝑐 𝜇𝜀 '/"
15 (c) ∴ 𝜇= =` a
𝑣 𝜇! 𝜀!
Equation second shows that the
electromagnetic wave travels along the 21 (b)
positive 𝑥-axis All the component of electromagnetic
16 (c) spectrum have same velocity, 𝑖𝑒, 3 ×
The given wave in an Electromagnetic 10/ ms &' .
Waves. Electromagnetic radiation is a self

Page|5
22 (d)
The wavelength order of the given types of 23 (a)
waves are given below Here, amplitude of electric filed, 𝐸! =
Waves Wavelength Range (in meter) 100 Vm&' ; amplitude of magnetic field,
Gamma rays 10&'@ − 10&'! 𝐵! = 0.265 Am&' . We know that the
IR-rays 7 × 10&) = 10&* maximum rate of energy flow
UV-rays 10&> − 4 × 10&) 𝑆 = 𝐸! × 𝐵! = 100 × 0.265 = 26.5 Wm&"
Microwave 10&@ − 10! 24 (c)
Hence, statements (A) and (D) are correct.

Page|6
 Ray Optics
RED ZONE
1. Relation between critical angles of water and glass is
a) 𝐶! > 𝐶" b) 𝐶! < 𝐶" c) 𝐶! = 𝐶" d) 𝐶! = 𝐶" = 0
2. A fish, looking up through the water sees the outside world contained in a circular horizon. If the
refractive index of water is 4/3 and the fish is 12 cm below the surface of water, the radius of the circle in
centimetre is
12 × 3 12 × 3
a) b) 12 × 3 × √5 c) d) 12 × 3 × √7
√5 √7
3. In the formation of primary rainbow, the sunlight rays emerge at minimum deviation from rain-drop
after
a) One internal reflection and one refraction
b) One internal reflection and two refraction
c) Two internal reflection and one refraction
d) Two internal reflection and one refraction
5. Two lenses of power – 15D and +5 D are in contact with each other. The focal length of the combination
is
a) -20 cm b) -10 cm c) +20 cm d) +10 cm
6. A glass convex lens (𝜇" = 1.5) has a focal length of 8 𝑐𝑚 when placed in air. What would be the focal
length of the lens what it is immersed in water (𝜇! = 1.33)
a) 2 𝑚 b) 4 𝑐𝑚 c) 16 𝑐𝑚 d) 32 𝑐𝑚
7. Angle of deviation (𝛿) by a prism (refractive index = 𝜇 and supposing the angle of prism 𝐴 to be small)
can be given by
#$%
sin & 𝜇−1
a) 𝛿 = (𝜇 − 1)𝐴 b) 𝛿 = (𝜇 + 1)𝐴 c) 𝛿 = # d) 𝛿 = 𝐴
sin 𝜇+1
&

8. The ratio of the refractive index of red light to blue light in air is
a) Less than unity
b) Equal to unity
c) Greater than unity
d) Less as well as greater than unity depending upon the experimental arrangement
9. The focal length of convex lens is 30 𝑐𝑚 and the size of image is quarter of the object, then the object
distance is
a) 150 𝑐𝑚 b) 60 𝑐𝑚 c) 30 𝑐𝑚 d) 40 𝑐𝑚
10. If a lens is cut into two pieces perpendicular to the principal axis and only one part is used, the intensity
of the image
a) Remains same ' c) 2 times d) Infinite
b) times
&
11. The focal length of the objective lens of a compound microscope is
a) Equal to the focal length of its eye piece b) Less than the focal length of eye piece
c) Greater than the focal length of eye piece d) Any of the above three
12. A thin lens made of glass of refractive index µ = 1.5 has a focal length equals is 12 cm in air. It is now
(
immersed in water dµ = )e. Its new focal length is
a) 48 cm b) 36 cm c) 24 cm d) 12 cm
13. If the focal length of the objective lens is increased then
a) Magnifying power of microscope will increase but that of telescope will decrease
b) Magnifying power of microscope and telescope both will increase
c) Magnifying power of microscope and telescope both will decrease
d) Magnifying power of microscope will decrease but that of telescope will increase
14. If in compound microscope 𝑚' and 𝑚& be the linear magnification of the objective lens and eye lens
respectively, then magnifying power of the compound microscope will be
a) 𝑚' − 𝑚& b) g𝑚' + 𝑚& c) (𝑚' + 𝑚& )/2 d) 𝑚' × 𝑚&
15. A ray of light passes through four transparent medium with refractive indices µ' , µ& , µ) and µ( as shown
in the figure. The surfaces of all media are parallel. If the emergent ray 𝐶𝐷 is parallel to the incident ray
AB. We must have

a) µ' = µ& b) µ& = µ) c) µ) = µ( d) µ) = µ'

16. A person sees his virtual image by holding a mirror very close to the face. When he moves the mirror
away from his face, the image becomes inverted. What type of mirror he is using?
a) Plane mirror b) Convex mirror c) Concave mirror d) None of these

17. A plano convex lens of (𝑓 = 20 cm) is silvered at plane surface. New 𝑓 will be
a) 20 cm b) 40 cm c) 30 cm d) 10 cm
18. A double convex lens (𝑅' = 𝑅& = 100 cm) having focal length equal to the focal length of a concave
mirror. The radius of the concave mirror is
a) 10 cm b) 20 cm c) 40 cm d) 15 cm
19. A light beam is being reflected by using two mirrors, as in a periscope used in submarines. If one of the
mirrors rotates by an angle 𝜃, the reflected light will deviate from its original path by the angle
a) 2𝜃 b) 0° c) 𝜃 d) 4𝜃
20. Two thin lenses of focal length 20 cm and 25 cm are placed in contact .The effective power of the
combination is
a) 9 D b) 2 D c) 3 D d) 7 D
21. A ray of light coming. Which of the following figures, shows dispersion of light?
a) b) c) d)

R V
R
V

V R
R V
23. A prism 𝐴𝐵𝐶 of angle 30° has its face 𝐴𝐶 silvered. A ray of light incident at an angle of 45° at the face 𝐴𝐵
retraces its path after refraction at face 𝐴𝐵 and reflection at face 𝐴𝐶. The refractive index of the material
of the prism is

a) 1.5 b) 3/√2 c) √2 d) 4/3

24. A point object𝑂is placed in front of a glass rod having spherical end of radius of curvature 30cm. The
image would be formed at

a) 30 cm left b) Infinity c) 1 cm to the right d) 18 cm to the left

25. A 4 cm thick layer of water covers a 6 cm thick glass slab. A coin is placed at the bottom of the slab and is
being observed from the air side along the normal to the surface. Find the apparent position of the coin
from

a) 7.0 cm b) 8.0 cm c) 10 cm d) 5 cm
26. The refractive index of a material of a prism of angles 45° − 45° − 90° is 1.5. The path of the ray of light
incident normally on the hypotenuse side is shown in
a) A b) A
90° 90°

45° 45° 45° 45°

B C B C

c) A d) A
90° 90°

45° 45° 45° 45°

B C B C

27. Monochromatic light of wavelength 𝜆' travelling in medium of refractive index 𝑛' enters a denser medium
of refractive index 𝑛& . The wavelength in the second medium is
𝑛' 𝑛& 𝑛& − 𝑛'
a) 𝜆' x y b) 𝜆' x y c) 𝜆' d) 𝜆' x y
𝑛& 𝑛' 𝑛'
28. In the figure shown, for an angle of incidence 45°, at the top surface, what is the minimum refractive
index needed for total internal reflection at vertical face
45°
Air

+1 3 1
a) √2 b) z c) z d) √2 + 1
2 2 2
29. A thin lens has focal length 𝑓' and its aperture has diameter 𝑑. It forms an image of intensity 𝐼. Now the
*
central part of the aperture upto diameter & is blocked by an opaque paper. The focal length and image
intensity will change to
+ , , )+ , ),
a) & and & b) 𝑓 and ( c) (
and & d) 𝑓 and (
30. A plane mirror produces a magnification of
a) -1 b) +1 c) Zero d) Infinite
32. The objective lens of a compound microscope produces magnification of 10. In order to get an overall
magnification of 100 when image is formed at 25 𝑐𝑚 from the eye, the focal length of the eye lens should
be
25
a) 4 𝑐𝑚 b) 10 𝑐𝑚 c) 𝑐𝑚 d) 9 𝑐𝑚
9
33. The graph between 𝑢 and 𝑣 for a convex mirror is
a) v b) v c) v d) v
f f f f f f f f

u u u u

35. Magnifying power of a simple microscope is (when final image is formed at 𝐷 = 25 𝑐𝑚 from eye)
𝐷 𝐷 𝑓 𝐷
a) b) 1 + c) 1 + d) 1 −
𝑓 𝑓 𝐷 𝑓
36. Which of the following is not due to total internal reflection
a) Brilliance of diamond
b) Working of optical fibre
c) Difference between apparent and real depth of a pond
d) Mirage on hot summer days
39. Two plane mirrors are inclined at an angleθ. It is found that a ray incident on one mirror at any angle is
rendered parallel to itself after reflection from both the mirrors. The value of θ is
a) 30° b) 60° c) 90° d) 120°
40. When a ray of light enters a glass slab from air
a) Its wavelength decreases
b) Its wavelength increases
c) Its frequency increases
d) Neither its wavelength nor its frequency changes
41. In a thin spherical fish bowl of radius 10 𝑐𝑚 filled with water of refractive index 4/3 there is a small fish
at a distance of 4 𝑐𝑚 from the centre 𝐶 as shown in figure. Where will the image of fish appear, if seen
from 𝐸

C E

4 cm

a) 5.2 𝑐𝑚 b) 7.2 𝑐𝑚 c) 4.2 𝑐𝑚 d) 3.2 𝑐𝑚

42. The radius of the convex surface of plano-convex lens is 20 𝑐𝑚 and the refractive index of the material of
the lens is 1.5. The focal length of the lens is
a) 30 𝑐𝑚 b) 50 𝑐𝑚 c) 20 𝑐𝑚 d) 40 𝑐𝑚
43. A light ray is incident perpendicular to one face of a 90° prism and is totally internally reflected at the
glass-air interface. If the angle of reflection is 45°, we conclude that the refractive index 𝑛

1 1
a) 𝑛 < b) 𝑛 > √2 c) 𝑛 > d) 𝑛 < √2
√2 √2
44. A ray of light is incident at 60° on one face of a prism which has angle 30°. The angle between the
emergent ray and incident ray is 30°. What is the angle between the ray and the face from which its
emerge?
a) 0° b) 30° c) 60° d) 90°
45. A convex lens is immersed in a liquid, whose refractive index is equal to the refractive index of the
material of the lens. Then its focal length will
a) Decrease b) Become zero c) Become infinite d) Increase
46. The length of the tube of a microscope is 10 𝑐𝑚. The focal lengths of the objective and eye lenses are
0.5 𝑐𝑚 and 1.0 𝑐𝑚. The magnifying power of the microscope is about
a) 5 b) 23 c) 166 d) 500
48. 𝑃 is a point on the axis of a convex mirror. The image of 𝑃 formed by the mirror, coincides with 𝑃. A
rectangular glass slab of thickness 𝑡 and refractive index µ is now introduced between 𝑃 and the mirror.
For the image of 𝑃 to coincide with 𝑃 again, the mirror must be moves
a) Towards 𝑃 by (µ − 1)𝑡 b) Away from 𝑃 by (µ − 1)𝑡
' '
c) Towards 𝑃 by 𝑡 d1 − -e d) Away from 𝑃 by 𝑡 d1 − -e

49. An object placed 10 𝑐𝑚 in front of a lens has an image 20 𝑐𝑚 behind the lens. What is the power of the
lens (in 𝑑𝑖𝑜𝑝𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑠)
a) 1.5 b) 3.0 c) −15.0 d) +15.0
50. Two similar plano-convex lenses are combined together in three different ways as shown in the adjoining
figure. The ratio of the focal lengths in three cases will be

a) 2 ∶ 2 ∶ 1 b) 1 ∶ 1 ∶ 1 c) 1 ∶ 2 ∶ 2 d) 2 ∶ 1 ∶ 1
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :
1 (a) Since light transmitting area is same, there is no
𝜇. < 𝜇" ⇒ 𝑐. > 𝑐" effect on intensity
2 (c) 11 (b)
/ For a compound microscope 𝑓74869:;<6 < 𝑓6=6 ?;696
From figure, tan 𝐶 = '&
r 12 (a)
Focal length in air is given by
C 1 1 1
= ’ 1 µ@ − 1“ x − y
𝑓1 ₐ 𝑅' 𝑅&
(
c
The focal length of lens immersed in water is
given by
1 1 1
or 𝑟 = 12 tan 𝐶 = ’ 0 𝑛@ − 1“ x − y
12 sin 𝐶 𝑓' 𝑅' 𝑅&
or 𝑟 = When, 𝑅' , 𝑅& are radii of curvatures of the two
√1 − sin& 𝐶
' surfaces of lens and 0 𝑛@ is refractive index of glass
12 × 12 12
- with respect to liquid.
𝑟= = =
&
Œ1 − -! gµ − 1 Œd(e − 1
' & A
Also, 0 µ@ = ₐ" A#
) " $
(
12 × 3 Given, ₐ 1 𝑛@ = 1.5, 𝑓1 ₐ = 12 cm, ₐ 1 𝑛0 = )
𝑖𝑒, 𝑟 =
√7 𝑓0 ’ₐ 1 𝑛@ − 1“
3 (b) ∴ =
𝑓1 ₐ ’ 0 𝑛@ − 1“
𝑓' (1.5 − 1) 0.5 × 4
5 (b) = =
12 d '.3 − 1e 0.5
Power of lens is reciprocal of its focal length. (/)
Power of combined lens is ⇒ 𝑓' = 4 × 12 = 48 cm
𝑃 = 𝑃₁ + 𝑃₂
= −15 + 5 = −10 𝐷 13 (d)
1 100 A microscope consists of lens of small focal
∴𝑓= = 𝑐𝑚
𝑃 −10 lengths. A telescope consists of objective lens of
𝑓 = −10 𝑐𝑚 large focal length
6 (d) 14 (d)
𝑓0 (1 𝜇" − 1) Magnification of a compound microscope is given
=
𝑓1 (0 𝜇" − 1) by
𝑓. (1.5 − 1) 𝑣7 𝐷
⇒ = ⇒ 𝑓. = 32 𝑐𝑚 𝑚=− × ⇒ |𝑚| = 𝑚7 × 𝑚6
𝑓1 d '.3 − 1e 𝑢7 𝑢6
'.))
15 (a)
7 (a)
As there is no deflection between medium 1 and
2. Therefore, µ' = µ&
8 (a)
16 (b)
𝜇4056 > 𝜇/6*
Plane mirror and convex mirror always from
9 (a)
erect images. Image formed by concave mirror
𝑓 1 30
𝑚= ⇒− = ⇒ 𝑢 = −150 𝑐𝑚 may be erected or inverted depending on position
𝑓+𝑢 4 30 + 𝑢
of object.

10 (a)
17 (c)
 ' ' '
As = (µ − 1) d − e
+ D% D!
1 1 1
∴ = (1.5 − 1) x − y 24 (a)
20 ∞ 𝑅
' F' By using formula,
&E
= &D , 𝑅 = −10 cm µ₂ µ₁ µ₂ − µ₁
− =
Refraction from rarer to denser medium 𝑣 𝑢 𝑅
- - - F-
− 5% + <! = ! D % , where 𝑢 = ∞, 𝑣 = 𝑓 1.5 1 1.5 − 1
⟹ − =
𝑣 (−15) +30
1.5 1.5 − 1 1
∴0+ = = , 𝑓 = 30 cm
𝑓 10 20 ⟹ 𝑣 = −30 𝑐𝑚
18 (b)
Focal length of convex lens 25 (a)
1 1 1 Using equation, the total apparent shift is
= (µ − 1) x − y
𝑓 𝑅' 𝑅&
𝑅' = 10 cm, 𝑅& = −10 cm, µ = 1.5 (for glass)
1 1 1
= (1.5 − 1) x − y
𝑓 10 −10
2
= 0.5 x y
10
10
𝑓= 1 1
2 × 0.5 𝑠 = ℎ' x1 − y + ℎ& x1 − y
⇒ 𝑓 = 10 cm µ' µ&
' '
Or 𝑠 = 4 d1 − e + 6 d1 − e
∴ Focal length of concave mirror (/) )/&
= 3.0 cm
= 10 cm Thus, ℎ = ℎ' + ℎ& − 𝑠 = 4 + 6 − 3
= 7.0 cm
∴ Radius of curvature = 2 × 10 = 20 cm
26 (a)
19 (a) According to given conditions TIR must take place
When a mirror is rotated by an angle 𝜃, the at both the surfaces 𝐴𝐵 and 𝐴𝐶. Hence only option
reflected ray deviates from its original path by (𝑎) is correct
angle 2𝜃 27 (a)
20 (a) 𝑐 𝑣𝜆 𝜆
𝑛' = = =
𝑃 = 𝑃' + 𝑃& 𝑣' 𝑣𝜆' 𝜆'
1 1 100 100 𝑐 𝑣𝜆 𝜆
= + = + 𝑛& = = =
𝑓' 𝑓& 20 25 𝑣& 𝑣𝜆& 𝜆&
A G
= 5 + 4 = 9D Now, A% = G!
! %
21 (d) A%
Or 𝜆& = dA e 𝜆'
After refraction through a medium, red rays !

deviate less. Also, since air is rarer than water, so 28 (b)

the rays bend towards the normal. So, the correct At point 𝐴, by Snell’s law
dispersion pattern is (b). sin 45 1
𝜇= ⇒ sin 𝑟 = … (i)
23 (c) sin 𝑟 𝜇√2
'
𝐴 = 𝑟 + 0 ⇒ 𝑟 = 30° At point 𝐵, for total internal reflection sin 𝑖' = H
sin 𝑖 sin 45°
∴𝜇= = = √2 45°
sin 𝑟 sin 30° Air
A
r
90°
i1
B µ

From figure, 𝑖' = 90 − 𝑟

Page|8
 1
∴ sin(90° − 𝑟) =
𝜇
1 40 (a)
⇒ cos 𝑟 = … (ii) 1
𝜇 µ∝
'
λ
Now cos 𝑟 = √1 − sin& 𝑟 = Œ1 − &H! µJKLMN < µ
∴ λOPQMN < λJKLMN
2𝜇& − 1 𝑖𝑒, wavelength decreases.
=z … (iii)
2𝜇& 41 (a)
H H H FH
' &H ! F' By using <! − 5% = ! D %
From equation (ii) and (iii), H = Œ
&H ! (
where 𝜇' = ) , 𝜇 = 1, 𝑢 = −6𝑐𝑚, 𝑣 =?
Squaring both side and then solving, we get 𝜇 =
On putting values 𝑣 = −5.2 𝑐𝑚
)
Π42 (d)
&
1 1 1
29 (d) = (1.5 − 1) x − y ⇒ 𝐹 = 40 𝑐𝑚
I/ ! 𝐹 20 ∞
𝐼& 𝐴&
& 𝜋𝑟 & − 3 43 (b)
(
𝐼 ∝ 𝐴& ⇒ = x y = =
𝐼' 𝐴' 𝜋𝑟 & 4 For total internal reflection from glass-air
)
⇒ 𝐼& = 𝐼' and focal length remains unchanged interface, critical angle 𝐶 must be less than angle
(
30 (b) of incidence.
The image formed by a plane mirror is virtual, 𝑖𝑒 𝐶 < 𝑖
erect, laterally inverted, equal in size as that of the 𝑜𝑟 𝐶 < 45° (∵ ∠𝑖 = 45°)
1 1
object and at a distance equal to the distance of 𝑏𝑢𝑡 𝑛 = ⟹ 𝐶 = sinF' x y
the object in front of the mirror. sin 𝐶 𝑛
32 (c)
𝐷
𝑚 = 𝑚7 × 𝑚6 ⇒ 𝑚 = 𝑚7 × x1 + y
𝑓6
25 25
⇒ 100 = 10 × x1 + y ⇒ 𝑓6 = 𝑐𝑚
𝑓6 9
33 (a)
As 𝑢 goes from 0 to −∞, 𝑣 goes from +0 to +𝑓
35 (b)

1
36 (c) ∴ sinF' x y < 45°
𝑛
Real & apparent depth are explained on the basis 1
of refraction only. TIR not involved here ⟹ < sin 45°
𝑛
1
⟹𝑛>
sin 45°
39 (c) 1
⟹𝑛> '
Incident ray and finally reflected ray are parallel d e
√&
to each other means δ = 180°
From δ = 360° − 2θ ⟹ 𝑛 > √2
⇒ 180° = 360° − 2θ 44 (d)
Here, 𝑖' = 60°, 𝐴 = 30°, 𝛿 = 30°
⇒ θ = 90° As 𝑖' + 𝑖& = 𝐴 + 𝛿,
𝑖& = 0
Hence, angle between the ray and the face from
which it emerges = 90° − 0° = 90°
45 (c)
Given, 1 µ@ = 1 µ6

Page|9
 The focal length of convex lens in liquid 𝑓 is given :
shifts towards the mirror by d𝑡 − e. Hence, the
-
by
mirror must be moved in the same direction
1 1 µ@ 1 1
=x − 1y x − y through the same distance
𝑓 ₐ 1 µ6 ₑ 𝑅' 𝑅&
1 1 1
= (1 − 1) x − y
𝑓 𝑅' 𝑅&
1 49 (d)
=0 𝑢 = −10 𝑐𝑚, 𝑣 = 20 𝑐𝑚
𝑓
1 1 1 1 1 3 20
Or 𝑓 = ∞ = − = − x− y = ⇒𝑓= 𝑐𝑚
𝑓 𝑣 𝑢 20 10 20 3
Its focal length will become infinite. 'EE 'EE
46 (d) Now 𝑃 = + = &E/) = +15 𝐷
𝐿𝐷 10 × 25 50 (b)
𝑚≃ ⇒𝑚= = 500
𝑓7 𝑓6 0.5 × 1 In each case two plane-convex lens are placed
48 (c) ' ' '
close to each other, and T = + + +
When a slab of thickness 𝑡 is introduced between % !

𝑃 and the mirror, the appearent position of 𝑃

P a g e | 10
 Wave Optics

1. The phenomenon of polarization of light indicates that

a) Light is a longitudinal wave
b) Light is a transverse wave
c) Light is not a wave
d) Light travels with the velocity of 3 × 10! ms"#
2. The fringe width in Young’s double slit experiment increases when
a) Wavelength increases
b) Distance between the slits increases
c) Distance between the source and screen decreases
d) The width of the slits increases
3. When the angle of incidence on a material is 60°, the reflected light is completely polarized. The velocity of
the refracted ray inside the material is (in 𝑚𝑠 "# )
3
a) 3 × 10! b) K N × 10! c) √3 × 10! d) 0.5 × 10!
√2
4. The principle of superposition is basic to the phenomenon of
a) Total internal reflection b) Interference
c) Reflection d) Refraction
5. Wavefront means
a) All particles in it have same phase
b) All particles have opposite phase of vibrations
c) Few particles are in same phase, rest are in opposite phase
d) None of these
6. In Young’s double slit experiment we get 60 fringes in the field of view of monochromatic light of
wavelength 4000Å. If we use monochromatic light of wavelength 6000 Å, then the number of fringes
obtained in the same field of view are
a) 60 b) 90 c) 40 d) 1.5
7. An unpolarised beam of intensity 𝐼$ is incident on a pair of nicols making an angle of 60° with each other.
The intensity of light emerging from the pair is
a) 𝐼$ b) 𝐼$ /2 c) 𝐼$ /4 d) 𝐼$ /8
8. In Young’s double slit experiment, the 8𝑡ℎ maximum with wavelength 𝜆# is at a distance 𝑑# from the
central maximum and the 6𝑡ℎ maximum with a wavelength 𝜆% is at a distance 𝑑% . Then (𝑑# /𝑑% ) is equal to
4 𝜆% 4 𝜆# 3 𝜆% 3 𝜆#
a) K N b) K N c) K N d) K N
3 𝜆# 3 𝜆% 4 𝜆# 4 𝜆%
9. The phenomenon which does not take place in sound waves is
a) Scattering b) Diffraction c) Interference d) Polarisation
10. Intensities of the two waves of light are 𝐼 and 4𝐼. The maximum intensity of the resultant wave after
superposition is
a) 5 𝐼 b) 9 𝐼 c) 16 𝐼 d) 25 𝐼
11. Two identical radiators have a separation of 𝑑 = 𝜆/4 where 𝜆 is the wavelength of the waves emitted by
either source. The initial phase difference between the sources is 𝜋/4. Then the intensity on the screen at a
distant point situated at an angle 𝜃 = 30° from the radiators is (here 𝐼& is intensity at that point due to one
radiator alone)
a) 𝐼& b) 2𝐼& c) 3𝐼& d) 4𝐼&
12. Huygen’s principle of secondary wavelets may be used to
a) Find the velocity of light in vacuum b) Explain the particle behavior of light
c) Find the new position of the wavefront d) Explain photoelectric effect
13. The ratio of the intensity at the centre of a bright fringe to the intensity at a point one-quarter of the
distance between two fringe from the centre is
a) 2 b) 1/2 c) 4 d) 16
'(
14. 𝑛th Bright fringe if red light k𝜆# = 7500 Åm coincides with (𝑛 + 1) bright fringe of green
lightk𝜆% = 6000 Åm. The value of 𝑛 =?
a) 4 b) 5 c) 3 d) 2
15. The Young’ experiment is performed with the lights of blue (𝜆 = 4360 Å) and green colour (𝜆 = 5460Å), if
the distance of the 4th fringe from the centre is 𝑥, then
𝑥(𝐵𝑙𝑢𝑒) 5460
a) 𝑥 (Blue) = 𝑥 (Green) b) 𝑥(Blue) > 𝑥(Green) c) 𝑥(Blue) < 𝑥(Green) d) =
𝑥 (𝐺𝑟𝑒𝑒𝑛) 4360
16. Refractive index of material is equal to tangent of polarizing angle. It is called
a) Brewster’s law b) Lambert’s law c) Malus’s law d) Bragg’s law
17. In the far field diffraction pattern of a single slit under polychromatic illumination, the first minimum with
the wavelength 𝜆# is found to be coincident with the third maximum at 𝜆% . So
a) 3𝜆# = 0.3𝜆% b) 3𝜆# = 𝜆% c) 𝜆# = 3.5𝜆% d) 0.3𝜆# = 3𝜆%
)
18. If two waves represented by 𝑦# = 4 sin 𝜔𝑡 and 𝑦% = 3 sin }𝜔𝑡 + ~ interfere at a point, the amplitude of
*
the resulting wave will be about
a) 7 b) 6 c) 5 d) 3.5
19. Two light rays having the same wavelength 𝜆 in vacuum are in phase initially. Then the first ray travels a
path 𝐿# through a medium of refractive index 𝑛# while the second ray travels a path of length 𝐿% through a
medium of refractive index 𝑛% . The two waves are then combined to produce interference. The two waves
are then combined to produce interference. The phase difference between the two waves is
2𝜋 2𝜋 2𝜋 2𝜋 𝐿# − 𝐿%
a) (𝐿% − 𝐿# ) b) (𝑛# 𝐿# − 𝑛% 𝐿% ) c) (𝑛% 𝐿# − 𝑛# 𝐿% ) d) K N
𝜆 𝜆 𝜆 𝜆 𝑛# − 𝑛%
20. Two polaroids are placed in the path of unpolarised beam of intensity 𝐼$ such that no light is emitted from
the second polaroid. If a third polaroid whose polarization axis makes an angle 𝜃 with the polarization axis
of first polaroid, is placed between these polaroids then the intensity of light emerging from the last
polaroid will be
𝐼 𝐼 𝐼
a) K $ N sin% 2𝜃 b) K $ N sin% 2𝜃 c) K $ N cos + 2𝜃 d) 𝐼$ cos + 𝜃
8 4 2
21. What will be the angular width of central maxima in Fraunhoffer diffraction when light of wavelength
6000Å is used and slit width is 12 × 10", 𝑐𝑚
a) 2 𝑟𝑎𝑑 b) 3 𝑟𝑎𝑑 c) 1 𝑟𝑎𝑑 d) 8 𝑟𝑎𝑑
22. Two sources of same intensity interfere at a point and produced resultant 𝐼. When one source is removed,
the intensity at that point will be
a) 𝐼 b) 𝐼/2 c) 𝐼/4 d) 𝐼/3
23. If the two waves represented by 𝑦# = 4 sin 𝜔𝑡 and 𝑦% = 3 sin(𝜔𝑡 + 𝜋/3) interfere at a point, the
amplitude of the resulting wave will be about
 a) 7 b) 5 c) 6 d) 3.5
24. In Young’s double slit experiment, if the widths of the slits are in the ratio 4 : 9, the ratio of the intensity at
maxima to the intensity at minima will be
a) 169 : 25 b) 81 : 16 c) 25 : 1 d) 9 : 4
25. In the phenomenon of diffraction of light, when blue light is used in the experiment instead of red light,
then
a) Fringes will become narrower b) Fringes will become broader
c) No change in fringe width d) None of the above
26. The angle of polarization for any medium is 60°, what will be critical angle for this
1
a) sin"# √3 b) tan"# √3 c) cos "# √3 d) sin"#
√3
27. An unpolarised beam of intensity 2 𝑎% passes through a thin Polaroid. Assuming zero absorption in the
Polaroid, the intensity of emergent plane polarized light is
𝑎%
a) 2 𝑎% b) 𝑎% c) √2𝑎% d)
2
28. Ray diverging from a point source form a wave front that is
a) Cylindrical b) Spherical c) Plane d) Cubical
29. Two light sources are said to be of coherent nature
a) When they have same frequency and a varying phase difference
b) When they have same frequency and a constant phase difference
c) When they have constant phase difference and different frequencies
d) When they have varying phase difference and different frequencies
30. Two waves 𝑦# = 𝐴# sin(𝜔𝑡 − 𝛽# ) and 𝑦% = 𝐴% sin(𝜔𝑡 − 𝛽% ) superimpose to form a resultant wave whose
amplitude is
a) ‡𝐴#% + 𝐴%% + 2𝐴# 𝐴% cos(𝛽# − 𝛽% ) b) ‡𝐴#% + 𝐴%% + 2𝐴# 𝐴% sin(𝛽# − 𝛽% )
c) 𝐴# + 𝐴% d) |𝐴# + 𝐴% |
31. Wave nature of light is verified by
a) Interference b) Photoelectric effect c) Reflection d) Refraction
32. In young’s double slit experiment, the intensity of the maxima is𝐼. If the width of each slit is doubled, the
intensity if the maxima will be
a) 𝐼/2 b) 2𝐼 c) 4𝐼 d) 𝐼
33. An unpolarised beam of intensity 𝐼$ falls on a polariod. The intensity of the emergent light is
𝐼 𝐼 d) Zero
a) $ b) 𝐼$ c) $
2 4
34. 100 𝜋 phase difference = ……. Path difference.
a) 10𝜆 b) 25𝜆 c) 50𝜆 d) 100𝜆
35. A narrow slit of width 2 mm is illuminated by monochromatic light of wavelength 500 nm. The distance
between the first minima on either side on a screen at a distance of 1 m is
a) 5 mm b) 0.5 mm c) 1 mm d) 10 mm
36. In a Young’s double slit experiment using red and blue lights of wavelengths 600 nm and 480 nm
respectively, the value of 𝑛 from which the 𝑛'( red fringe coincides with (𝑛 + 1) the blue fringe is
a) 5 b) 4 c) 3 d) 2
37. By corpuscular theory of light, the phenomenon which can be explained is
a) Refraction b) Interference c) Diffraction d) Polarization
38. When two coherent monochromatic beams of intensity I and 9I interface, the possible maximum and
minimum intensities of the resulting beam are
a) 9I and I b) 9I and 4I c) 16I and 4I d) 16I and I
39. In Young’s double slit experiment if monochromatic light used is replaced by white light, then
a) No fringes are observed
b) Only central fringe is white, all other fringes are coloured
 c) All bright fringes become white
d) All bright fringes have colours between violet and red
40. In an interference pattern the position of zeroth order maxima is 4.8 mm from a certain point 𝑃 on the
screen. The fringe width is 0.2 mm. The position of second maxima from point 𝑃 is
a) 5.1 mm b) 5 mm c) 40 mm d) 5.2 mm
41. Two coherent monochromatic light beams of intensities 𝐼 and 4𝐼 are superposed. The maximum and
minimum possible intensities in the resulting beam are
a) 5𝐼 and 𝐼 b) 5𝐼 and 3𝐼 c) 9𝐼 and 𝐼 d) 9𝐼 and 3𝐼
42. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the fringe width is found to be 0.4 𝑚𝑚. If the whole apparatus is
immersed in water of refractive index 4/3 without disturbing the geometrical arrangement, the new fringe
width will be
a) 0.30 𝑚𝑚 b) 0.40 𝑚𝑚 c) 0.53 𝑚𝑚 d) 450 𝑚𝑖𝑐𝑟𝑜𝑛
43. The diffraction effect can be observed in
a) Only sound waves b) Only light waves
c) Only ultrasonic waves d) Sound as well as light waves
44. Plane polarized light is passed through a polaroid. On viewing through the polaroid we find that when the
polariod is given one complete rotation about the direction of the light, one of the following is observed
a) The intensity of light gradually decreases to zero and remains at zero
b) The intensity of light gradually increases to a maximum and remains at maximum
c) There is no change in intensity
d) The intensity of light is twice maximum and twice zero
45. What causes change in the colours of the soap or oil films for the given beam of light
a) Angle of incidence b) Angle of reflection c) Thickness of film d) None of these
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :
1 (b)
The polarization is the property of 10 (b)
electromagnetic waves such as light which 𝐼678 = 𝐼# + 𝐼% + 2–𝐼# 𝐼%
describes the direction of their transverse electric So, 𝐼678 = 𝐼 + 4𝐼 + 2√𝐼. 4𝐼 = 9𝐼
field. More generally, the polarization of 11 (b)
transverse wave describes the direction of The intensity at a point on screen is given by
oscillation, in the plane perpendicular to the 𝐼 = 4𝐼$ cos % (𝜙/2)
direction of travel. Longitudinal waves such as Where 𝜙 is the phase difference. In this problem
sound waves do not exhibit polarization, becomes 𝜙 arises (i) due to initial phase difference of 𝜋/4
for these waves the direction of oscillation is and (ii) due to path difference for the observation
along the direction of travel. point situated at 𝜃 = 30°. Thus
𝜋 2𝜋 𝜋 2𝜋 𝜆
2 (a) 𝜙= + (𝑑 sin 𝜃) = + . (sin 30°)
𝜆𝐷 4 𝜆 4 𝜆 4
𝛽= ⇒𝛽∝𝜆 𝜋 𝜋 𝜋
𝑑 = + =
4 4 2
3 (c) 9 )
. Thus % = + and 𝐼 = 4𝐼$ cos % (𝜋/4) = 2𝐼$
From Brewster’s law 𝜇 = tan 𝑖- ⇒ / = tan 60° =
12 (c)
√3
𝑐 3 × 10! 13 (a)
⇒𝑣= = = √3 × 10! 𝑚/𝑠
√3 √3 %
𝜙
4 (b) 𝐼 = 4𝐼$ cos
2
At central position 𝐼# = 4𝐼$ …(i)
5 (a) Since the phase difference between two
Wavefront is the locus of all the particles which successive fringes is 2𝜋, the phase difference
vibrates in the same phase between two points separated by a distance equal
6 (c) to one quarter of the distance between the two,
As 𝑥 = 𝑛# 𝛽# = 𝑛% 𝛽% = 𝑛% 𝜆# = 𝑛% 𝜆% successive fringes is equal to
# )
𝑛# 𝜆# 60 × 4000 𝛿 = (2𝜋) }+~ = % radian
∴ 𝑛% = = = 40 !
𝜆% 6000 ⇒ 𝐼% = 4𝐼$ cos % K %" N = 2𝐼$ …(ii)
7 (c) :# +:$
Using (i) and (ii), = =2
:" %:$
According to Malus’ law
14 (a)
%
1 𝐼$
𝐼 = 𝐼$ cos % θ = 𝐼$ (cos % 60°) = 𝐼$ × K N = 15 (c)
2 4
234
Distance of 𝑛'( bright fringe 𝑦2 = 5
, 𝑖. 𝑒. , 𝑦2 ∝ 𝜆
8 (b)
𝑥2 𝜆# 𝑥(Blue) 4360
Position of 𝑛01 maxima from central maxima is ∴ #= ⇒ =
234 𝑥2" 𝜆% 𝑥(Green) 5460
given by 𝑥2 = 5 ∴ 𝑥(Green) > 𝑥(Blue)
𝑑# 𝑛# 𝜆# 8𝜆# 4 𝜆# 16 (a)
⇒ 𝑥2 ∝ 𝑛𝜆 ⇒ = = = K N
𝑑% 𝑛% 𝜆% 6𝜆% 3 𝜆%
9 (d) 17 (c)
As sound waves are longitudinal, therefore, Position of first minima = position of third
polarization of sound waves is not possible. maxima 𝑖. 𝑒.,
 1 × 𝜆# 𝐷 (2 × 3 + 1) 𝜆% 𝐷 Let the initial intensity of light is 𝐼$ . So Intensity of
= ⇒ 𝜆# = 3.5𝜆% :$
𝑑 2 𝑑 light after transmission from first polaroid = %
:$ %
Intensity of light emitted from 𝑃* 𝐼# = %
cos 𝜃
18 (b) Intensity of light transmitted from last polaroid
𝜙 = 𝜋/3, 𝑎# = 4, 𝑎% = 3 𝑖. 𝑒. from
So, 𝐴 = –𝑎#% + 𝑎%% + 2𝑎# . 𝑎% cos 𝜙 ⇒ 𝐴 = 6 𝐼$
𝑃% = 𝐼# cos % (90° − 𝜃) = cos % 𝜃. sin% 𝜃
19 (b) 2
𝐼$ 𝐼$
The optical path between any two points is = (2 sin 𝜃 cos 𝜃)% = sin% 2𝜃
8 8
proportional to the time of travel. 21 (c)
%3 %×<$$$×#$%#$
The distance traversed by light in a medium of Angular width = = #%×#$%& ×#$%" = 1𝑟𝑎𝑑
5
refractive index 𝜇 in time t is given by 22 (c)

𝑑 = 𝑣𝑡 … … … . (𝑖)
23 (c)
Where v is velocity of light in the medium. The 𝑦# = 4 sin 𝜔𝑡
distance traversed by light in a vacuum in this
𝑦% = 3 sin(𝜔𝑡 + 𝜋/3)
time.
Here, 𝑎 = 4, 𝑏 = 3, ϕ = 𝜋/3
Δ = 𝑐𝑡

𝑑 𝑅 = –𝑎% + 𝑏% + 2𝑎𝑏 cos ϕ

=𝑐. [𝐹𝑟𝑜𝑚 𝐸𝑞. (𝑖)]
𝑣
= –4% + 3% + 2 × 4 × 3 cos 𝜋/3
𝑐
= 𝑑 = 𝜇𝑑 (𝑖𝑖)
𝑣 = √37 = 6
.
}Since, 𝜇 = ~ 24 (c)
/
Slit width ratio = 4: 9; hence 𝐼# : 𝐼% = 4: 9
This distance is the equivalent distance in vacuum 𝑎#% 4 𝑎# 2
and is called optical path. ∴ = ⇒ =
𝑎%% 9 𝑎% 3
𝐼678 (𝑎# + 𝑎% )% 25
Here, optical path for first ray = 𝑛# 𝐿# ∴ = =
𝐼6=> (𝑎# − 𝑎% )% 1
Optical path for second ray = 𝑛% 𝐿% 25 (a)
Width of central maximum is given by
Path difference = 𝑛# 𝐿# − 𝑛% 𝐿%
2𝑓𝜆
Now, phase difference 𝑤= … (𝑖)
𝑎
%)
= × path difference Where 𝑓 is focal length of lens, a is width of slit
3
and 𝜆 is wavelength of light used.
2𝜋
= × (𝑛# 𝐿# − 𝑛% 𝐿% ) From Eq. (i), it is clear that fringe width
𝜆

20 (a) 𝑤∝𝜆
No light is emitted from the second polaroid, so 𝑃#
So, when blue light is used in the experiment
and 𝑃% are perpendicular to each other
instead of red light, the fringes will become
narrower.

26 (d)
By using 𝜇 = tan 𝜃- ⇒ 𝜇 = tan 60 = √3
# #
Also 𝐶 = sin"# }?~ ⇒ 𝐶 = sin"# } ~
√*

Page|6
27 (b) 35 (b)
The intensity of plane polarised light is=2𝑎% . Distance =
%3
×𝑑
E

∴ Intensity of polarised light from first nicol prism 2 × 0.5 × 10"+

= × 100 = 0.5 mm
2
𝐼$ 1
= = × 2𝑎% = 𝑎%
2 2 36 (b)
𝑛𝜆F = (𝑛 + 1)𝜆E
28 (b)
𝑛 + 1 𝜆F 600 4
= = =
𝑛 𝜆E 480 5
S
1 4 1
Point Spherical = −1= 𝑛 =4
source 𝑛 5 4
wave front

37 (a)
29 (b) Corpuscular theory explains refraction of light
38 (c)
30 (a) Given, 𝐼# = 𝐼 and 𝐼% = 9𝐼
Amplitude 𝐴# and 𝐴% are added as vector. Angle %
Maximum intensity = k–𝐼# + –𝐼% m
between these vectors is the phase difference %
(𝛽# − 𝛽% ) between them = k√𝐼 + √9𝐼m = 16𝐼
Minimum intensity
% %
∴ 𝑅 = ‡𝐴#% + 𝐴%% + 2𝐴# 𝐴% cos(𝛽# − 𝛽% ) = k–𝐼# − –𝐼% m = k√𝐼 − √9𝐼m = 4𝐼
39 (b)
31 (a) In Young’s double slit experiment if white light is
Photoelectric effect verifies particle nature of used instead of monochromatic light, then we
light. Reflection and refraction verify both particle shall get a white fringe at the centre surrounded
nature and wave nature of light on either side with some coloured fringes, with
32 (b) violet fringe in the beginning and red fringe in the
𝐼ABC = 𝐼 = 𝐼# + 𝐼% + 2–𝐼# 𝐼% last.

When width of each slit is doubled, intensity from 40 (a)

each slit becomes twice ie, The distance between zeroth order maxima and
second order minima is
𝐼#D = 2𝐼# and 𝐼%D = 2𝐼%
𝛽 3
𝑦# = + 𝛽 = 𝛽
D D D D D
∴ 𝐼ABC = 𝐼 = 𝐼# + 𝐼% + 2–𝐼# × 𝐼% D 2 2
3
= 2𝐼# + 2𝐼% + 2–2𝐼# × 2𝐼% = × 0.2 mm = 0.3 mm
2
= 2k𝐼# + 𝐼% + 2–𝐼# × 𝐼% m = 2𝐼 ∴ The distance of second maxima from point P is

33 (a) 𝑦 = (4.8 + 0.3)mm = 5.1 mm

If an unpolarised light is converted into plane
polarized light by passing through a polaroid its 41 (c)
% %
intensity becomes half. 𝐼678 = k–𝐼# + –𝐼% m = k√𝐼 + √4𝐼m = 9𝐼
% %
34 (c) 𝐼6=> = k–𝐼# − –𝐼% m = k√𝐼 − √4𝐼m = 𝐼
3
Path difference = %) × phase difference
𝜆
= × 100𝜋 = 50𝜆
2𝜋

Page|7
42 (a)
𝐵BJF 0.4 43 (d)
𝛽G70HI = = = 0.3𝑚𝑚
𝜇 4/3
44 (d)

45 (c)
For viewing interference in oil films or soap
bubble, thickness of film is of the order of
wavelength of light

Page|8
 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter
RED ZONE

1. A uniform electric field and a uniform magnetic field are acting along the same direction in a certain
region. If an electron is projected along the direction of the fields with a certain velocity, then
a) Its velocity will decrease
b) Its velocity will increase
c) It will turn towards right of direction of motion
d) It will turns towards left of direction of motion
2. The de-Broglie wavelength 𝜆 associated with an electron having kinetic energy 𝐸 is given by the
expression
ℎ 2ℎ 2√2𝑚𝐸
a) b) c) 2𝑚ℎ𝐸 d)
√2𝑚𝐸 𝑚𝐸 ℎ
3. Electric field and magnetic field in Thomson mass spectrograph are applied
a) Simultaneously, perpendicular b) Perpendicular but not simultaneously
c) Parallel but not simultaneously d) Parallel simultaneously
4. The linear momentum of photon is p. The wavelength of photon is 𝜆 , then (h is Planck constant)
ℎ 𝑝 𝑝!
a) 𝜆 = ℎ𝑝 b) 𝜆 = c) 𝜆 = d) 𝜆 =
𝑝 ℎ ℎ
5. A proton, a deuteron and an 𝛼-particle having the same momentum, enters a region of uniform electric
field between the parallel plates of a capacitor. The electric field is perpendicular to the initial path of the
particles. Then the ratio of deflections suffered by them is

a) 1 :2 :8 b) 1 :2 :4 c) 1 :1 :2 d) None of these
6. If the momentum of an electron is changed by ∆𝑝, then the de-Broglie wavelength associated with it
changes by 0.50%. The initial momentum of the electron will be
∆𝑝 ∆𝑝
a) b) c) 199 ∆𝑝 d) 400 ∆𝑝
200 199
7. If the wavelength of incident light changes from 400 nm to 300 nm, the stopping potential for
photoelectrons emitted from a surface becomes approximately
a) 1.0 V greater b) 1.0 V smaller c) 0.5 V greater d) 0.5 V smaller
8. What is de-Broglie wavelength of electron having energy 10 ke V?
a) 0.12Å b) 1.2Å c) 12.2Å d) None of these
9. The de-Broglie wavelength is proportional to
1 1 1
a) 𝜆 ∝ b) 𝜆 ∝ c) 𝜆 ∝ d) 𝜆 ∝ 𝑝
𝑣 𝑚 𝑝
10. The work functions of metals 𝐴 and 𝐵 are in the ratio 1:2. If light of frequencies 𝑓 and 2𝑓 are incident on
the surfaces of 𝐴 and B respectively, the ratio of the maximum kinetic energies of photoelectrons emitted
is (𝑓 is greater than threshold frequency of 𝐴, 2𝑓 is greater than threshold of 𝐵)
a) 1 :1 b) 1 :2 c) 1 :3 d) 1 :4
11. The figure shows variation of photocurrent with anode potential for a photo-sensitive surface for three
different radiations. Let 𝐼" , 𝐼# and 𝐼$ be the intensities and 𝑣" , 𝑣# and 𝑣$ be the frequencies for the curves
𝑎, 𝑏 and 𝑐 respectively. Then

a) 𝑣" = 𝑣# 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝐼" ≠ 𝐼# b) 𝑣" = 𝑣$ and 𝐼" = 𝐼$ c) 𝑣" = 𝑣# and 𝐼" = 𝐼# d) 𝑣# = 𝑣$ and 𝐼# = 𝐼$
12. The frequency of the incident light falling on a photosensitive metal plate is doubled, the kinetic energy of
the emitted photoelectron is
a) Double the earlier value b) Unchanged
c) More than doubled d) Less than doubled
13. For an electron in the second orbit of Bohr’s hydrogen atom, the moment of linear momentum is
ℎ 2ℎ
a) 𝜋ℎ b) 2𝜋ℎ c) d)
𝜋 𝜋
14. Kinetic energy of emitted cathode rays is dependent on
a) Only voltage b) Only work function
c) Both (a) and (b) d) It does not depend upon any physical quantity
15. What is the de-Broglie wavelength of the 𝛼-particle accelerated through a potential difference 𝑉
0.287 12.27 0.101 0.202
a) Å b) Å c) Å d) Å
√𝑉 √𝑉 √𝑉 √𝑉
16. An electron with (rest mass 𝑚% ) moves with a speed of 0.8𝑐. Its mass when it moves with this speed is
a) 𝑚% b) 𝑚% /6 c) 5𝑚% /3 d) 3𝑚% /5
17. The de-Broglie wavelength of a neutron at 927℃ is 𝜆. What will be its wavelength at 27℃ ?
a) 𝜆/2 b) 𝜆/4 c) 4𝜆 d) 2𝜆
18. The curves (a), (b) (c) and (d) show the variation between the applied potential difference (𝑉) and the
photoelectric current (𝑖), at two different intensities of light (𝐼& > 𝐼! ). In which figure is the correct
variation shown
a) i b) i c) i d) i
intensity I1 intensity I1 intensity I1 intensity I1
intensity I2 intensity I2 intensity I2
intensity I2

–V0 V –V0 V –V0 V –V0 V

19. The value of stopping potential in the following diagram
i (photoelec
tric

–4V –3V –2V –1V 0 V

a) −4𝑉 b) −3 𝑉 c) −2𝑉 d) −1 𝑉
20. Work function of a metal is 2.51 𝑒𝑉. Its threshold frequency
a) 5.9 × 10&' 𝑐𝑦𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑠/𝑠 b) 6.5 × 10&' 𝑐𝑦𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑠/𝑠 c) 9.4 × 10&' 𝑐𝑦𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑠/𝑠 d) 6.08 × 10&' 𝑐𝑦𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑠/𝑠
21. 𝜆( , 𝜆) and 𝜆* are the de Broglie wavelengths of electron, proton and 𝛼 particle. If all are accelerated by
same potential, then
a) 𝜆( < 𝜆) < 𝜆* b) 𝜆( < 𝜆) > 𝜆* c) 𝜆( > 𝜆) < 𝜆* d) 𝜆( > 𝜆) > 𝜆*
22. The anode voltage of a photocell is kept fixed. The wavelength 𝜆 of the light falling on the cathode is
gradually changed. The plate current 1 of the photocell varies as follows

a) b) c) d)

23. Which one of the following statements regarding photo-emission of electrons is correct?
a) Kinetic energy of electrons increases with the intensity of incident light.
b) Electrons are emitted when the wavelength of the incident light is above a certain threshold
wavelength.
c) Photoelectric emission is instantaneous with the incidence of light.
d) Photoelectrons are emitted whenever a gas is irradiated with ultraviolet light.
24. The threshold frequency for certain metal is 3.3 × 10&' Hz. If light of frequency 8.2 × 10&' Hz is incident
on the metal, the cut-off voltage of the photoelectric current will be
a) 4.9 V b) 3.0 V c) 2.0 V d) 1 V
25. Light of wavelength 5000Å is falling on a sensitive surface.If the surface has received 10+, J of energy,
then the number of photons falling on the surface will be
a) 5 × 10&& b) 2.5 × 10&& c) 3 × 10&& d) None of these
26. A proton and an 𝛼-particle are accelerated through a potential difference of 100 𝑉. The ratio of the
wavelength associated with the proton to that associated with an 𝛼-particle is
b) 2 :1 1
a) √2 ∶ 1 c) 2√2 ∶ 1 d) :1
2√2
27. The curve between current (𝑖) and potential difference (𝑉) for a photo cell will be
a) i b) i c) i d) i

V V
V V
28. Photons of energy of 6 eV are incident on a metal surface whose work function is 4 eV. The minimum
kinetic energy of the emitted photoelectrons will be
a) Zero b) 1 eV c) 2 eV d) 10 eV
29. The wavelength of a 1 keV photon is 1.24 nm. The frequency of 1 MeV photon is
a) 1.24 × 10&- Hz b) 2.4 × 10!% Hz c) 1.24 × 10&. Hz d) 2.4 × 10!' Hz
30. The minimum wavelength of X-ray emitted from X-ray machine operating at an accelerating potential of V
volts is
ℎ𝑐 𝑉𝑐 𝑒ℎ 𝑒𝑉
a) b) c) d)
𝑒𝑉 𝑒ℎ 𝑉𝑐 ℎ𝑐
31. The kinetic energy of an electron gets tripled, then the de-Broglie wavelength associated with it changes
by a factor
1 1 d) 3
a) b) √3 c)
3 √3
32. An electron of mass 𝑚 and charge 𝑒 initially at rest gets accelerated by a constant electric field 𝐸. The rate
of change of de-Broglie wavelength of this electron at time 𝑡 ignoring relativistic effects is
−ℎ −𝑒 𝐸𝑡 −𝑚ℎ −ℎ
a) !
b) c) !
d)
𝑒𝐸𝑡 𝐸 𝑒 𝐸𝑡 𝑒𝐸
33. One electron and one proton is accelerated by equal potential. Ratio in their de-Broglie wavelength is
a) 1 𝑚( 𝑚) 𝑚(
b) 𝑚 c) Š d) Š
) 𝑚( 𝑚)
34. Dual nature of radiation is shown by
a) Diffraction and reflection b) Refraction and diffraction
c) Photoelectric effect alone d) Photoelectric effect and diffraction
35. Gases begin to conduct electricity at low pressure because
a) At low pressure, gases turn to plasma
b) Colliding electrons can acquire higher kinetic energy due to increased mean free path leading to
ionization of atoms
c) Atoms break up into electrons and protons
d) The electrons in atom can move freely at low pressure
36. The kinetic energy of electron and proton is 10+/! 𝐽. Then the relation between their de-Broglie
wavelength is
a) 𝜆) < 𝜆( b) 𝜆) > 𝜆( c) 𝜆) = 𝜆( d) 𝜆) = 2𝜆(
37. If 𝜆& and 𝜆! are the wavelengths of characteristic X-rays and gamma rays respectively, then the relation
between them is
1
a) 𝜆& = b) 𝜆& = 𝜆! c) 𝜆& > 𝜆! d) 𝜆& < 𝜆!
𝜆!
38. The electrons are emitted in the photoelectric effect from a metal surface
a) Only if the frequency of the incident radiation is above a certain threshold value
b) Only if the temperature of the surface is high
c) At a rate that is independent of the nature of the metal
d) With a maximum velocity proportional to the frequency of the incident radiation
39. In a photoelectric effect measurement, the stopping potential for a given metal is found to be 𝑉% volt when
radiation of wavelength 𝜆% is used. If radiation of wavelength 2𝜆% is used with the same metal then the
stopping potential (in volt ) will be
𝑉 ℎ𝑐 0$
a) % b) 2𝑉% c) 𝑉% + d) 𝑉% − !(1
2 2𝑒𝜆 % !

40. When monochromatic radiation of intensity 𝐼 falls on a metal surface, the number of photoelectron and
their maximum kinetic energy are 𝑁 and 𝑇 respectively. If the intensity of radiation is 2𝐼, the number of
emitted electrons and their maximum kinetic energy are respectively
a) 𝑁 and 2𝑇 b) 2𝑁 and 𝑇 c) 2𝑁 and 2𝑇 d) 𝑁 and 𝑇
41. An 𝛼-particle and a proton are accelerated from rest by a potential difference of 100 V. After this, their de-
1
Broglie wavelengths are 𝜆* and 𝜆) respectively. The ratio 1" , to the nearest integer, is
#
a) 3 b) 4 c) 2 d) 4.5
42. The figure shows the path of a positively charged particle 1 through a rectangular region of uniform
electric field as shown in the figure. What is the direction of electric field and the direction of deflection of
particles 2,3 and 4?

a) Top; down , top, down b) Top; down, down, top

c) Down; top, top, down d) Down; top, down, down
43. The de-Broglie wavelength of a neutron at 27℃ is 𝜆. What will be its wavelength at 927℃ ?
a) 𝜆/4 b) 𝜆/3 c) 𝜆/2 d) 3 𝜆/2
44. If in a photoelectric experiment, the wavelength of incident radiation is reduced from 6000 Å to 4000 Å
then
a) Stopping potential will decrease b) Stopping potential will increase
c) Kinetic energy of emitted electrons will decrease d) The value of work function will decrease
45. The ratio of the de-Broglie wavelength of an 𝛼-particle and a proton of same kinetic energy is
a) 1:2 b) 1:1 c) 1:√2 d) 4:1
46. A photon of energy 𝐸 ejects a photoelectrons from a metal surface whose work function is 𝑊% . If this
electron enters into a uniform magnetic field of induction 𝐵 in a direction perpendicular to the field and
describes a circular path of radius 𝑟, then the radius 𝑟, is given by, (in the usual notation)
2𝑚(𝐸 − 𝑊% ) − 𝑊% ) − 𝑊% )
a) Š b) ”2𝑚(𝐸 − 𝑊% )𝑒𝐵 c) ”2𝑒(𝐸 d) ”2𝑚(𝐸
𝑒𝐵 𝑚𝐵 𝑒𝐵
47. A particle of mass M at rest decays into two masses 𝑚& and 𝑚! with non-zero velocities. The ratio of de-
1
Broglie wavelengths of the particles 1$ is
%
𝑚! 𝑚& √𝑚& d) 1:1
a) b) c)
𝑚& 𝑚! √𝑚!
48. When the speed of electrons increase, then the value of its specific charge
a) Increases
b) Decreases
c) Remains unchanged
d) Increases upto some velocity and then begins to decrease
49. When intensity of incident light increases
a) Photo-current increases
b) Photo-current decreases
c) Kinetic energy of emitted photoelectrons increases
d) Kinetic energy of emitted photoelectrons decreases
50. Velocity ratio of the two cathode rays 1.2. They are applied to the same electric field. What is the deflection
ratio of the two cathode rays
a) 1 :2 b) 1 :4 c) 4 :1 d) 8 :1
51. The frequency and intensity of a light source are doubled. Consider the following statements
I. Saturation photocurrent remains almost the same.
II. Maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons is doubled.
a) Both I and II are true b) I is true but II is false. c) I is false but II is true. d) Both I and II are false.
52. In photoelectric effect if the intensity of light is doubled, then maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons
will become
a) Double b) Half c) Four times d) No change
53. There are 𝑛& photons of frequency 𝑣& in a beam of light. In an equally energetic beam there are 𝑛! photons
of frequency 𝑣! . Then the correct relation
𝑛& 𝑣& 𝑛& 𝑛& 𝑣! 𝑛& 𝑣!!
a) = b) =1 c) = d) =
𝑛! 𝑣! 𝑛! 𝑛! 𝑣& 𝑛! 𝑣&!
54. When the momentum of a proton is changed by an amount 𝑃% , the corresponding change in the de-Broglie
wavelength is found to be 0.25%. Then, the original momentum of the proton was
a) 𝑝% b) 100 𝑝% c) 400 𝑝% d) 4 𝑝%
55. The maximum kinetic energy of emitted electrons in a photoelectric effect does not depend upon
a) Wavelength b) Frequency c) Intensity d) Work function
56. A particle A has a charge q and particle B has charge+4q with each of them having the mass m. When
they are allowed to fall from rest through same potential difference, the ratio of their speeds 𝑣2 : 𝑣3 will be
a) 4:1 b) 1:4 c) 1:2 d) 2:1
57. A photo-sensitive material would emit electrons, if excited by photons beyond a threshold. To overcome
the threshold, one would increase the
a) Voltage applied to the light source b) Intensity of light
c) Wavelength of light d) Frequency of light
58. Light of wavelength 𝜆 strikes a photo-sensitive surface and electrons are ejected with kinetic energy 𝐸. If
the kinetic energy is to be increased to 2𝐸, the wavelength must be changed to 𝜆′ where
𝜆 𝜆
a) 𝜆4 = b) 𝜆4 = 2𝜆 c) < 𝜆4 < 𝜆 d) 𝜆4 > 𝜆
2 2
59. A 5 W source emits monochromatic light of wavelength 5000Å. When placed 0.5 m away, it liberates
photoelectrons from a photosensitive metallic surface. When the source is moved to a distance of 1.0m,
the number of photoelectrons liberated will be reduced by a factor of
a) 4 b) 8 c) 16 d) 2
60. Light of energy 2.0 eV falls on a metal of work function 1.4 eV. The stopping potential is
a) 0.6 V b) 2.0 V c) 3.4 V d) 1.4 V
61. When radiation of the wavelength 𝜆 is incident on a metallic surface, the stopping potential is 4.8 V. If the
same surface is illuminated with radiation of double the wavelength, then the stopping potential becomes
1.6 V. Then the threshold wavelength for the surface is
a) 2𝜆 b) 4𝜆 c) 6𝜆 d) 8𝜆
62. If an electron and proton are propagating in the form of waves having the same wavelength, it implies that
they have the same
a) Energy b) Momentum c) Velocity d) Angular momentum
63. The stopping potential 𝑉 for photoelectric emission for a metal surface is plotted along 𝑌-axis and
frequency 𝑣 of incident light along 𝑋-axis. A straight line is obtained as shown. Planck’s constant is given
by
a) Slope of the line
b) Product of slope of the line and charge on the electron
c) Intercept along 𝑌-axis divided by charge on the electron
d) Product of intercept along 𝑋-axis and mass of the electron
64. An electron of mass 𝑚 when accelerated through a potential difference 𝑉 has de-Broglie wavelength 𝜆. The
de-Broglie wavelength associated with a proton of mass 𝑀 accelerated through the same potential
difference will be
𝑚 𝑚 𝑀 𝑀
a) 𝜆 b) 𝜆š c) 𝜆 d) 𝜆Š
𝑀 𝑀 𝑚 𝑚
65. The figure shows a plot of photo current versus anode potential for a photo sensitive for three different
radiations. Which one of the following is a correct statement

a) Curves (𝑎) and (𝑏) represent incident radiations of different frequencies and different intensities
b) Curves (𝑎) and (𝑏) represents incident radiations of same frequency but of different intensities
c) Curves (𝑏) and (𝑐) represent incident radiations of different frequencies and different intensities
d) Curves (𝑏) and (𝑐) represent incident radiations of same frequency having same intensity
66. Which of the following event, support the quantum nature of light?
a) Diffraction b) Polarization c) Interference d) Photoelectric effect
67. Two identical, photocathodes receive light of frequencies 𝑓& and 𝑓! . If the velocities of the photoelectrons
(of mass m) coming out are respectively 𝑣& and 𝑣! , then
2ℎ &/!
2ℎ
a) 𝑣&! − 𝑣!! = (𝑓& − 𝑓! ) b) 𝑣& + 𝑣! = › (𝑓& + 𝑓! )œ
𝑚 𝑚
&/!
!0 2ℎ
c) 𝑣&! + 𝑣!! = 6 (𝑓& + 𝑓! ) d) 𝑣& − 𝑣! = › (𝑓& − 𝑓! )œ
𝑚
68. The potential difference applied to an 𝑋-ray tube is increased. As a result, in the emitted radiation
a) The intensity increases b) The minimum wavelength increases
c) The intensity decreases d) The minimum wavelength decreases
69. Ultraviolet radiation of 6.2 eV falls on an aluminium surface (work function 4.2 eV). The kinetic energy of
the faster electron emitted is approximately
a) 3.2 × 10+&- J b) 3.2 × 10+&, J c) 3.2 × 10+&7 J d) 3.2 × 10+!& J
70. The de-Broglie wavelength of a particle moving with a velocity 2.25 × 10. 𝑚/𝑠 is equal to the wavelength
of photon. The ratio of kinetic energy of the particle to the energy of the photon is (velocity of light is
3 × 10. 𝑚/𝑠)
a) 1/8 b) 3/8 c) 5/8 d) 7/8
71. A photon and an electron have equal energy E. 𝜆89:;:< /𝜆=>=?;@:< is proportional to
a) √𝐸 b) 1/√𝐸
c) 1/𝐸 d) Does not depend upon 𝐸
72. In photoelectric effect, the KE of electrons emitted from the metal surface depends upon
a) Intensity of light b) Frequency of incident light
c) Velocity of incident light d) Both intensity and velocity of light
73. The correct curve between the stopping potential (𝑉) and intensity of incident light (𝐼) is
a) Vo b) Vo c) Vo d) Vo

I I I I
74. The velocity of photon is proportional to (where 𝑣 is frequency)
𝑣! 1
a) b) c) √𝑣 d) 𝑣
2 √𝑣
75. When the photons of energy ℎ𝑣 fall on a photosensitive metallic surface (work function ℎ𝑣% ) electrons are
emitted from the metallic surface. The electrons coming out of the surface have some kinetic energy. The
most energetic ones have the kinetic energy equal to

a) Less b) More c) Equal d) Nothing can be said

76. A particle with rest mass 𝑚% is moving with speed of light 𝑐. The de-Broglie wavelength associated with it
will be
a) Infinite b) Zero c) 𝑚% 𝑐/ℎ d) ℎ𝑣/𝑚% 𝑐
77. A photon and an electron have an equal energy𝐸.
a) √𝐸 b) 1/√𝐸
c) 1/𝐸 d) Does not depend upon 𝐸
78. Which of the following is not the property of the photons?
a) Momentum b) Energy c) Charge d) Velocity
79. The photoelectric threshold frequency of a metal is v. When light of frequency 4v is incident on the metal.
The maximum kinetic energy of the emitted photoelectrons is
a) 4 hv b) 3 hv c) 5 hv 5
d) ℎ𝑣
2
80. In a photoemissive cell with exciting wavelength 𝜆, the fastest electron has speed 𝑣. If the exciting
wavelength is changed to 3𝜆/4, the speed of the fastest emitted electron will be
a) 𝑣(3/4)&/! b) 𝑣(4/3)&/!
c) Less than 𝑣(4/3)&/! d) Greater than 𝑣(4/3)&/!
81. The de-Broglie wavelength of an electron in the ground state of the hydrogen atom is
a) 𝜋𝑟 ! b) 2𝜋𝑟 c) 𝜋𝑟 d) √2𝜋𝑟
82. Photoelectric effect experiments are performed using three different metal plates p,q and r having work
functions ϕ8 = 2.0 eV, ϕA = 2.5 eV and ϕB 3.0 eV, respectively
A light beam containing wavelengths of 550 nm, 450 nm and 350 nm with equal intensities illuminates
each of the plates. The correct I-V graph for the experiment is

a) b) c) d)

83. Photoelectric effect supports quantum nature of light because

III. There is minimum frequency of light below which no photoelectrons are emitted.
IV. Electric charge of photoelectrons is quantized.
V. Maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons depends only on the frequency of light and not on its
intensity.
VI. Even when metal surface is faintly illuminated the photoelectrons leave the surface immediately.
a) 1,2,3 b) 1,2,4 c) 2,3,4 d) 1,3,4
84. Among the following four spectral regions, the photons has the highest energy in
a) Infrared b) Violet c) Red d) Blue
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS:
1 (a) !/
⇒ 𝑣 = t , …(ii)
When E, v and B are all along same direction, then
magnetic force experienced by electron is zero Combining Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
" "
while electric force is acting opposite to velocity 𝜆= = …(iii)
"# √!,/
of electron, so velocity of electron will decrease. ,0
$

2 (a) Given 𝑚 = 9.1 × 102*. kg

1 ℎ ℎ 𝐾 = 10keV = 10 × 10* ×
𝑚𝑣 ! = 𝐸 ⇒ 𝑚𝑣 = √2𝑚𝐸 ∴ 𝜆 = =
2 𝑚𝑣 √2𝑚𝐸 1.6 × 102.3 J
3 (d) ℎ = 6.6 × 102*( J-s
In Thomson’s mass spectrograph 𝐸K⃗ ||𝐵 K⃗ Substituting the above values in Eq. (iii), we get
4 (b) 𝜆=
" 4.4×.)%&'
Momentum of photon, 𝑝 =
# √!×3..×.)%&( ×.)×.)& ×..4×.)%()
"
Therefore, wavelength of photon, 𝜆 = $ = 1.22 × 102.. ≈
5 (a) 0.12Å
The deflection suffered by charged particle in an 9 (c)
electric field is ℎ 1
𝜆= ⇒𝜆∝
𝑞𝐸𝐿𝐷 𝑞𝐸𝐿𝐷 𝑝 𝑝
𝑦= = ! [𝑝 = 𝑚𝑢] 10 (b)
𝑚𝑢! 𝑝 /𝑚
𝑞𝑚 𝑞$ 𝑚$ 𝑞% 𝑚% 𝑞& 𝑚& 𝐸 = 𝑊) + 𝐾789
⇒ 𝑦 ∝ ! ⇒ 𝑦$ : 𝑦% : 𝑦& = : ! : !
𝑝 𝑝$! 𝑝% 𝑝& ⇒ ℎ𝑓 = 𝑊: + 𝐾: …(i)
<
Since 𝑝& = 𝑝% = 𝑝$ [Given] and 2ℎ𝑓 = 𝑊; + 𝐾; = 2𝑊: + 𝐾; ~∵ <* =
+
𝑚$ : 𝑚% : 𝑚& = 1 ∶ 2 ∶ 4 and 𝑞$ : 𝑞% : 𝑞& = 1 ∶ 1 ∶ 2 .
!
€ …(ii)
⇒ 𝑦$ : 𝑦% : 𝑦& = 1 × 1: 1 × 2 ∶ 2 × 4 = 1 ∶ 2 ∶ 8
Dividing equation (i) by (ii)
6 (c)
1 𝑊: + 𝐾: 𝐾: 1
ℎ 0.5 ℎ 199𝜆 ℎ = ⇒ =
𝜆= ⇒𝜆− 𝜆= ⇒ = 2 2𝑊: + 𝐾; 𝐾; 2
𝑝 100 𝑝 + Δ𝑝 200 𝑝 + Δ𝑝
11 (a)
199 ℎ
= Saturation current is proportional to intensity
200 𝑝
200 while stopping potential increases with increase
⇒ 𝑝 + Δ𝑝 = 𝑝 ⇒ 𝑝 = 199 Δ𝑝 in frequency. Hence,
199
7 (a) 𝑣= = 𝑣> while 𝐼= < 𝐼>
ℎ𝑐 1 12 (c)
𝐸= ⇒𝐸∝ Let 𝐸. and 𝐸! be the KE of photoelectrons for
𝜆 𝜆
'! ()) incident light of frequency 𝑣 and 2𝑣 respectively.
⇒ '
= *)) = 1.33
Then ℎ𝑣 = 𝐸. + ϕ and ℎ2𝑣 = 𝐸! + ϕ)
But 𝐸 = 𝑒𝑉+ , 𝑉+ being stopping potential. Thus,
So, 2(𝐸. + ϕ) ) = 𝐸! + ϕ) or 𝐸! = 2𝐸. + ϕ)
stopping potential for photoelectrons from a
It means the KE of photoelectron becomes more
surface becomes approximately 1.0 V greater.
than double
8 (a)
13 (c)
De-Broglie wavelength of a particle is given by
"
Linear momntum of an electron in 𝑛 th orbit 𝐿 =
𝜆 = ,- ...(i) ?"
!@!
Where h is Planck’s constant. "
for 𝑛 = 2 then 𝐿=@
If kinetic energy of particle of mass m is 𝑣, then
𝐾 = ! 𝑚𝑣 !
. 14 (c)
Higher the voltage, higher is the 𝐾𝐸. Higher the
work function, smaller is the 𝐾𝐸
15 (c) Photoelectrons are emitted if the wavelength of
ℎ ℎ the incident light is less than threshold
𝜆= = "E
√2𝑚𝐸 ˆ2𝑚& 𝑄& 𝑉 wavelength, as ϕ) = #
,
On putting 𝑄& = 2 × 1.6 × 102.3 𝐶 Photoelectric emission is an instantaneous
0.101
𝑚& = 4𝑚$ = 4 × 1.67 × 10 2!A
𝑘𝑔 ⇒ 𝜆 = Å process photoelectrons may not be emitted from
√𝑉 a gas with ultraviolet light if the work function of
16 (c) that gas is large than the energy UV light
𝑚) 𝑚) 5𝑚)
𝑚= = = 24 (c)
ˆ1 − 𝑣 ! /𝑐 ! ˆ1 − (0.8𝑐)! /𝑐 ! 3 From relation
17 (d) 𝑒𝑉+ = ℎ(𝑣 − 𝑣) )
"
We know that, 𝜆 = ; or 𝑉+ = threshold or cut off voltage
√!,BC
"
So, 𝜆 ∝
. = D (𝑣 − 𝑣) )
√C
4.4×.)%&'
= (8.2 − 3.3) × 10.(
𝜆!A 927 + 273 ..4×.)%()
∴ =• =2 4.4×(.3×.)%(
𝜆3!A 27 + 273 = ..4
= 2𝑉
or 𝜆!A = 2𝜆3!A = 2𝜆 25 (b)
18 (b) From Einstein’s photoelectric effect concept the
𝐼. > 𝐼! (given) ⇒ 𝑖. > 𝑖! [∵ 𝑖 ∝ 𝐼] energy of these photons, for light of frequency v is
and stopping potential does not depend upon 𝐸 = ℎ𝑣
intensity. So its value will be same (𝑉) ) where ℎ is Planck’s constant.
FGHIJKLM
19 (a) Also, frequency = N8FGHGOPLQ =
Stopping potential is that negative potential for J
which photo electric current is zero S
"E
20 (d) ∴ = #
𝑊) 2.51 × 1.6 × 102.3 ?"E
𝑊) = ℎ𝑣) ⇒ 𝑣) = = Energy of n photons is 𝐸 = #
ℎ 6.6 × 102*( 2A
.(
= 6.08 × 10 𝐶𝑦𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑠/𝑠 Given, 𝐸 = 10 𝐽, 𝜆 = 5000 Å
21 (d) = 5000 × 102.) 𝑚
'#
de Broglie wavelength ⇒ 𝑛= "E
ℎ ℎ 1 .)%- ×T)))×.)%(,
𝜆= = ⇒𝜆∝ =
𝑝 √2𝑚𝐸 √𝐸𝑚 4.4×.)%&' ×*×.).
..
Now kinetic energy 𝐸 gained by a charged particle = 2.5 × 10
under potential 𝑉 is 𝐸 = 𝑞𝑉 given 𝑉 is same for 26 (c)
the given three paticles ℎ 1 𝜆$ 𝑚& 𝑄&
∴ 𝐸D = 𝑒𝑉; 𝐸$ = 𝑒𝑉 𝜆= ⇒𝜆∝ ⇒ =•
ˆ2𝑚𝑄𝑉 ˆ𝑚𝑄 𝜆& 𝑚$ 𝑄$
𝐸& = 2𝑒𝑉 ⇒ 𝐸D = 𝐸$ < 𝐸& and 𝑚D < 𝑚$ < 𝑚&
ℎ ℎ ℎ 4𝑚$ × 2𝑄$
⇒𝜆= > > =• = 2√2
𝑚$ × 𝑄$
ˆ2𝑚D 𝐸D ˆ2𝑚$ 𝐸$ ˆ2𝑚& 𝐸&
𝜆D > 𝜆$ > 𝜆& 27 (d)
22 (a) In photocell, at a particular negative potential
On increasing wavelength of light of the (stopping potential 𝑉) ) of anode, photoelectric
photoelectric current decreases and at a certain current is zero, as the potential difference
wavelength (cut off) above which photoelectric between cathode and anode increases current
current stops through the circuit increases but after some time
23 (c) constant current (saturation current) flows
KE of photoelectrons increases with increase in through the circuit even if potential difference
frequency of the incident light and is independent still increases
of the intensity of incident light. 28 (a)
 1 If v is velocity of particle, then
𝑚𝑣 ! = ℎ𝑣 − ϕ) = ℎ𝑣 − ℎ𝑣) .
2 𝐸 = ! 𝑚𝑣 !
For minimum kinetic energy of emitted
!'
photoelectron, Or 𝑣 = t¢ £
,
𝑣 = 𝑣)
1 Now, de-Broglie wavelength of particle is
∴ 𝑚𝑣 ! = 0 𝜆 = ,- =
" "
2 ,W(!' /,)
29 (b) Substituting the value of 𝐸, we get
E E '
𝑓 = # = "E/' =" 𝜆=
"
W!,Z[
.×..4×.)%(&
∴ 𝑓= = 2.4 × 10!) Hz For electron, 𝜆D =
"
4.4×.)%&'
W!,2 D[
30 (a) "
If all of the kinetic energy carried by an electron is For proton, 𝜆$ = !, D[
W 3
converted into radiation, the energy of the X-rays #2 ,
∴ = t( ,3 )
photon would be given by #3 2

𝐸 789 = ℎ𝑣 789 = 𝑒𝑉 34 (d)

Where ℎ is Planck’s constant, 𝑣 789 the largest Photoelectric effect → Particle nature
¤ ¦ Dual
frequency, 𝑒 charge of an electron and 𝑉 the Diffraction → Wave nature
applied voltage. nature
This maximum energy or minimum wavelength is 35 (b)
called the Duane-Hunt limit. For ionisation, high energy electrons are required
"E 36 (a)
∴ ℎ𝑣 789 = = 𝑒𝑉 "
# /01
By using 𝜆 = 𝐸 = 102*! 𝐽 = Constant for
ℎ𝑐 √!,'
⇒ 𝜆 7KO = .
𝑒𝑉 both particles. Hence 𝜆 ∝ Since 𝑚$ > 𝑚D so
√,
𝜆$ < 𝜆D
31 (c) 37 (c)
de-Broglie wavelength of an electron is given by
In general 𝑋-rays have larger wavelength than
" "
𝜆 = ,- = that of gamma rays
√!,/
Or 𝜆∝
. 38 (a)
√/
Refer to threshold frequency
#! . √/ .
∴ #
= = 39 (d)
√*/ . √*

Or 𝜆 =V # From Einstein’s photoelectric equation

√* ℎ𝑐
Hence, de-Broglie wavelength will change by 𝑒𝑉) = − 𝑊)
.
𝜆)
factor . "E
√* 𝑒𝑉 V = !# − 𝑊)
,
32 (a) "E . "E
V)
D' Subtracting 𝑒(𝑉) − 𝑉 = # ~1 − !€ = !#
Here, 𝑢 = 0; 𝑎 = ,
; 𝑣 =? ; 𝑡 = 𝑡 , ,
V "E
𝑒𝐸 or 𝑉 = 𝑉) − !D#
∴ 𝑣 = 𝑢 + 𝑎𝑡 = 0 + 𝑡 ,
𝑚 40 (b)
de-Broglie wavelength, Number of photoelectrons ∝ Intensity
ℎ ℎ ℎ
𝜆= = = Maximum kinetic energy is independent of
𝑚𝑣 𝑚(𝑒𝐸𝑡/𝑚) 𝑒𝐸𝑡 intensity
Rate of change of de-Broglie wavelength 41 (a)
𝑑𝜆 ℎ 1 −ℎ " " .
= − !¡ = ! 𝜆=$= 𝑜𝑟 𝜆 ∝ Z,
𝑑𝑡 𝑒𝐸 𝑡 𝑒𝐸𝑡 W!Z[, √
33 (c) #3 Z5 ,5 (!)(()
= tZ . , = t(.)(.) =2.828
If a charge particle of mass m and charge q is #∝ 3 3

accelerated through a potential difference V and E The nearest integer is 3.

is the energy acquired by the particle , then 42 (a)
𝐸 = 𝑞𝑉
 The figure shows the path of a +ve charged ˆ2𝑚(𝐸 − 𝑊) )
particle (1) through a rectangular region of ⇒𝑟=
𝑒𝐵
uniform electric field. 47 (d)
By law of conservation of linear momentum
𝑚. 𝑣. = 𝑚! 𝑣!
So, 𝑚. 𝑣. = 𝑚! 𝑣!
"
Now, de-Broglie wavelength 𝜆 = ,-
Since, +ve charged particle moves as a parabolic 𝜆. 𝑚! 𝑣!
∴ =
path in electric field. It means the direction of 𝜆! 𝑚. 𝑣.
electric field is upward. The direction of deflection 𝜆. : 𝜆! = 1: 1
of particle (2) which is –ve is downward. The 48 (b)
direction of deflection of particle (3) which is +ve Here the velocity of electron increases, so as per
is upward and direction of deflection of particle Einstein’s equation mass of the electron increases,
D
(4) is downward. hence the specific charge , decreases
43 (c) 49 (a)
Kinetic energy of a particle at temperature 𝑇𝐾 is According to Einstein’s theory of photoelectric
*
𝐸 = ! 𝑘𝑇. The de-Broglie wavelength associated effect a single incident photon ejects a single
with it is electrons. Therefore, when intensity increases,
ℎ ℎ the number of incident photons increases, so
𝜆= =
√2𝑚𝐸 * number of ejected electrons increases, hence,
t2𝑚 × 𝑘𝑇
! photocurrent increases.
1 50 (a)
𝑖𝑒, 𝜆 ∝
√𝑇 𝑢. 1
=
𝑢! 2
𝜆3!A 27 + 373
∴ =• Accelerations of cathode rays in electric field, 𝑎⃗ =
𝜆!A 927 + 273 D'
,
300 1 It is same for both the cathode rays
=• =
1200 2 .
As displacement, 𝑠 = 𝑢𝑡 + ! 𝑎𝑡 !
#"- #
or 𝜆3!A = = So for a given value of 𝑎 and 𝑡, 𝑠 × 𝑢
! !
44 (b) 𝑠. 𝑢. 1
So, = =
"E . . 𝑠! 𝑢! 2
Stopping potential 𝑉) = D ~# − # €. As 𝜆 decreases
, 51 (c)
so 𝑉) increases The saturation photocurrent (i) depends on
45 (a) intensity (𝐼) of light ie,
"
de-Broglie wavelength, 𝜆 = 𝑖 ∝ 𝐼.
W!,'6
#5 ,3
So, when intensity changes, the saturation current
#3
= t ,5 also changes. Hence the statement I false.
. .
The maximum kinetic energy depends upon the
=t( =! frequency of light. So, the kinetic energy is
46 (d) doubled when frequency is doubled.
. So, statement II is true.
From Einstein equation 𝐸 = 𝑊) + ! 𝑚𝑣 !
52 (d)
2(𝐸 − 𝑊) ) 𝐾max of photoelectrons doesnot depend upon
• =𝑣
𝑚 intensity of incident light.
53 (c)
and a charged particle placed in uniform magnetic
Here, 𝐸. = 𝐸!
field experience a force
𝑚𝑣 ! 𝑚𝑣 ! 𝑚𝑣 𝑛. ℎ𝑣. = 𝑛! ℎ𝑣!
?( -
𝐹= ⇒ 𝑒𝑣𝐵 = ⇒𝑟= So, = -"
𝑟 𝑟 𝑒𝐵 ? " (
54 (c)
 1 ∆𝑝 ∆𝜆 Δ𝑝 Δ𝜆 ℎ𝑐 ℎ𝑐
𝜆∝ ⇒ =− ⇒¯ ¯=¯ ¯ 𝐸= − 𝑊) and 2𝐸 = V − 𝑊)
𝑝 𝑝 𝜆 𝑝 𝜆 𝜆 𝜆
𝜆V 𝐸 + 𝑊 1 + 𝑊) /𝐸
𝑝) 0.25 1 )
⇒ = = ⇒ 𝑝 = 400 𝑝) ⇒ = ⇒ 𝜆V = 𝜆 ¡
𝑝 100 400 𝜆 2𝐸 + 𝑊) 2 + 𝑊) /𝐸
(.\< /') . #
55 (c) Since (!\<, /') > ! so 𝜆V > !
,
If the intensity of light incident on photosensitive
59 (a)
metal surface is changed it does not affect the
Intensity of light is inversely proportional to
maximum kinetic energy of the emitted electrons.
square of distance,
56 (c) 1
Speed obtained by the particle after falling 𝑖𝑒, 𝐼∝ !
𝑟
through a potential difference of 𝑉 volt is ]" (^( )"
or ](
= (^" )"
![Z
𝑣: = t , … (𝑖) Given, 𝑟 = 0.5 m, 𝑟 = 1.0 m
% &
]( ().T)" .
![×(Z Therefore, = =(
And 𝑣; = t ,
…(ii) ]" (.)"
Now, since number of photoelectrons emitted per
Now dividing Eq. (i) by Eq. (ii), we get
second is directly proportional to intensity, so
-* . .
=t = number of electrons emitted would decrease by
-+ ( !
factor of 4.
So, 𝑣: : 𝑣; = 1: 2
60 (a)
57 (d)
From Planck’s quantum theory, the maximum
The emission of photoelectron takes place only,
kinetic energy (Ek) of photoelectron emitted from
when the frequency of the incident light is above a
the metal is
certain critical value, characteristic of that metal.
𝐸B = ℎ𝑣 − 𝑊
The critical value of frequency is known as the
Where W is work function of metal and hv is the
threshold frequency for the metal of the emitting
energy of the photon absorbed by the metal.
electrode.
Given, ℎ𝑣 = 2 𝑒𝑉, 𝑊 = 1.4 𝑒𝑉
∴ 𝐸B = 2 − 1.4 = 0.6eV
' ).4 G_
Hence, stopping potential is , 𝑉+ = D
= D
=
0.6 V.
61 (b)
Stopping potential
ℎ𝑐 1 1
𝑣) =
− ¡
𝑒 𝜆 λ)
Where 𝜆) = stopping potential
"E .
Ist case, 4.8 = D
¢# −
Suppose that when light of certain frequency is .
£ … (i)
#,
incident over a metal surface, the photo-electrons
"E .
are emitted. To take photoelectric current zero, a IInd case, 1.6 = D
(!# −
particular value of stopping potential will be .
) … (𝑖𝑖)
#,
needed. If we go on reducing the frequency of
Dividing Eq. (i) by Eq. (ii)
incident light, the value of stopping potential will ( (
` 2 a
also go on decreasing. At certain value of 3=
7 7,
( (
` 2 a
frequency 𝑣) , the photoelectric current will "7 7,
* * . .
become zero, even when no retarding potential is −# =#−#
!# , ,
applied. This frequency 𝑣) corresponds to the . * . *
− # = # − !#
threshold for the metal surface. The emission of #, ,
2! !2*
photo-electrons does not take place, till frequency =
#, !#
of incident light is below this value. ! .
= !#
58 (c) #,
𝜆) = 4𝜆
62 (a) ℎ𝑐
𝐾gQILIO = … (ii)
If an electron and a proton propagating in the 𝜆
form of waves and their wavelength are same, 𝐾g8bLKJHG 𝑣 2.25 × 10h 3
∴ = = h
=
then according to the relation 𝐾gQILIO 2𝑐 2 × 3 × 10 8
"E 71 (b)
𝐸= #
ℎ𝑐 ℎ
Also, 𝜆GHGJLbIO = 𝜆$^cdc? 𝜆gQILIO = and 𝜆GHGJLbIO =
𝐸 √2𝑚𝐸
∴ 𝐸D = 𝐸$
Hence, their energies are same. 𝜆gQILIO 2𝑚 𝜆gQILIO 1
⇒ = 𝑐• ⇒ ∝
63 (b) 𝜆GHGJLbIO 𝐸 𝜆GHGJLbIO √𝐸
𝐸B = 𝑒𝑉 = ℎ𝑣 − ϕ) 72 (b)
" e,
or 𝑉 = 𝑣− From Einstein’s photoelectric equation the
D G
" maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons
Slope of straight line between 𝑉 and 𝑣 is ℎ=
D emitted from metal surface is 𝐸/ and 𝑊 is work
𝑒 × slope of straight line. function, then
64 (b) 𝐸/ = ℎ𝑣 − 𝑊
ℎ 1
𝜆= ⇒𝜆∝ [𝐸 = same] If 𝑣) is threshold frequency, then
√2𝑚𝐸 √𝑚 𝑊 = ℎ𝑣)
65 (b) ∴ 𝐸/ = ℎ𝑣 −
Stopping potential is same for 𝑎 & 𝑏, hence their ℎ𝑣) = ℎ(𝑣 − 𝑣) )
frequencies are same. Also maximum current From the above equation, it is clear that maximum
values are different for 𝑎 & 𝑏 so they will have kinetic energy of electron will increases almost
different intensities linearly with increase in the frequency of the
66 (d) incident light.
According to Planck, energy emitted or absorbed 73 (b)
from the objects is not continous while it is in Stopping potential does not depend upon
small packets of energy which are called photons intensity of incident light (𝐼)
or quanta. Einstein explained photoelectric effect 74 (d)
on the basic of Planck’s hypothesis. Velocity of photon 𝑐 = 𝑣𝜆
67 (a) 75 (a)
1
ℎ𝑓 = ℎ𝑓) + 𝑚𝑣 ! The value of threshold frequency 𝑣) for 𝐴 is less
2
! !"f( !"f than that for 𝐵, hence ϕ: < ϕ;
Hence, 𝑣. = , − , , 76 (b)
!"f" !"f,
𝑣!! = − ℎ ℎˆ1 − 𝑣 ! /𝑐 !
, , 𝜆= = =0 (∵ 𝑣 = 𝑐)
2ℎ 𝑚𝑣 𝑚) 𝑣
∴ 𝑣.! − 𝑣!! = (𝑓 − 𝑓! )
𝑚 . 77 (b)
68 (d) 𝜆gQILIO =
"E
"E . '
𝜆7KO = D[ or 𝜆7KO ∝ [ On increasing potential, Q
and 𝜆GHGJLbIO =
√!7i
𝜆7KO decreases
69 (c) λgQILIO 2𝑚
⇒ = 𝑐•
KE of emitted electron is 𝜆GHGJLbIO 𝐸
𝐸/ = ℎ𝑣 − 𝑊 𝜆gQILIO 1
= 6.2 𝑒𝑉 − 4.2 𝑒𝑉 = 2.0 𝑒𝑉 ⇒ ∝
𝜆GHGJLbIO √𝐸
= 2 × 1.6 × 102.3 𝐽 78 (c)
= 3.2 × 102.3 𝐽 A photon is a particle which has zero charge and
70 (b) zero mass and is denoted by γ. The energy of
1 ℎ
𝐾g8bLKJHG = 𝑚𝑣 ! also 𝜆 = photon is
2 𝑚𝑣 𝐸 = ℎ𝑣
1 ℎ 𝑣ℎ
⇒ 𝐾g8bLKJHG = ¡ . 𝑣! = … (i) Here, 𝑣 = frequency and ℎ = Planck’s constant.
2 𝜆𝑣 2𝜆
 The momentum of photon is ℎ/𝑣 and its velocity 1240
𝐾Z = 𝐸Z − ϕZ = − 2.5 = 0.255 eV
is the velocity of light (𝑐). 450
.!()
So, the charge is not the property of photons. 𝐾^ = 𝐸^ − ϕ^ = *T) − 3.0 = 0.543eV
79 (b) In the above equation 𝐾 represents maximum
From Einstein’s photoelectric equation the kinetic energy of photoelectrons and 𝐸, the
maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons energy of incident right.
emitted from metal surface is given by From the above values we can see that stopping
𝐸B = ℎ𝑣. − 𝑊 potential,
Where W is work function of metal. |𝑉^ | > ¹𝑉Z ¹ > ¹𝑉$ ¹
Given, 𝑊 = ℎ𝑣 and 𝑣. = 4𝑣 Further, their intensities are equal, but energy of
∴ 𝐸B = 4ℎ𝑣 − ℎ𝑣 = 3ℎ𝑣 individual photon 𝑟 is maximum. Hence, number
80 (d) of photons incident (per unit area per unit time)
1 ℎ𝑐 ℎ𝑐 1
ℎ𝑣 − 𝑊) = 𝑚𝑣789 !
⇒ − = 𝑚𝑣 ! of r can be assumed to be least. Hence, saturation
2 𝜆 𝜆) 2 789
current of r should be minimum.
𝜆) − 𝜆 1
⇒ ℎ𝑐 ¡ = 𝑚𝑣789 !
⇒ 𝑣789 Keeping these points in mind no option seems to
𝜆𝜆) 2
be correct. The correct graph is shown below
2ℎ𝑐 𝜆) − 𝜆
=• ¡
𝑚 𝜆𝜆)
When wavelength is 𝜆 and velocity is 𝑣, then
2ℎ𝑐 𝜆) − 𝜆
𝑣=• ¡ … (i)
𝑚 𝜆𝜆)
*#
When wavelength is and velocity is 𝑣′ then
(

2ℎ𝑐 𝜆) − (3𝜆/4) ∴ No choice is correct.

𝑣V = • ¶ · … (ii)
𝑚 (3𝜆/4) × 𝜆) 83 (d)
Divide equation (ii) by (i), we get Photoelectric effect supports quantum nature of
light because
𝑣V [𝜆) − (3𝜆/4)] 𝜆𝜆)
=• * × 1. There is minimum frequency of light
𝑣 𝜆𝜆) 𝜆) − 𝜆
( below which no photoelectrons are
./! emitted.
4 [𝜆) − (3𝜆/4)]
𝑣V = 𝑣 ¡ •
3 𝜆) − 𝜆 2. Maximum kinetic energy of
4 ./! photoelectrons depends only on the
𝑖. 𝑒. 𝑣 V > 𝑣 ¡ frequency of light and not on its intensity.
3
81 (b)
3. Even when metal surface is fainthy
According to Bohr’s theroy
?"
illuminated the photoelectrons leave the
𝑚𝑣𝑟 = surface immediately.
!@
?"
2𝜋𝑟 = ,-
84 (b)
2𝜋𝑟 − 𝑛𝜆 "E
Energy of a photon, 𝐸 =
For n=1,𝜆 = 2𝜋𝑟 #

82 (a) 𝜆KOjb8bGk > 𝜆bGk > 𝜆lHmG > 𝜆_KIHGL

1240 Therefore, violet has the highest energy
𝐾$ = 𝐸$ − ϕ$ = − 2.0 = 0.2545 eV
550
 Atoms

1. First Bohr radius of an atom with 𝑍 = 82 is 𝑅. Radius of its third orbit is

a) 9 𝑅 b) 6 𝑅 c) 3 𝑅 d) 𝑅
2. In Bohr’s model of hydrogen atom, which of the following pairs of quantities are quantized?
a) Energy and linear momentum b) Linear and angular momentum
c) Energy and angular momentum d) None of the above
3. A charged particle q is shot towards another charged particle Q which is fixed, with a speed v. It
approaches Q upto a closest distance 𝑟 and then returns. If 𝑞 was given a speed 2𝑣, the closest distance of
approach would be

a) 𝑟 b) 2𝑟 c) 𝑟/2 d) 𝑟/4
4. The ratio of areas of the electron orbits for the first excited state and the ground state for the hydrogen
atom is
a) 4:1 b) 16:1 c) 8:1 d) 2:1
5. The acceleration of electron in the first orbit of hydrogen atom is
4𝜋 ! 𝑚 ℎ! ℎ! 𝑚! ℎ!
a) b) c) d)
ℎ" 4𝜋 ! 𝑚𝑟 4𝜋 ! 𝑚! 𝑟 " 4𝜋 ! 𝑟 "
6. #
An alpha nucleus of energy ! 𝑚𝑣 ! bombards a heavy nuclear target of charge 𝑍𝑒. Then the distance of
closest approach for the alpha nucleus will be proportional to
a) 𝑣 ! b) 1/m c) 1/𝑣 $ d) 1/𝑍𝑒
7. In the Bohr model of the hydrogen atom, let 𝑅, 𝑉and 𝐸 represent the radius of the orbit, the speed of
electron and the total energy of the electron respectively. Which of the following quantities is
proportional to quantum number 𝑛?
𝑅 𝐸
a) b) c) 𝑅𝐸 d) 𝑉𝑅
𝐸 𝑉
8. The angular momentum of electron in hydrogen atom is proportional to
a) √𝑟 b) 1/𝑟 c) 𝑟 ! d) 1/√𝑟
9. For an electron in the second orbit of Bohr’s hydrogen atom, the moment of linear momentum is
2ℎ ℎ
a) 𝑛𝜋 b) 2𝜋ℎ c) d)
𝜋 𝜋
10. Let the potential energy of hydrogen atom in the ground state be regarded as zero. Then its potential
energy in the first excited state will be
a) 20.4 eV b) 13.6 eV c) 3.4 eV d) 10.2eV
11. Hydrogen atom from excited state comes to the ground state by emitting a photon of wavelength 𝜆. If 𝑅 is
the Rydberg constant, the principal quantum number 𝑛 of the excited state is
𝜆𝑅 𝜆 𝜆𝑅! 𝜆𝑅
a) d b) d c) d d) d
𝜆𝑅 − 1 𝜆𝑅 − 1 𝜆𝑅 − 1 𝜆−1
12. The angular speed of the electric in the 𝑛 th orbit of Bohr hydrogen atom is
a) Directly proportional to 𝑛 b) Inversely proportional to √𝑛
c) Inversely proportional to 𝑛 ! d) Inversely proportional to 𝑛"
13. The ratio of kinetic energy and the total energy of the electron in the 𝑛th quantum state of Bohr’s atomic
model of hydrogen atom is
a) −2 b) −1 c) +2 d) +1
14. White light is passed through a dilutee solution of potassium permanganate. The spectrum produced by
the emergent light is
a) Band emission spectrum b) Line emission spectrum
c) Band absorption spectrum d) Line absorption spectrum
15. The product of linear momentum and angular momentum of an electron of the hydrogen atom is
proportional to 𝑛 % , where 𝑥 is
a) 0 b) 1 c) −2 d) 2

16. The diagram shows the energy levels for an electron in a certain atom. Which transition shown represents
the emission of a photon with the most energy?
4n=
3 n=

2 n=
I
1
IV II n=

a) III b) IV c) I d) II
17. An electron is moving in an orbit of a hydrogen atom from which there can be a maximum of six
transition. An electron is moving in an orbit of another hydrogen atom from which there can be a
maximum of three transition. The ratio of the velocities of the electron in these two orbits is
1 2 5 3
a) b) c) d)
2 1 4 4
18. The ionization energy of hydrogen atom is 13.6eV. Following Bohr’s theory, the energy corresponding to a
transition between 3rd and 4th orbit is
a) 3.40 eV b) 1.51 eV c) 0.85 eV d) 0.66 eV
19. The wavelength of radiation emitted is 𝜆& when an electron jumps from the third to the second orbit of
hydrogen atom. For the electron jump from the fourth to the second orbit of hydrogen atom,the
wavelength of radiation emitted will be
16 20 27 25
a) 𝜆& b) 𝜆& c) 𝜆& d) 𝜆&
25 27 20 16
20. The figure indicates the energy levels of a certain atom. When the system moves from 2𝐸 level to𝐸, a
$'
photon of wavelength 𝜆 is emitted. The wavelength of photon produced during its transition from "
level
to 𝐸 is
𝜆 3𝜆 4𝜆
a) b) c) d) 3𝜆
3 4 3
21. In an atom, the two electrons move round the nucleus in circular orbits of radii 𝑅 and 4𝑅. The ratio of the
times taken by them to complete one revolution is
a) 1/4 b) 4/1 c) 8/1 d) 1/8
22. The orbital frequency of an electron in the hydrogen atom is proportional to
a) 𝑛" b) 𝑛(" c) n d) 𝑛&
23. If the atom #&& Fm!)* follows the Bohr model and the radius of #&& Fm!)* is 𝑛 times the Bohr radius, then
find 𝑛.
a) 100 b) 200 c) 4 d) 1/4
24. In Rutherford scattering experiment, what will be the correct angle for 𝛼 scattering for an impact
parameter b=0?
a) 90° b) 270° c) 0° d) 180°
25. Consider an electron in the 𝑛th orbit of a hydrogen atom in the Bohr model. The circumference of the orbit
can be expressed in terms of the de-Broglie wavelength 𝜆 of that electron as
a) (0.529) 𝑛𝜆 b) √𝑛 𝜆 c) (13.6)𝜆 d) 𝑛𝜆
26. The spectral series of the hydrogen atom that lies in the visible region of the electromagnetic spectrum
a) Paschen b) Balmer c) Lyman d) Brackett
27. 𝑉# is the frequency of the series limit of Lyman series, 𝑉! is the frequency of the first line of Lyman series
and 𝑉" is the frequency of the series limit of the Balmer series? Then
1 1 1 1 1 1
a) 𝑣# − 𝑣! = 𝑣" b) 𝑣# = 𝑣! − 𝑣" c) = + d) = +
𝑣! 𝑣# 𝑣" 𝑣# 𝑣! 𝑣"
28. If the binding energy of the electron in a hydrogen atom is 13.6 eV, the energy required to remove the
electron from the first excited state of Li!+ is
a) 30.6 eV b) 13.6 eV c) 3.4 eV d) 122.4 eV
29. Rutherford’s atomic model could account for
a) Concept of stationary orbits b) The positively charged control core of an atom
c) Origin of spectra d) Stability of atoms
30. Hydrogen atoms are excited from ground state of the principal quantum number 4. Then the number of
spectral lines observed will be
a) 3 b) 6 c) 5 d) 2
31. The nucleus of an atom consists of
a) Electrons and protons b) Electrons, protons and neutrons
c) Electrons and Neutrons d) Neutrons and protons
+
32. Ionization energy of He ion at minimum position is
a) 13.6 eV b) 27.2 eV c) 54.4 eV d) 68.0 eV
33. The ratio of minimum wavelengths of Lyman and Balmer series will be
a) 1.25 b) 0.25 c) 5 d) 10
34. According to Bohr’s theory of hydrogen atom, for the electron in the 𝑛th allowed orbit the
(i) Linear momentum is proportional to 1/𝑛
(ii)Radius is proportional to 𝑛
(iii)Kinetic energy is proportional to1/ 𝑛2
(iv) Angular momentum is proportional to 𝑛
Choose the correct option from the codes given below.
a) (i),(iii),(iv) are correct b) (i) is correct
c) (i),(ii) are correct d) (iii) is correct
35. When an electron jumps from the orbit 𝑛 = 2 to 𝑛 = 4,then wavelength of the radiations absorbed will be
(𝑅 is Rydberg’s constant)
3𝑅 5𝑅 16 16
a) b) c) d)
16 16 5𝑅 3𝑅
36. In a hypothetical bohr hydrogen atom, the mass of the electron is doubled. The energy 𝐸, and energy 𝑟, of
the first orbit will be (𝑎, is the Bohr radius)
a) 𝐸, = −27.2eV; 𝑟, = 𝑎, /2 b) 𝐸, = −27.2eV; 𝑟, = 𝑎,
c) 𝐸, = −13.6eV; 𝑟, = 𝑎, /2 d) 𝐸, = −13.6eV; 𝑟, = 𝑎,
37. Bohr’s atom model assumes
a) The nucleus is of infinite mass and is at rest
b) Electrons in a quantized orbit will not radiate energy
c) Mass of electron remains constant
d) All the above conditions.
38. The ratio of minimum to maximum wavelength in Balmer series is
a) 5: 9 b) 5: 36 c) 1: 4 d) 3: 4
39. The ground state energy of hydrogen atom is −13.6 eV. When its electron is in the first excited state, its
excitation energy is
a) 3.4 eV b) 6.8 eV c) 10.2 eV d) zero
40. Wavelength of light emitted from second orbit to first orbit in a hydrogen atom is
a) 6563 Å b) 4102 Å c) 4861 Å d) 1215 Å
41. If 𝜆 is the wavelength of hydrogen atom from the transition 𝑛 =3 to 𝑛=1, then what is the wavelength for
doubly ionised lithium ion for same transition?
𝜆 𝜆
a) b) 3𝜆 c) d) 9 𝜆
3 9
42. If the wavelength of the first line of the Balmer series of hydrogen is 6561Å, the wavelength of the second
line of the series should be
a) 13122 Å b) 3280 Å c) 4860 Å d) 2187 Å
43. The ratio of longest wavelength and the shortest wavelength observed in the fifth spectral series of
emission spectrum of hydrogen is
a) 4/3 b) 525/376 c) 36/11 d) 960/11
44. Of the following transition in the hydrogen atom, the one which gives an emission line of the highest
frequency is
a) 𝑛 =1 to 𝑛=2 b) 𝑛 =2 to 𝑛=1 c) 𝑛 =3 to 𝑛=10 d) 𝑛 =10 to 𝑛=3
45. The wave number of the energy emitted when electron comes from fourth orbit to second orbit in
hydrogen is 20,397 cm(# . The wave number of the energy for the same transition in He+ is
a) 5,099 cm(# b) 20,497 cm(# c) 14400 Å d) 81,588 cm(#
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :
1 (a)
Radius of Bohr’s orbit
.! - " 4 (b)
𝑅- = /
! The radius of the orbit of the electron in the 𝑛th
⇒ 𝑅- ∝ 𝑛 (Z=constant)
excited state
∴ 𝑅" = 3! 𝑅 = 9𝑅 -" $14 0 "
!
2 (c) 𝑟= = $1" 9/= "

According to Bohr’s theory of atom electrons can For the first excited state
revolve only in those orbits in which their angular 𝑛 = 2 ,𝑍 = 1
0 $4! 0 "
momentum is an integral multiple of!1, where ℎ is ∵ 𝑟’ =
19= "
Planck’s constant. For the ground state of hydrogen atom
!0
Angular momentum = 𝑚𝑣𝑟= 𝑛 = 1 ,𝑍 = 1
!1
0" 4
Hence, angular momentum is quantized. ∵ 𝑟’’ = 19=!"
The energy of electron in 𝑛th orbit of hydrogen The ratio of radius
atom, 𝑟8 4
203 =
𝐸 = joule 𝑟 88 1
-"
The ratio of area of the electron orbit for
Thus, it is obvious that the hydrogen atom has
hydrogen atom
some characteristics energy state. In fact this is
𝐴8 4𝜋(𝑟′)!
true for the atom of each element, 𝑖𝑒, each atom =
has its energy quantized. 𝐴88 4𝜋(𝑟′′)!
𝐴8 16
Hence, both energy and angular momentum are =
quantised. 𝐴88 1
5 (c)
3 (d) -0 -0
Let a particle of change 𝑞 having velocity v From 𝑚𝑣𝑟 = !1 , 𝑣 = !196
approaches Q upto a closest distance 𝑟 and if the
:" -" 0 " 0"
velocity becomes 2𝑣, the closest distance will be Acceleration, 𝑎 = = =
6 $1" 9" 6 " (6) $1" 9" >)
𝑟.’
The law of conservation of energy yields, 6 (b)
Kinetic energy of particle=electric potential At distance of closest approach relative velocity of
energy between them at closest distance of two particles is 𝑣. Here target is considered as
approach. stationary, so 𝛼-particle comes to rest
Or
#
𝑚𝑣 ! = $14
# 5# instantaneously at distance of closest approach.
! 6
! Let required distance is 𝑟, then from work energy-
# ! 57
Or !
𝑚𝑣 = 𝑘 6
…(i) theorem.
# 9: " # /* ×/*
‚k = constant = $14!
ƒ 0− =−
! $14! 6
# ! 57 #
and !
𝑚(2𝑣) = 𝑘 68
…(ii) r∝9
Dividing Eq. (i) by Eq.(ii), #
∝ :"
$ %&#
9: "
$
"
= %&#
' ∝ 𝑍𝑒 !
9(!:) "
" '(
1 𝑟8
⇒ =
4 𝑟
𝑟
⇒ r’ =
4
7 (d) 16 (a)
# # 1 1
As 𝑅 ∝ 𝑛! ; 𝑉 ∝ - and 𝐸 ∝ -" 𝐸 = 𝑅ℎ𝑐 ’ ! − ! “
𝑛# 𝑛!
1 # #
∴ 𝑉𝑅 ∝ ‡ × 𝑛! ‰ 𝑖𝑒, 𝑉𝑅 ∝ 𝑛 𝐸($→") =𝑅ℎ𝑐 ”"" − $" •
𝑛 *
=𝑅ℎ𝑐 ” F × #G•= 0.05 𝑅ℎ𝑐
8 (a) # #
-0 𝐸($→!) =𝑅ℎ𝑐 ”!" − $" •
Angular momentum = !1 𝑖𝑒,
"
=𝑅ℎ𝑐 ” #G•= 0.2 Rhc
𝐿 ∝ 𝑛 ∝ √𝑟 (∵ 𝑟 ∝ 𝑛! ) # #
𝐸(!→#) =𝑅ℎ𝑐 ”(#)" − (!)" •
9 (d) "
=𝑅ℎ𝑐 ” $•= 0.75 𝑅ℎ𝑐
The moment of linear momentum is angular # #
momentum 𝐸(#→") =𝑅ℎ𝑐 ”(")" − (#)" •
-0 H
𝐿 = 𝑚𝑣𝑟 = !@ =− 𝑅ℎ𝑐 = −0.9 𝑅ℎ𝑐
F
Here, 𝑛=2 Thus, transition III gives most energy. Transition I
2ℎ ℎ represents the absorption of energy.
∴ 𝐿= =
2π π 17 (d)
10 (d) Number of spectral lines obtained due to
transition of electrons from 𝑛th orbit to lower
orbit is,
11 (a) -(-(#)
Here, 𝑛A = 1, 𝑛B = 𝑛 𝑁= !
# # # -$ (-$ (#)
=𝑅‚ "− ƒ I case 6 = !
C # -"

⇒
#
= 𝑅 ‚1 −
#
ƒ . . (i) ⇒ 𝑛# = 4
C -" -" (-" (#)
# # # # II case 3 =
or =1− or =1− !
C2 -" -" C2
⇒ 𝑛! = 3
C2
or 𝑛=Œ Velocity of electron in hydrogen atom in 𝑛th orbit
C2(#
1
12 (d) 𝑣- ∝
𝑛
𝑣- 𝑛!
13 (b) 8
=
𝑣 - 𝑛#
The Kinetic energy of the electron in the 𝑛th state 𝑛G 3
! $ ⇒ =
𝑚𝑍 𝑒 𝑛" 4
𝐾= ! ! !
8𝜀& ℎ 𝑛 18 (d)
The total energy of the electron in the 𝑛th state 𝐸 = 𝐸$ − 𝐸"
𝑚𝑍 𝑒 ! $
𝑇 = − ! ! ! 13.6 13.6
8𝜀& ℎ 𝑛 = − ! — ‡− ! ‰ = −0.85 + 1.51
4 3
𝐾
∴ = −1
𝑇 = 0.66 eV
14 (c)
15 (a) 19 (b)
Linear momentum = 𝑚𝑣 = #"* -
93/ Wavelength (𝜆) during transition from 𝑛! to 𝑛# is
-0
given by
Angular momentum = ! 1 # # #
C
= 𝑅 ”- " − - " •
Given, $ "
# # # )2
Linear momentum × angular momentum ∝ 𝑛 % ⇒ C = 𝑅 ”!" − "" • = "G
)→"
𝑚𝑐𝑍 𝑛ℎ % # # # "2
∴ × ∝ 𝑛 and = 𝑟 ”!" − $" • = #G
137 𝑛 2𝜋 C ,→"

𝑛& ∝ 𝑛 % 𝜆$→! 20
∴ =
⇒ 𝑥=0 𝜆"→! 27

Page|6
 20 27 (a)
⇒ 𝜆$→! = 𝜆
27 & Frequency, 𝑣 = 𝑅𝐶 ”-" − -" •
# #
20 (d) $ "
#
In the first case, energy emitted, 𝑣# = 𝑅𝐶 ”1 − J• =𝑅𝐶
# "
𝐸# = 2𝐸 − 𝐸 = 𝐸 𝑣! = 𝑅𝐶 ”1 − $• =$ 𝑅𝐶
# # 2K
𝑣" = 𝑅𝐶 ”$ − J• = $
In the second case, energy emitted
⇒ v# − v! = v"
4𝐸 𝐸
𝐸! = −𝐸 =
3 3
# 28 (a)
As 𝐸" is " rd, 𝜆! must be 3 times, 𝑖𝑒, 3𝜆 13.6
𝐸 = − 𝑍! eV
𝑛!
21 (d)
For first excited state,
𝑅# 𝑛#! 1 𝑛# 1 13.6
= = ∴ = 𝐸! = −3! ×
𝑅! 𝑛!! 4 𝑛! 2 4
= −30.6 eV
𝑇# 𝑛# " 1 " 1 Ionisation energy for first excited state of Li!+ is
=‡ ‰ =‡ ‰ =
𝑇! 𝑛! 2 8 30.6 eV.
29 (b)
22 (b)
$4!" -) 0 )
Time period of electron, T= 9/ " = , 30 (b)
∴ 𝑇 ∝ 𝑛" Number of spectral lines =
-(-(#)
=
$($ ")
=6
! !
1
∴ ∝ 𝑛"
frequency (𝑓) 31 (d)
or 𝑓 ∝ 𝑛(" Nucleus Contains only the neutrons and protons.
23 (d) 32 I
𝑚! Energy of helium ions.
(𝑟9 ) = ™ › (0.53Å) = (𝑛 × 0.3)Å
𝑧 #".G / "
𝐸- = − eV
-"
𝑚!
∴ =𝑛 In minimum position, 𝑛=1
𝑧
𝑚=5 for 100Fm257 (the outermost shell) and 𝑧 = For He+ , 𝑍 = 2
(#".G × (!)"
100 𝐸= #
eV
(5)! 1 𝐸 = 54.4 eV
∴ 𝑛= =
100 4 33 (b)
24 (d) The series end of Lyman series corresponds to
I
Impact parameter b ∝ cot transition from 𝑛B = ∞ to
!
Here b=0, hence, θ = 180& 𝑛A = 1, corresponding to the wavelength
# # #
25 (d) = 𝑅 ”# − J • = 𝑅
(C-./ )0
Circumference of 𝑛th Bohr orbit = 𝑛 𝜆 #
⇒ (λMNO )P = 2 = 912 Å …(i)
26 (b) For last line of Balmer series
Ultraviolet region Lyman series # #
=𝑅 ”(!)" − (J)" •= $
# 2
(Q-./ )1
Visible region Balmer series
$
Infrared region Paschen series, Brackett series ⇒ (λMNO )R =2 =3636 Å …(ii)
Pfund series Dividing Eq.(i) by Eq. (ii) .we get
From the above chart it is clear that Balmer series (Q-./ )0
= 0.25
(Q-./ )1
lies in the visible region of the electromagnetic
spectrum.

Page|7
34 (a) 40 (d)
According to Bohr’s theory of hydrogen atom , 1 1 1
= 𝑅 ‡ ! − !‰
angular momentum is quantized 𝑖𝑒, 𝜆 1 2
ℎ 1 3
𝐿 = 𝑚𝑣- 𝑟- = 𝑛 ‡ ‰ ⇒ = 1.097 × 10* ×
2𝜋 𝜆 4
(*
Or L∝𝑛 ∴ 𝜆 = 1.215 × 10 m = 1215 Å
-" 41 (c)
Radius of the orbit 𝑟- ∝ / For wavelength
S/ " = " #
Kinetic Energy = !-"
𝑖𝑒, 𝑘 ∝ -" 1 1 1
= 𝑅𝑍 ! ™ ! − ! ›
35 (d) 𝜆 𝑛# 𝑛!
# # #
= 𝑅 ”- " − - " • Here, transition is same
C $ " #
So, 𝜆 ∝ /"
𝑛# =2, 𝑛! =4
# # # λV (𝑍PN )! (3)#
= 𝑅 ”$ − #G• = = =9
C λPN (𝑍V )! ( 1)!
$(# "2
= 𝑅” •= 𝜆V 𝜆
#G #G 𝜆PN = =
𝜆=
#G 9 9
"2 42 ©
36 (a) For Balmer series, 𝑛# − 2, 𝑛! = 3 for 1st line and
#
As 𝑟 ∝ 9 𝑛! = 4 for second line

1 # #
∴ 𝑟& = 𝑎& 𝜆# " − " 3/16 3 36 27
2 = ¥!# $# ¦ = = × =
𝜆! − 5/16 16 5 20
!" ""
As 𝐸 ∝ 𝑚
20 20
∴ 𝐸& = 2(−13.6) = −27.2 eV 𝜆! = 𝜆# = × 6561 = 4860 Å
27 27
37 (d) 43 ©
# # # 2
For Pfund series, C = 𝑅 ‚)" − (J)"ƒ = !)
38 (a) 2

1 1 1 𝑅×5
= 𝑅 ¡ ! − !¢ = 𝜆W = 25/𝑅
𝜆MNO 2 3 36
1 1 1 36 − 25
1 1 1 𝑅 = 𝑅 ‡ ! − !‰ = 𝑅 ‡ ‰
= 𝑅¡ ! − ¢ = 𝜆X 5 6 25 × 36
𝜆MTU 2 ∞ 4
25 × 36
𝜆MNO 𝑅 × 5 4 5 𝜆X =
= × = 11𝑅
𝜆MTU 36 𝑅 9
𝜆X 25 × 36 𝑅
∴ = ×
𝜆W 11𝑅 25
39 (c) 36
Given, ground state energy of hydrogen atom =
11
𝐸# = −13.6 eV
Energy of electron in first excited state (𝑖𝑒, 𝑛=2) 44 (b)
#".G n = 10 (-0.136 eV)
𝐸! = − (!)" eV
E4
Therefore ,excitation energy E3
∆𝐸 = 𝐸! – 𝐸# n = 4 (-0.85 eV)
#".G n = 3 (-1.51 eV)
=− $
– (−13.6) = −3.4 + 13.6 = 10.2 eV n = 2 (-3.4 eV)
E1 E2
n = 1 (-13.6 eV)

E1 = −13.6 – (−3.4) = −10.2 eV

𝐸! = − 3.4 – ( − 13.6) = + 10.2 eV

Page|8
𝐸" = − 0.136 – ( −1.51) = − 1.374 eV 45 (d)
𝐸$ = − 1.51 – ( − 0.136) = − 1.374 eV 1 1 3𝑅
𝑣̅ = 𝑅 ¡ !
− !¢ = = 20397cm(#
When an electron makes transition from higher 2 4 4
energy level having energy 𝐸! (𝑛! ) to lower
For the same transaction in He atom (𝑍 = 2)
energy level having energy𝐸# (𝑛# ), then a photon
of frequency 𝑣 is emitted. 1 1 3𝑅 × 2!
Here, for emission line 𝐸# is maximum hence, it 𝑣̅ = 𝑅𝑍 ! ¡ − ¢ =
2! 4! 4
will have the highest frequency emission line.
= 20397 × 4 = 81588 cm(#

Page|9
 Nuclei & Radioactivity
1. A radioactive nucleus can decay simultaneously by two different processes which have decay constant
𝜆! and 𝜆" .The effective decay constant of the nuclide is 𝜆, where
1 1 1
a) 𝜆 = 𝜆! + 𝜆" b) 𝜆 = 2(𝜆! + 𝜆) c) = + d) 𝜆 = A𝜆! 𝜆"
𝜆 𝜆! 𝜆"
2. The activity of a radioactive sample is measured as 𝑁# counts per minute at 𝑡 = 0 and 𝑁# /𝑒 counts per
minute at 𝑡 = 5 minutes. The time (in minutes) at which the activity reduces to half its value is
5
a) 5 log $ 2 b) log $ 2/5 c) d) 5 log!# 2
log $ 2
3. The volume of a nucleus is directly proportional to
a) 𝐴 b) 𝐴%
𝐴!/%
c) √𝐴 d)
(where 𝐴=mass number of the nucleus)
5. A nucleus disintegrates into two nuclear parts which have their velocities in the ratio 2:1. The ratio of
their nuclear sizes will be
a) 2!/% : 1 b) 1: 3!/" c) 3!/" : 1 d) 1: 2!/%
6. Decay constant of radium is 𝜆. By a suitable process its compound radium bromide is obtained. The decay
constant of radium bromide will be
a) 𝜆 b) More than 𝜆 c) Less than 𝜆 d) Zero
7. A radioactive nucleus of mass 𝑀 emits a photon of frequency 𝑣 and the nucleus recoils. The recoil energy
will be
ℎ" 𝑣 " d) Zero
a) ℎ𝑣 b) 𝑀𝑐 " − ℎ𝑣 c)
2𝑀𝑐 "
8. The S.I. unit of radioactivity is
a) Roentgen b) Rutherford c) Curie d) Becquerel
" % ' ! " % '
9. In the reaction ! 𝐻 + ! 𝐻 → " 𝐻𝑒 + # 𝑛 if the binding energies of ! 𝐻, ! 𝐻 and " 𝐻𝑒 are respectively 𝑎, 𝑏 and
𝑐 (in 𝑀𝑒𝑉), then the energy (in 𝑀𝑒𝑉) released in this reaction is
a) 𝑐 + 𝑎 − 𝑏 b) 𝑐 − 𝑎 − 𝑏 c) 𝑎 + 𝑏 + 𝑐 d) 𝑎 + 𝑏 − 𝑐
10. Half life of a radio-active substance is 20 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑠. The time between 20% and 80% decay will be
a) 20 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑠 b) 40 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑠 c) 30 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑠 d) 25 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑠
11. The fussion process is possible at high temperatures, because at higher temperatures
a) The nucleus disintegrates
b) The molecules disintegrates
c) Atom become ionized
d) The nucleus get sufficient energy to overcome the strong forces of repulsion
12. Two nuclei have their mass numbers in the ratio of 1:3. The ratio of their nuclear densities would be
a) 1:3 b) 3:1 c) (3)!/% :1 d) 1:1
14. Two radioactive samples have decay constant 15𝑥 and 3𝑥. If they have the same number of nuclei initially,
!
the ratio of number of nuclei after a time () is
1 𝑒 1 1
a) b) c) ' d) "
𝑒 2 𝑒 𝑒
16. Two lithium nuclei in a lithium vapour at room temperature do not combine to form a carbon nucleus
because
a) Carbon nucleus is an unstable particle
b) It is not energetically favourable
c) Nuclei do not come very close due to Coulombic repulsion
d) Lithium nucleus is more tightly bound than a carbon nucleus
17. When the number of nucleons in nuclei increase, the binding energy per nucleon
a) Increases continuously with mass number
b) Decreases continuously with mass number
c) Remains constant with mass number
d) First increases and then decreases with increases of mass number
18. In a sample of radioactive material, what fraction of the initial number of active nuclei will remain
undisintegrated after half of a half-life of the sample
1 1 1
a) b) c) d) 2√2
4 2√2 √2
19. The binding energy per nucleon of deuterium and helium atom is 1.1 𝑀𝑒𝑉 and 7.0 𝑀𝑒𝑉. If two deuterium
nuclei fuse to form helium atom, the energy released is
a) 19.2 𝑀𝑒𝑉 b) 23.6 𝑀𝑒𝑉 c) 26.9 𝑀𝑒𝑉 d) 13.9 𝑀𝑒𝑉
20. A radioactive sample 𝑆! having the activity 𝐴! has twice the number of nuclei as another sample 𝑆" of
activity𝐴" . If 𝐴" = 2𝐴! , then the ratio of half-life of 𝑆! to the half-life of 𝑆" is
a) 4 b) 2 c) 0.25 d) 0.75
21. The density of uranium is of the order of
a) 10"# kgm*% b) 10!+ kgm*% c) 10!' kgm*% d) 10!! kgm*%
22. The control rod in a nuclear reactor is made of
a) Uranium b) Cadmium c) Graphite d) Plutonium
25. The mass of a neutron is the same as that of
a) A proton b) A meson c) An epsilon d) An electron
26. In Rutherford scattering experiment, what will be the correct angle for 𝛼 scattering for an impact
parameter 𝑏 = 0
a) 90° b) 270° c) 0° d) 180°
27. Two radioactive substances A and B have decay constants 5𝜆 and 𝜆 respectively. At 𝑡 = 0 they have the
! "
same number of nuclei. The ratio of number of nuclei of A to those of B will be{$| after a time interval
1 1
a) b) 4𝜆 c) 2𝜆 d)
4𝜆 2𝜆
28. During mean life of a radioactive element, the fraction that disintegrates is
1 𝑒−1 𝑒
a) 𝑒 b) c) d)
𝑒 𝑒 𝑒−1
29. The subatomic particles proton and neutron fall under the group of
a) Mesons b) Photons c) Leptons d) Baryons
30. There are two radioactive substances 𝐴 and 𝐵. Decay constant of 𝐵 is two times that of 𝐴. Initially, both
have equal number of nuclei. After 𝑛 half lives of 𝐴, rate of disintegration of both are equal. The value of 𝑛
is
a) 4 b) 2 c) 1 d) 5
31. The average binding energy per nucleon in the nucleus of an atom is approximately
a) 8 𝑒𝑉 b) 8 𝐾𝑒𝑉 c) 8 𝑀𝑒𝑉 d) 8 𝐽
32. Consider an initially pure ′𝑀, 𝑔 sample of - 𝑋, an isotope that has a half life of 𝑇 hour. What is it’s initial
decay rate (𝑁- = Avogrado No.)
𝑀𝑁- 0.693𝑀𝑁- 0.693𝑀𝑁- 2.303𝑀𝑁-
a) b) c) d)
𝑇 𝑇 𝐴𝑇 𝐴𝑇
33. Nuclear binding energy is equivalent to
a) Mass of proton b) Mass of neutron
c) Mass of nucleus d) Mass defect of nucleus
35. Heavy water is used in a nuclear reactor to
a) Absorb the neutrons b) Slow down the neutrons
c) Act as coolant d) None of the above
36. Two radioactive materials 𝑋! and 𝑋" have decay constants 10𝜆 and 𝜆 repectively. If initially, they have the
same number of nuclei, then the ratio of the number of nuclei of 𝑋! to that of 𝑋" will be 1/𝑒 after a time
1 1 11 1
a) b) c) d)
10𝜆 11𝜆 10𝜆 9𝜆
38. The half-life of a radioactive substance is 48 hours. How much time will it take to disintegrate to its ! 𝑡ℎ
!(
part
a) 12 ℎ b) 16 ℎ c) 48 ℎ d) 192 ℎ
42. A moderator is used in nuclear reactors in order to
a) Slow down the speed of the neutrons b) Accelerate the neutrons
c) Increase the number of neutrons d) Decrease the number of neutrons
44. For effective nuclear forces, the distance should be
a) 10*!# 𝑚 b) 10*!% 𝑚 c) 10*!. 𝑚 d) 10*"# 𝑚
45. The binding energies per nucleon of Li+ and He' are 5.6 MeV and 7.06 MeV respectively, then the energy
of the reaction
Li+ + 𝑝 = 2[ " He' ] will be
a) 17.28 MeV b) 39.2 MeV c) 28.24 MeV d) 1.46 MeV
47. Equivalent energy of mass equal to 1 𝑎. 𝑚. 𝑢. is
a) 931 𝐾𝑒𝑉 b) 931 𝑒𝑉 c) 931 𝑀𝑒𝑉 d) 9.31 𝑀𝑒𝑉
48. -
If 𝑚, 𝑚/ and 𝑚0 are the masses of 1 𝑋 nucleus, neutron and proton respectively, then
a) 𝑚 < (𝐴 − 𝑍)𝑚/ + 𝑍𝑚0 b) 𝑚 = (𝐴 − 𝑍)𝑚/ + 𝑍𝑚0
c) 𝑚 = (𝐴 − 𝑍)𝑚0 + 𝑍𝑚/ d) 𝑚 > (𝐴 − 𝑍)𝑚/ + 𝑍𝑚0
49. The binding energy per nucleon of deuteron ( "!H)and helium nucleus ( '"He)is 1:1MeV and 7MeV
respectively. If two deuteron nuclei react to form a single helium nucleus , then the energy released is
a) 13.9MeV b) 26.9MeV c) 23.6MeV d) 19.2MeV
50. The radius of nucleus is
a) Proportional to its mass number
b) Inversely Proportional to its mass number
c) Proportional to the cube root of its mass number
d) Not related to its mass number
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :
1 (a) 6 ! 3/<"/#
Here 𝑇!/" = 20 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑠, we know 6 = {"|
As disintegration by two different processes is !

simultaneous, therefore, effective decay constant 6 =# ! 3" /"#

For 20% decay 6 = !## = {"| …(i)
𝜆 = (𝜆! + 𝜆" ) !
6 "# ! 3# /"#
For 80% decay 6 = !## = {"| …(ii)
2 (a) !

𝑁# 1 Dividing (ii) by (i)

𝑁 = 𝑁# 𝑒 *23 ⇒ = 𝑁# 𝑒 *2(.) ⇒ 𝜆 = ('# ('" )
𝑒 5 1 1 #!
6! *2(3) ! =™ š
Now "
= 𝑁# 𝑒 ⇒ 𝑡 = 2 ln 2 = 5 ln 2 4 2
3 (a) On solving we get 𝑡" − 𝑡! = 40 𝑚𝑖𝑛
Radius of nucleus 𝑅 = 𝑅# 𝐴!/% 11 (d)
In practise, nuclear fusion is very difficult process.
Where 𝑅# = 1.2 × 10*!. m
' This is so when positively charged nuclei come
Volume of nucleus (𝑉) = % 𝜋𝑅%
very close for fusion, the force of electrical
4 % repulsion between them becomes very strong. For
= 𝜋‘ 𝑅# 𝐴!/% ’
3 fusion against this force, they require very high
'
= ' 𝜋𝑅#% 𝐴 energy. To impart, so much energy to them, very
∴ 𝑉∝𝐴 high temperature and very high pressure is
5 (d) required.
Law of conservation of momentum gives 12 (d)
𝑚! 𝑣! = 𝑚" 𝑣" Density of nuclear matter is independent of mass
7" 8
⇒ = 8# number, so the required ratio is 1:1.
7 # "
' 14 (d)
But 𝑚 = % 𝜋𝑟 % ρ
Using
or 𝑚 ∝ 𝑟% 𝑁! 1
7" 9$ 8 𝑁 = 𝑁# 𝑒 *23 ⇒ = "
∴ = 9"$ = 8# 𝑁" 𝑒
7# # "
16 (c)
9" ! !/%
⇒ ={ | Lithium nucleus and carbon nucleus are positively
9# "
∴ 𝑟! : 𝑟" = 1: 2!/% charge. According to coulomb law same charge
6 (a) repal each other. So, nuclei do not come very
Decay constant remains unchanged in a chemical close.
reaction 17 (d)
7 (c) Average BE/nucleon increase first, and then
:8 "
decreases, as is clear from BE curve.
(momentum)" { ; |
𝐸= = 18 (c)
2𝑀 2𝑀
𝑁 1 3/<"/# 1 !/" 1
∴ =™ š =™ š =
𝑁# 2 2 √2
8 (d) 19 (b)
" " '
! 𝐻 +! 𝐻 →" 𝐻𝑒 + energy
9 (b) Binding energy of a ( ! 𝐻" ) deuterium nuclei
During fusion binding energy of daughter nucleus = 2 × 1.1 = 2.2 𝑀𝑒𝑉
is always greater than the total energy of the Total binding energy of two deuterium nuclei
parent nuclei so energy released = 𝑐 − (𝑎 + 𝑏) = = 2.2 × 2 = 4.4 𝑀𝑒𝑉
𝑐−𝑎−𝑏
10 (b)
 Binding energy of a ( " 𝐻' ) nuclei = 4 × 7 = or 𝑡=
"
=
!
'2 "2
28 𝑀𝑒𝑉
28 (c)
So, energy released in fusion = 28 − 4.4 = !
By using 𝑁 = 𝑁# 𝑒 *23 and average life time 𝑡 = 2
23.6 𝑀𝑒𝑉
6 !
20 (a) So 𝑁 = 𝑁# 𝑒 *2×!/2 = 𝑁# 𝑒 *! ⇒ 6 = 𝑒 *! = $
!
#.(?%
Activity, 𝐴 = 𝜆𝑁 = 𝑁 6
Now disintegrated fraction = 1 − 6 = 1 − $ =
!
<"/#
!
Where 𝑇!/" is the half-life of a radioactive sample, $*!
-" 6" < $
∴ = × 6#
-# <" #
𝑇! 𝐴" 𝑁!
= ×
𝑇" 𝐴! 𝑁"
"-" "6# '
= × =! 29 (d)
-" 6#
Elementary particles are mainly classified into
21 (a)
two parts viz. Bosons & Fermions. Photons and
Mass of Uranium nucleus = mass of proton +
mesons belong to Bosons. Fermions and further
mass of neutron.
divided into leptons and conservation of charge
= 92 × 1.6725 × 10*"+ + 143 × 1.6747 ×
principle. Baryons which are lighter and heavier
10*"+ )
particles respectively. Electrons belong to leptons.
= (153.87 × 10*"+ + 239.48 × 10*"+ )
Neutrons and protons belong to Baryons. Baryons
= 3.93.35 × 10*"+ Kg
and mesons are together known as Hadrons
since, radius of nucleus is of the order of 10*!. m,
30 (c)
hence, volume is
Let 𝜆- = 𝜆 ∴ 𝜆L = 2𝜆
𝑉 ∝ (10*!. )% m% ∝ 10*'. m%
@ABB %?%.%. ×!#(#* If 𝑁# is total number of atoms in 𝐴 and 𝐵 at 𝑡 = 0,
∴ Density = = = 10"# kgm*%
CDEF@G !#(+,
then initial rate of disintegration of 𝐴 = 𝜆𝑁# , and
initial rate of disintegration of 𝐵 = 2𝜆 𝑁#
22 (b) As 𝜆L = 2𝜆-

25 (a) 1
∴ 𝑇L = 𝑇-
2
26 (d)
𝑖𝑒, half-life of 𝐵 is half the half-life of 𝐴.
J
Impact parameter 𝑏 ∝ cot "
Here 𝑏 = 0, hence 𝜃 = 180° After one half-life of 𝐴
27 (d) 𝑑𝑁 𝜆𝑁#
Number of nuclei remained after time 𝑡 can be ™− š =
𝑑𝑡 - 2
written as
𝑁 = 𝑁# 𝑒 *23 Equivalently, after two half lives of 𝐵
Where N0 is initial number of nuclei of both the
𝑑𝑁 2𝜆𝑁# 𝜆𝑁#
substances. ™− š = =
𝑑𝑡 L 4 2
𝑁! = 𝑁# 𝑒 *.23 … . . (i)
*23
and 𝑁" = 𝑁# 𝑒 … . (ii) M6
Clearly, {− M3 | = − { M3 |
M6

Dividing Eq.(i) by Eq.(ii) , we obtain - L

6" !
= 𝑒 (*.2K2)3 = 𝑒 *'23 = after 𝑛 = 1 𝑖𝑒, one half-life of 𝐴
6# $ +-'
But, we have given
31 (c)
6" ! " !
6#
= {$ | = $ #
! ! 32 (c)
Hence ,$ # = $ +-'
𝑑𝑁
Comparing the powers, we get 𝑁 = 𝑁# 𝑒 *23 ⇒ = 𝑁# 𝜆𝑒 *23
𝑑𝑡
2 = 4𝜆𝑡

Page|5
 M6
Initially at 𝑡 = 0, ¡ M3 ¡ = 𝑁# 𝜆
3N#
Where 𝑁# = Initial number of undecayed atoms
Mass of the sample 𝑀 𝑀𝑁-
= = =
Mass of a single atom of 𝑋 𝐴/𝑁- 𝐴
𝑑𝑁 𝑀𝑁- 𝜆 0.693𝑀𝑁-
∴ = = 45 (a)
𝑑𝑡 3N# 𝐴 𝐴𝑇
The reaction is % Li+ +! 𝑃! → 2( " He' )
33 (d)
𝐵. 𝐸. = ∆𝑚 𝑎𝑚𝑢 = ∆𝑚 × 931 𝑀𝑒𝑉 ∴ 𝐸0 = 2𝐸( " He' )𝐸(OP)
35 (b)
Heavy water is used in certain type of nuclear = 2(4 × 7.06) − 7 × 5.6
where it acts as a neutron moderator to slow
down neutrons so that they can react with = 56.48 − 39.2 = 17.28 MeV
uranium in the reactor. 47 (c)
36 (d)
6." (3) !
Here, = 48 (a)
6.# (3) $
The mass of nucleus formed is always less than
𝑁# 𝑒 *!#23 1 the sum of the masses of the constituent protons
or = and neutrons 𝑖. 𝑒. , 𝑚 < (𝐴 − 𝑍)𝑚/ + 𝑍𝑚0
𝑁# 𝑒 *23 𝑒
49 (c)
(Because initially, both have the same number of As given
nuclei, 𝑁# ). " " '
! H + ! H → " He + energy

$ (-'
The binding energy per nucleon of a
or 𝑒 = $ ("!-' = 𝑒 ?23 deuteron( ! H" )
= 1.1MeV
9𝜆𝑡 = 1 ∴ Total binding energy of one deuteron nucleus
1 = 2 × 1.1 = 2.2MeV
𝑡= ∴ The binding energy per nucleon of
9𝜆
Helium( " He' )
38 (d) =7MeV
𝑁 1 3/< 1 1 3/'= ∴ Total binding energy
=™ š ⇒ =™ š
𝑁# 2 16 2 = 4 × 7 = 28MeV
' 3/'= Hence, energy released in the above process
1 1
⇒™ š =™ š ⇒ 𝑡 = 192 ℎ𝑜𝑢𝑟𝑠 = 28 − 2 × 2.2
2 2
42 (a) = 28 – 4.4 = 23.6 MeV
Moderator slows down neutrons 50 (c)

44 (c)

Page|6
 Semiconductors and it’s devices
RED ZONE

1. In the following circuit, the output 𝑌 for all possible inputs 𝐴 and 𝐵 is expressed by the truth table

𝐴 𝐵 𝑌
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1
a) ; ; b) ; ; c) ; ; d) ; ;
1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1

2. The following figure shows a logic gate circuit with two inputs A and B and the output C. The voltage
waveforms of A, B and C are as shown below
A
Logic gate C
circuit
B

t
A

t
B

t
C

The logic circuit gate is

a) AND gate b) NAND gate c) NOR gate d) OR gate
3. When the forward bias voltage of a diode is changed from 0.6 V to 0.7 V, the current changes from 5 mA to
15 mA. Then its forward bias resistance is
a) 0.01 Ω b) 0.1 Ω c) 10 Ω d) 100 Ω
4. In the following, which one of the diodes is reverse biased?
-12 V
+ 10 V

a) R
b) R

+ 5 V
- 10 V

5. In Boolean algebra, 𝐴 ∙ 𝐵 is equal to

a) 𝐴 ∙ 𝐵 b) 𝐴 + 𝐵 c) 𝐴 ∙ 𝐵 d) 𝐴 + 𝐵
6. The truth table given below is for (𝐴 and 𝐵 are the inputs, 𝑌 is the output)
𝑨 𝑩 𝒀
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
a) NOR b) AND c) XOR d) NAND
7. The circuit shown in the figure contains two diodes each with a forward resistance of 30 Ω and with
infinite backward resistance. If the battery is 3V, the current through the 50 Ω resistance (in ampere) is
70 Ω

70 Ω

3V 50 Ω
+

a) Zero b) 0.01 c) 0.02 d) 0.03

8. Find 𝑉!"
10W
30V

VAB 10W 10W

a) 10 𝑉 b) 20 𝑉 c) 30 𝑉 d) None of these
9. Formation of covalent bonds in compounds exhibits
a) Wave nature of electron
b) Particle nature of electron
c) Both wave and particle nature of electron
d) None of the above
10. The temperature coefficient of resistance of a semiconductor
a) Is always positive b) Is always negative
c) Is zero d) May be positive or negative or zero
11. The output of a NAND gate is 0
a) If both inputs are 0
b) If one input is 0 and the other input is 1
c) If both inputs are 1
d) Either if both inputs are 1 or if one of the inputs is 1 and the other 0
12. Transfer characteristics [output voltage (𝑉# ) vs input voltage (𝑉$ )] for a base biased transistor in CE
configuration is as shown in the figure. For using transistor as a switch, it is used

a) In region III b) Both in region (I) and (III)

c) In region II d) In region I
13. A zener diode, having breakdown voltage equal to 15 𝑉, is used in a voltage regulator circuit shown in
figure. The current through the diode is

a) 20 𝑚𝐴 b) 5 𝑚𝐴 c) 10 𝑚𝐴 d) 15 𝑚𝐴
14. The current in the circuit shown in the figure, considering ideal diode is
100
3.2 V 3 V

a) 20 A b) 2 × 10%& A c) 200 A d) 2 × 10%' A

15. A 𝑝-type material is electrically …….
a) Positive
b) Negative
c) Neutral
d) Depends on the concentration of 𝑝 impurities
16. Which of the following statements is not correct when a junction diode is in forward bias?
a) The width of depletion region decreases.
b) Free electrons on 𝑛-side will move towards the junction.
c) Holes on 𝑝-side move towards the junction.
d) Electrons on 𝑛-side and holes on 𝑝-side will move away from junction.
17. In 𝑝 − 𝑛 junction, the barrier potential resists
a) Free electrons in 𝑛-region and holes in –region
b) Free electrons in 𝑝-region and holes in 𝑛-region
c) Only free electrons in 𝑛-region
d) Only holes in 𝑝-region
18. Within depletion region of p-n junction diode
a) 𝑝-side is positive and 𝑛-side is negative
b) 𝑝-side is negative and 𝑛-side is positive
c) Both sides are positive or both negative
d) Both sides are neutral
19. In an unbiased 𝑝-𝑛 junction
a) Potential at p is more than that at n b) Potential at p is less than that at n
c) Potential at p is equal to that at n d) Potential at p is +ve and that at n is −ve

20. Resistance of a semiconductor

a) Increases with increase in temperature
b) Decreases with increase in temperature
c) Is not affected by change in temperature
d) Increase for germanium and decrease for silicon
21. In the adjacent circuit, 𝐴 and 𝐵 represent two inputs and 𝐶 represents the output. The circuit represents
A

a) NOR gate b) AND gate c) NAND gate d) OR gate

22. If a full wave rectifier circuit is operating from 50Hz mains, the fundamental frequency in the ripple will
be
a) 70.7 Hz b) 100 Hz c) 25 Hz d) 59 Hz
23. Which of the following has negative temperature coefficient of resistance
a) Copper b) Aluminum c) Iron d) Germanium

24. In a 𝑝 − 𝑛 junction diode

a) The current in the reverse biased condition is generally very small
b) The current in the reverse biased condition is small but the forward biased current is independent of
the bias voltage
c) The reverse biased current is strongly dependent on the applied bias voltage
d) The forward biased current is very small in comparison to reverse biased current
25. In the circuit shown in figure the maximum output voltage 𝑉# is
+
Vi D1 D2
10 V
2kW
T
0 + –
T/2 t V0
2kW 2kW
–
5
a) 0 𝑉 b) 5 𝑉 c) 10 𝑉 d) 𝑉
√2
26. To get an output 1 from the circuit shown in the figure, the input must be

a) 𝐴 = 0, 𝐵 = 1, 𝐶 = 0 b) 𝐴 = 1, 𝐵 = 0, 𝐶 = 0 c) 𝐴 = 1, 𝐵 = 0, 𝐶 = 1 d) 𝐴 = 1, 𝐵 = 1, 𝐶 = 0
27. A 2𝑉 battery is connected across the points 𝐴 and 𝐵 as shown in the figure given below. Assuming that the
resistance of each diode is zero in forward bias and infinity in reverse bias, the current supplied by the
battery when its positive terminal is connected to 𝐴 is
10 W

10 W

A B

a) 0.2 𝐴 b) 0.4 𝐴 c) Zero d) 0.1 𝐴

28. In the figure, potential difference between 𝐴 and 𝐵 is

10 kΩ

30 V 10 kΩ 10 kΩ

a) Zero b) 5 V c) 10 V d) 15 V
29. On increasing the reverse bias to a large value in a p-n junction, diode current
a) Increases slowly b) Remains fixed c) Suddenly increases d) Decreases slowly
30. For the diode, the characteristics curves are given at different temperatures. The relation between the
temperatures is

a) 𝑇( = 𝑇) = 𝑇& b) 𝑇( < 𝑇) < 𝑇& c) 𝑇( ≥ 𝑇) ≥ 𝑇& d) None of these

31. The combination of the following gates produces

a) AND gate b) NAND gate c) NOR gate d) OR gate

32. In the following circuit of 𝑃𝑁 junction diodes 𝐷( , 𝐷) and 𝐷& are ideal then 𝑖 is
R
D1
R
D2

i D3 R

a) 𝐸/𝑅 b) 𝐸/2𝑅 c) 2𝐸/3𝑅 d) Zero

33. In the middle of the depletion layer of reverse biased p-n junction, the
a) Electric field is zero b) Potential is maximum
c) Electric field is maximum d) Potential is zero
34. In breakdown region, a Zener diode behaves as a
a) Constant current source b) Constant voltage source
c) Constant resistance source d) Constant power source
35. &
The contribution in the total current flowing through a semiconductor due to electrons and holes are
'
( *
and ' respectively. If the drift velocity of electrons is ) times that of holes at this temperature, then the
radio of concentration of electrons and holes is
a) 6 : 5 b) 5 : 6 c) 3 : 2 d) 2 : 3
36. Why is there sudden increase in current in zener diode?
a) Due to rupture of bonds
b) Resistance of depletion layer becomes less
c) Due to high doping
d) None of the above
37. A diode is connected to 220 𝑉 (𝑟𝑚𝑠)𝑎𝑐 in series with a capacitor as shown in figure. The voltage across
the capacitor is

220 V C
ac

220
a) 220 𝑉 b) 110 𝑉 c) 311.1 𝑉 d) 𝑉
√2
38. When n-p-n transistor is used as an amplifier
a) Electrons move from emitter to base b) Electrons move from base to emitter
c) Electrons move from collector to base d) Holes move from base to emitter
39. The circuit shown in the figure contains two diodes each with a forward resistance of 50 Ω and with
infinite backward resistance. If the battery is 6 V, the current through the 100 Ω resistance (in ampere) is
150 Ω

50 Ω

6V 100 Ω

a) Zero b) 0.02 c) 0.03 d) 0.036

40. 𝑛-type semiconductor is
a) Positively charged
b) Negatively charged
c) Neutral
d) Positive or negative depending upon doping material
41. A pure semiconductor behaves slightly as a conductor at
a) Room temperature b) Low temperature c) High temperature d) Both (b) and (c)
42. Symbolic representation of photodiode is

a) b) c) d)

43. A logic gate and its truth table are shown below

𝑨 𝑩 𝒀
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
The gate is
a) NOR b) AND c) OR d) NOT
44. Truth table for system of four NAND gates as shown in figure is

𝐴 𝐵 𝑌 A B C A B Y A B Y
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
a) ;; 0 1 1 ;; b) ;;0 1 0;; c) ;;0 1 1;; d) ;;0 1 0;;
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
45. In 𝑃-𝑁 junction, avalanche current flows in circuit when biasing is
a) Forward b) Reverse c) Zero d) Excess
46. The depletion layer in a silicon diode is 1 𝜇m wide and its knee potential is 0.6 V, then the electric field in
the depletion layer will be
a) 0.6 Vm%( b) 6 × 10' Vm%( c) 6 × 10* Vm%( d) Zero
47. 𝑝-type semiconductor are
a) Positively charged
b) Produced when boron is added as an impurity
c) Produced when phosphorus is added as an impurity to silicon
d) Produced when carbon is added as an impurity to germanium.
 : HINTS AND SOLUTIONS :
1 (d)
10W
Boolean expression of the given circuit is 𝑌 = 30V Parallel
9999999999999999999
99999999
𝐴 + 𝐵 + 99999999
𝐴+𝐵 =𝐴+𝐵
VAB 10W 10W
2 (a)
From truth table it is clear that output is high if at
30
least one input is low. The Boolean expression 𝑉12 = × 5 = 10 𝑉
(10 + 5)
which satisfies the output of this logic gate is 𝐶 =
9 (a)
𝐴 ∙ 𝐵, which is for AND gate.
For motion of covalent bonds in compounds
3 (c)
∆" $.&'$.( exhibits nature of electron.
Forward biased resistance = ∆#
= (*+'+)×*$!" 10 (b)
0.1 The temperature co-efficient of resistance of a
= = 10 𝛺
10 × 10'. semiconductor is always negative
4 (d) 11 (c)
For reverse biasing of an ideal diode, the potential If inputs are 𝐴 and 𝐵 then output for NAND gate is
of 𝑛-side should be higher than potential of 𝑝-side. 𝑌 = 9999
𝐴𝐵
Only option (d) is satisfying the criterion for ⇒ If 𝐴 = 𝐵 = 1, 𝑌 = 1.19999 = 19 = 0
reverse biasing. 12 (b)
5 (d) I → ON
According to De-Morgan’s theorem III → OFF
𝐴 ∙ 𝐵 = (𝐴99999999
+ 𝐵) In IInd state it is used as a amplifier it is active
VVVVVVVV
∴ 𝐴 ∙ 𝐵) = U𝐴 + 𝐵W region
13 (b)
= ( A+𝐵) (∵ 𝐴̿ = 𝐴)
Voltage across zener diode is constant

∴ 𝐴 ∙ 𝐵 = (A +𝐵)
6 (d)
The output 𝑌 is a combination of AND + NOT
gate. Hence, the truth table is for NAND gate.
7 (c)
In the circuit the upper diode 𝐷* is reverse biased 15 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡
and the lower diode 𝐷/ is forward biased. Thus 𝑖*34 = = 15𝑚𝐴
1𝑘Ω
there will be no current across upper diode (20 − 15)𝑉 5𝑉 20
𝑖/+$4 = = = 𝐴 = 20𝑚𝐴
junction. The effective circuit will be as shown in 250Ω 250Ω 1000
figure. ∴ 𝑖56768 :;<:6 = (20 − 15) = 5 𝑚𝐴
70 Ω
14 (b)
Potential difference across diode
= 3.2 – 3 = 0.2 V
3V 50 Ω ∴ Current through diode
+
$./
𝑖 = *$$ = 2 × 10'. A
Total resistance of circuit 15 (c)
𝑅 = 50 + 70 + 30 = 150 Ω A 𝑝-type material is electrically neutral.
" .
Current in circuit, 𝐼 = 0 = *+$ = 0.02 A. 16 (d)
8 (a) In forward biasing both electrons and protons
Diode is in forwards biasing hence the circuit can move towards the junction and hence the width of
be redrawn as follows depletion region decreases.
17 (a)

Page|1
 In 𝑝 − 𝑛 junction, the barrier potential offers = 2 × 50= 100 Hz
resistance to free electrons in n-region and holes 23 (d)
in 𝑝-region. Temperature co-efficient of semiconductor is
18 (b) negative
In a p-n junction diode, electrons in conduction 24 (a)
band on 𝑛-type side travel across the junction and The forward voltage overcomes the barrier
leave the positively ionized impurity atoms voltage. Due to which the forward current is high
unneutralised. Consequently, there is positively but depends upon the forward voltage applied.
charged region adjacent to the junction in 𝑛-type The reverse voltage supports the barrier voltage,
material. On 𝑝-type side the electrons which have due to which the reverse current is low.
traversed the boundary recombine with positive 25 (b)
holes in the valence For the positive half cycle of input the resulting
network is shown below
Unneutralised Unneutralised
acceptor atom donoratom

+ +
+
p - type n-type
Vi +
+ + Electron D1 D2
+ + 10 V 2kW
Hole
2kW
Acceptoratom
Extent
of
Extent of
positive
Donor atom
Þ – 2kW
(neutral) negative space
(neutral)
0 + –
space
charge
charge
region T/2 t V0
region on n-type
2kW 2kW
on p-type
side
side
2kW

band and form a layer of unneutralised negatively –

ionised trivalent impurity atoms making a 1 1

⇒ (𝑉$ )@AB = (𝑉C )@AB = × 10 = 5 𝑉
negatively charged region as shown in figure. The 2 2
region around the junction is called charge 26 (c)
depletion region or space charge region. Hence, We can realize the gate circuit as
within the depletion region, 𝑝-side is negative and
𝑛-side is positive.
19 (b)
Graph between potential and distance in a p-n
junction diode is given by Output of gate 1, 𝑌* = 𝐴 + 𝐵
Potential Output of gate 2, 𝑌/ = 𝑌* ∙ 𝐶 = (𝐴 + 𝐵) ∙ 𝐶
n (a) If 𝐴 = 0, 𝐵 = 1, 𝐶 = 0, then
p 𝑌/ = (0 + 1) ∙ 0 = 1 ∙ 0 = 0
Distance
(b) If 𝐴 = 1, 𝐵 = 0, 𝐶 = 0, then
𝑌/ = (1 + 0) ∙ 0 = 1 ∙ 0 = 0
∴ potential at 𝑝 is less than that at 𝑛. (c) If 𝐴 = 1, 𝐵 = 0, 𝐶 = 1, then
20 (b) 𝑌/ = (1 + 0) ∙ 1 = 1 ∙ 1 = 1
The electric resistance of a typical intrinsic (non (d) If 𝐴 = 1, 𝐵 = 1, 𝐶 = 0, then
doped) semiconductor decreases exponentially 𝑌/ = (1 + 1) ∙ 0 = 1 ∙ 0 = 0
with temperature 27 (a)
𝑅 = 𝑅$ 𝑒 =⁄> Since diode in upper branch is forward biased and
21 (d) in lower branch is reversed biased. So current
"
If we give the following inputs to 𝐴 and 𝐵, then through circuit 𝑖 = 0DE ; here 𝑟F = diode
#
corresponding output is shown in table.
resistance in forward biasing = 0
𝑨 𝑩 𝒀 𝑉 2
0 0 0 ⇒𝑖= = = 0.2𝐴
𝑅 10
0 1 1
28 (c)
1 0 1
1 1 1 Here 𝑝 − 𝑛 junction is forward biased. If 𝑝 − 𝑛
The above table is similar to OR gate. junction ideal, its resistance is zero. The effective
22 (b) resistance across 𝐴 and 𝐵
For full wave rectifier, ripple frequency 10 × 10
= = 5kΩ.
= 2× input frequency 10 + 10

Page|2
 " .$ / through it changes. Therefore, a zener diode
Current in the circuit 𝐼 = = = A
0 *+×*$" *$"
/ behaves as a constant voltage source.
Current in arm 𝐴𝐵 = 𝐼 = *$"
/
Potential difference across 𝐴 and 𝐵 = *$" × 5 ×
10. = 10 V.
29 (c)
Under normal reverse voltage, a very little reverse
current flows through a 𝑝-𝑛 junction. However, if
the reverse voltage attains a high value, the
junction may breakdown with sudden rise in
35 (a)
reverse current.
As we know, current density 𝐽 = 𝑛𝑞𝑣
If reverse voltage is increased continuously, the
⇒ 𝑗H = 𝑛H 𝑞𝑣H
kinetic energy of electrons (minority carriers)
and 𝐽I = 𝑛I 𝑞𝑣I
may become high enough to knock out electrons 𝑗H 𝑛H 𝑣H
from the semiconductor atoms. At this stage = ×
𝐽I 𝑛I 𝑣J
breakdown of the junction occurs characterised 3⁄4 𝑛H 5
by a sudden rise of reverse current and a sudden ⇒ = ×
1⁄4 𝑛I 2
fall of the resistance of barrier region. This may 𝑛H 6
destroy the junction permanently. ⇒ =
𝑛I 5
30 (b) 36 (a)
Higher the temperature of cathode, the larger is The reverse bias potential that results in this
the value of saturation current. sudden change in characteristics is called the
31 (a) zener potential and is given by the symbol 𝑉G .
From circuit When the voltage across diode is increased in the
𝑌 = VVVVVV
𝐴∙𝐵 =𝐴∙𝐵 reverse bias region, the minority carriers gain
This is an output of an AND gate. velocity and associated kinetic energy. These
32 (a) minority carriers are responsible for the reverse
Diodes 𝐷* and 𝐷. are forward biased and 𝐷/ is saturation current. The collisions of these
reverse biased so the circuit can be redrawn as minority carriers with atomic structure will result
follows in an ionisation process and a very high current is
𝐸 established. This current is called avalanche
⇒𝑖=
𝑅 current and the region in which this current is
R
established is called avalanche breakdown region.
R The magnitude of zener potential may be
decreased by increasing doping levels in the 𝑝 and
𝑛-type materials.
i R
When the 𝑉G decreases to a very low level, there is
E a strong electric field in the region of the junction
33 (a) that can break the bonds with C in the atom and
Due to the reverse biasing the width of depletion generate charge carriers. This mechanism is
region increases and current flowing through the called zener breakdown.
diode is almost zero. In this case electric field is 37 (d)
almost zero at the middle of the depletion region. The diode 𝐷 will conduct for positive half cycle of
34 (b) 𝑎. 𝑐. supply because this is forward biased. For
When the reverse voltage across a zener diode negative half cycle of 𝑎. 𝑐. supply, this is reverse
exceeds the breakdown voltage 𝑉G , the current biased and does not conduct. So out put would be
increases very sharply. In this region, the curve is half wave rectified and for half wave rectified out
almost vertical. It means voltage across zener put
diode is constant at 𝑉G even though the current 𝑉$ 200√2 200
𝑉EKL = = =
2 2 √2
Page|3
38 (a) 42 (c)
When, n-p-n transistor is used as a common base In photodiode, it is illuminated by light radiations,
amplifier, the emitter-base input circuit is which in turn produces electric current
forward biased and collector-base output circuit 43 (c)
is reverse biased. The given truth table express the Boolean
When 𝑖M , 𝑖2 , 𝑖N are emitter, base and collector expression as
current. 𝑌 =𝐴+𝐵
The arrow from base to emitter represents the Since, 0 = 0 + 0
direction of hole current that is the conventional 1= 0 + 1
current which is opposite to direction of electron 1=1+0
current. Thus, electrons move from emitter to 1=1+1
base. This the Boolean expression of OR gate.
39 (b) 44 (a)
In circuit the upper diode junction is forward
biased and the lower diode junction is reverse
biased. Thus there will be no conduction across
lower diode junction. Now the total resistance of
circuit= 100 + 150 + 50 = 300Ω
(
Current in 100Ω = = 0.02 A. A B C 𝐷 = 𝐴. 99999
𝐶 𝐸 = 99999
𝐶. 𝐵 Y
.$$
40 (c) 0 0 1 1 1 0
An 𝑛-type semiconductor is formed by doping 0 1 1 1 0 1
pure germanium or silicon crystal with suitable 1 0 1 0 1 1
impurity atoms of valence five. As the impurity 1 1 0 1 1 0
atoms take the positions of Ge atoms in 45 (b)
germanium crystal, its four electrons form At a particular reverse voltage in 𝑃𝑁-junction, a
covalent bonds by sharing electrons with the huge current flows in reverse direction known as
neighbouring four atoms of germanium whereas avalanche current
the fifth electron is left free. Since, the atom on the 46 (c)
F" $.(
whole is electricall neutral, the 𝑛-type 𝐸 = − FE = *$!$ = 6 × 10+ Vm'*
semiconductor is also neutral. 47 (b)
41 (a) Boron has valency three. When boron is doped in
At room temperature some covalent bonds break a pure semiconductor, then 𝑝-type semiconductor
and semiconductor behaves slightly as a is formed.
conductor

Page|4